IH-500_SM_H009231_EN_V2-3

IH-500
Service Manual
Identification
Identification
IH-500 Service Manual
Version 2.3 - 12/2020
Document: H009231
n j
o 001500 / 001500RECOND
Manufacturer
a DiaMed GmbH
Pra Rond 23
1785 Cressier FR
Switzerland
Technical Information Contacts

Tel. +41 (0)26 67 45 111
Fax +41 (0)26 67 45 145
Copyright ©
The reproduction, even partially, of this document is forbidden. No part may be copied in any form, and
it may not be used, edited nor transmitted by any electronic means (photocopy, photography, magnetic
supports or other recording processes), without the written authorization of Bio-Rad. All rights and
particularly reproduction, translation, edition, distribution and also industrial property and recording are
reserved.
Version History
Version Date Modification

1.0 07/2015 First edition.
2.0 02/2016 New page layout.
Updated the manual in accordance with the software version.
Revised:
• the unpacking and the installation;
• the Signal Frequency on page 153 for the Level Detection boards;
• the Electrical Connections (A00227i-EL Schematics) on page 426.
Extracted the chapter Spare Parts List and Accessories on page 411 and created a book.
2.1 07/2017 Added the user level required for the checks and adjustments procedure.
Corrected:
• the General Preventive Maintenance Table on page 346;
• the schematic Reagent Cooling (2/2) on page 425.
Revised:
• the description of the service software in accordance with the software version;
• the Block Adjustment on page 258;
• the list of Signs on page 23.
2.2 11/2018 Updated the manual in accordance with the software version.
2.3 12/2020 Updated the manual in accordance with the software version.
Added complementary information.
Updated:
• adjustment procedures;
• the preventive maintenance table;
• the troubleshooting chapter;
• the schematics in the appendix.
2 | IH-500
Table of Contents
Identification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2
Chapter 1 Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 13
1.1 Intended Use . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .13
1.2 Warranty Limitation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
1.3 Glossary . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
1.3.1 Persons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .14
1.3.2 Product . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .15
1.4 Typographical Conventions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.4.1 Warning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
1.4.2 Note. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .16
Chapter 2 Safety and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

2.1 Introduction . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.1.1 Principles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.1.2 Importance of the Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.1.3 Disregarding the Safety Rules. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .17
2.2 Environmental Conditions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .18
2.3 General Safety Instructions and Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .22
2.3.1 Special Safety Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.3.2 Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .23
2.3.3 Packaging Signs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .24
Chapter 3 Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 25
3.1 Technical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3.1.1 Dimensions and Weight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3.1.2 Electrical Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .26
3.1.3 Environmental Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.1.4 Emissions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .27
3.2 General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
3.2.1 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .28
3.2.2 Rear View. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .29
3.2.3 Internal View - Working Zone . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .30
3.2.4 Internal View - Lower Components. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .32
IH-500 | 3
3.3 Doors Opening, Closing and Locking (Doors open) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .33
3.4 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .34
3.4.1 Resources Identification (Numbering) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3.4.2 Right Drawer Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .35
3.4.3 Left Drawer Configuration. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .36
3.5 Transport Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .37
3.5.1 Transport Arm (Axis Rotation). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .38
3.5.2 Complete Gripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .39
3.6 Vision Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .40
3.7 Gel Cards Internal Storage. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .41
3.8 Gel Cards Piercer / Ionizer Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .42
3.9 Gel Cards Preparation Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .43
3.10 Pipetting Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .44
3.10.1 Samples Loading Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .45
3.10.2 Diluents Area (Pipetting and Piercing) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .46
3.10.3 Gel Cards Pipetting Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .47
3.10.4 Reagents Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .48
3.10.5 Pipettor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.10.5.1 Pipettor Module (Front View). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .49
3.10.5.2 Pipettor Module (Rear View) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .50
3.10.6 Washing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .51
3.11 Liquid Containers Area and Fluidic System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .52
3.11.1 Fluidic System . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .53
3.11.2 Fluidic System (Diagram) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .54
3.12 Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .55
3.13 Cooled Centrifuge Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .56
3.14 Solid Wastes Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .58
3.15 Main Frame Assembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
3.15.1 Front View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .59
3.15.2 Main Frame - Rear View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .60
3.16 Samples and Resources Racks and Trays . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3.16.1 Sample Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3.16.1.1 Sample Requirements ABO/Rh Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3.16.1.2 Antibody Screen Testing. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .61
3.16.1.3 Sample Block Barcode Label Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .62
3.16.1.4 STAT Sample Block Barcode Label Set . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .65
3.16.2 Gel Card Tray. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
3.16.3 Diluents Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .66
3.16.4 Removable Reagents Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67
3.17 Electronic Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3.17.1 Right View . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .68
3.17.2 Sample Loading Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
3.17.3 Pipettor Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .69
3.17.4 Centrifuges. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
3.17.5 Vision Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
3.17.6 Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .70
3.17.7 Complete Gripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
3.17.8 Reagent Module. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .71
4 | IH-500
3.18 Electrical System Diagram . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .72
3.19 0595077 (M20325) IH-500 Gauge Kit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .73
3.20 IH-500 Optional Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .75
Chapter 4 Commissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 77
4.1 Safety . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
4.1.1 General Safety Requirements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .77
4.1.2 Personnel Qualification . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
4.1.3 Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
4.1.3.1 Packing List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .78
4.1.3.2 Documents to fill in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
4.1.4 Location. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
4.2 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .79
4.2.1 IH-500 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .80
4.2.1.1 Installation with Forklift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .83
4.2.1.2 Manual Installation (Lifting Kit) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .84
4.2.2 Optional Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
4.2.2.1 Unpacking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .86
4.2.2.2 Installation with Forklift . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .88
4.3 Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .89
4.3.1 Leveling of the Instrument . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .90
4.3.2 Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
4.3.3 Sample Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
4.3.4 Removable Reagents Tray . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .92
4.3.5 Diluent Piercing Tips. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
4.3.6 Gel Cards Block . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .93
4.3.7 Hand-held Barcode Scanner Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
4.3.8 Keyboard Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .94
4.4 External Liquid Waste Optional Kit Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .95
4.5 Condensate Recovery Kit Installation (Optional) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
4.5.1 Optional Table with Right Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .97
4.5.2 Optional Table without Right Workstation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .98
4.5.3 Workbench . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .99
4.6 Installation with Optional Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
4.6.1 Leveling of the Optional Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .100
4.6.2 Instrument Installation on the Optional Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .101
4.6.3 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) and Battery Pack Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .102
4.6.4 Optional Table Solid Waste Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .104
4.6.5 Printer Installation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .108
4.6.6 Workstation Installation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .109
4.7 Electrical Connection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
4.7.1 Fuses Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
4.7.2 Connection to the Network . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .110
4.8 Blocking Device Removal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
4.8.1 Pipettor X-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
4.8.2 Pipettor Y-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
4.8.3 Pipettor Z-Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .112
4.8.4 Transport Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .113
IH-500 | 5
4.9 Centrifuge Trap Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .114
4.10 Maintenance and Pipettor Doors Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .115
4.11 Starting Procedure. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
4.11.1 Starting up . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .116
4.11.2 Software Pack Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
4.11.3 Language Configuration (OS, Keyboard and Barcode Scanner) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .117
4.11.4 Backup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .119
4.11.5 Global Controller Menu Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .120
4.11.6 Hydraulic Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .121
4.11.7 Configuration of the Pediatric and Low Volume Tubes . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .123
4.11.8 Final Check / QC (Autocheck) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .124
4.11.9 QC Client . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .125
Chapter 5 Checks and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

5.1 Service Software General Description . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.1.1 Access to Service Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .128
5.1.2 Main Screen and Software Structure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .130
5.1.3 Software Generalities . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.1.3.1 Contextual Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.1.3.2 Buttons . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.1.3.3 State Information . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .133
5.1.3.4 Axis Movements . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
5.1.3.5 Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .134
5.1.3.6 Information Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.1.3.7 Levels. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .135
5.2 Global Controller Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .136
5.3 State Module Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.3.1 Module In Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .137
5.3.2 Transport Arm in Error . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .138
5.4 Firmware Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
5.4.1 Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .140
5.4.1.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
5.4.1.2 Remark. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .141
5.4.1.3 Workaround . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .142
5.4.2 Transport Arm Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .143
5.4.2.1 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .144
5.4.2.2 Gripper Firmware Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .145
5.4.3 Transport Arm Error Logs. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .148
5.5 Input / Output Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
5.5.1 Input / Output Screen. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .149
5.5.1.1 Ionizer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .150
5.5.1.2 Fan. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
5.5.1.3 Internal Light. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .151
5.5.1.4 External Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5.5.1.5 Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .152
5.5.1.6 Signal Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5.5.1.7 Gripper Mapping Sensor (Resource Sensor) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .153
5.5.1.8 Sample Racks LED Strip Light . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .154
5.5.1.9 Sample Racks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .155
5.5.1.10 Drawers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
5.5.1.11 Doors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .156
5.5.1.12 Solid Waste Open/Close Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
5.5.1.13 Full Solid Waste Sensor Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .157
5.5.1.14 Full Solid Waste Sensor Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .159
5.5.2 Check Temperatures . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .162
6 | IH-500
5.6 Vision Station Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
5.6.1 Pre-Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .163
5.6.2 Camera Initialization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.6.3 Camera Pre-Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.6.3.1 Camera Azimuth. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .164
5.6.3.2 White Balance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .165
5.6.3.3 Aperture . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .166
5.6.3.4 Sharpness . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .167
5.6.3.5 Exposure Time . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .168
5.6.4 Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .169
5.6.5 Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .171
5.7 Transport Arm Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
5.7.1 Pre Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .176
5.7.1.1 Gripper - Resources Types. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .177
5.7.1.2 Gripper Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
5.7.1.3 Gripper Localization Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .178
5.7.1.4 Gripper Burn-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
5.7.1.5 Note about Gripper Tolerance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .181
5.7.2 Mapping. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .183
5.7.3 Transfer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .185
5.7.4 Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
5.7.4.1 Transfer Cycles - Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .188
5.7.4.2 Transfer Cycles - Reagents and Diluents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .190
5.7.4.3 Cards Piercing Cycles. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .191
5.7.4.4 Diluent Piercing Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .193
5.7.4.5 Cycles Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .194
5.7.5 Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .195
5.7.5.1 Touch Probe Installation (Probe Mounting) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .196
5.7.5.2 Gripper Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .198
5.7.5.3 J1 Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .203
5.7.5.4 Reading Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .204
5.7.5.5 Front Centrifuge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .205
5.7.5.6 Rear Centrifuge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .207
5.7.5.7 Front Centrifuge Trap Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .208
5.7.5.8 Rear Centrifuge Trap Door . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .209
5.7.5.9 Diluent Piercing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
5.7.5.10 Right Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .210
5.7.5.11 Left Drawer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .213
5.7.5.12 Internal Storage 1 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .215
5.7.5.13 Piercer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .216
5.7.5.14 Internal Storage 2 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
5.7.5.15 Preparation Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .217
5.7.5.16 Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .218
5.7.5.17 Pipetting Reagent Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .220
5.7.5.18 Pipetting Cards Block Area. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .222
5.7.5.19 Pipetting Diluent Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .223
5.7.5.20 Pipetting Sample Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
5.7.5.21 Diluent Swap Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .224
5.7.5.22 Diluent Intermediate Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .225
5.7.5.23 Washing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .226
5.7.5.24 Common Reference Point . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .227
5.7.5.25 Resources Sensor Localization . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .228
5.7.5.26 Gripper Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .230
5.7.5.27 Pipettor Teaching . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .231
5.7.5.28 Pipettor Area Update . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .232
5.7.6 Secure Posing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
5.7.6.1 Cards . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .233
5.7.6.2 Others . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .234
IH-500 | 7
5.8 Centrifuge Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
5.8.1 Pre Control – Front Centrifuge and Rear Centrifuge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .235
5.8.1.1 Front Centrifuge - Current Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .236
5.8.1.2 Rear Centrifuge - Current Position Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .238
5.8.1.3 Trap Door Open/Close Check (Auto-locking) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
5.8.1.4 Centrifugation Burn-In. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
5.8.1.5 Centrifugation Cycle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .240
5.9 Pipettor Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
5.9.1 Pre Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .244
5.9.1.1 Current Position Check. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
5.9.1.2 Procedure . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .245
5.9.2 Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .247
5.9.2.1 Reagents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .248
5.9.2.2 Card Blocks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .250
5.9.2.3 Diluents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .252
5.9.2.4 Samples . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .254
5.9.2.5 Washing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .255
5.9.2.6 Pipettor Position Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .256
5.9.3 Burn In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .257
5.9.4 Block Adjustment. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .258
5.10 Hydraulic Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
5.10.1 Units . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .262
5.10.1.1 Sensors . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .264
5.10.1.2 Hydraulic Components . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .266
5.10.2 Fluidic Circuits . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .273
5.10.2.1 Intermediate Container Filling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
5.10.2.2 Weekly Maintenance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .274
5.10.2.3 Needle Change. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
5.10.2.4 Needle Washing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .275
5.10.2.5 Fluidic Circuit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .276
5.10.2.6 Decontamination Well . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .279
5.10.2.7 Draining Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .281
5.10.2.8 PDS Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
5.10.2.9 Fluidic Circuits Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .282
5.10.3 Level Detection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .283
5.10.3.1 Level Detection Frequency . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
5.10.3.2 Level Detection in Reagent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .284
5.10.3.3 Level Detection in Sample Tube . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .286
5.10.3.4 Level Detection in Washing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .287
5.10.3.5 Level Detection Validation. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .288
5.10.4 Sampling / Dispensing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .289
5.10.4.1 Distribute Dilution . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .290
5.10.4.2 Distribute Plasma . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .292
5.10.4.3 Distribute Reagent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .294
5.10.4.4 Distribute Diluent . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .295
5.10.4.5 Sample. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .297
5.10.4.6 Sample CRBC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .300
5.10.4.7 Distribute . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .301
5.10.4.8 Wash . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
5.10.4.9 Sampling/Dispensing Validation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .302
5.11 Incubator Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
5.11.1 Incubator Temperature Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .303
8 | IH-500
5.12 Reagent Plate Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
5.12.1 Pre Control. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .307
5.12.1.1 Check Shaking Axis . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
5.12.1.2 Current Position . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .308
5.12.1.3 Burn-In . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .309
5.12.2 Cooling Adjustment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .310
5.13 Final Check / QC Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
5.13.1 Final Check . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .313
5.13.2 QC Cycles . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .315
5.14 Tools Menu . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
5.14.1 General Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .316
5.14.1.1 Database Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .317
5.14.1.2 System Snapshot . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
5.14.1.3 Parameters - Restore or Update Database . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .318
5.14.1.4 Transport Arm Adjustment Restore. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .320
5.14.1.5 Other Tools. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .321
5.14.1.6 User Management Configuration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
5.14.1.7 User Options . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .323
5.14.2 Check Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
5.14.2.1 Instrument Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .324
5.14.2.2 Electronic Boards Serial Numbers . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
5.14.2.3 Product Line. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
5.14.2.4 Software License Keys Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .325
5.14.2.5 Euresys License Activation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .326
5.14.2.6 Euresys License Recovery . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .330
5.14.2.7 Cooling Reagent Module Selection . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .335
5.14.3 Status . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .336
5.14.4 Pressure / Level Detection Curves . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .338
5.14.5 Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .340
5.14.6 IP Config . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
5.14.6.1 IP Address Setup . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .341
5.14.6.2 How to restore Default IP Address . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .342
5.14.6.3 Transport Arm IP Address Recovery. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .343
5.15 Exit . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .344
Chapter 6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

6.1 Warnings . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .345
6.2 Periodical Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
6.2.1 Preventive Maintenance Kits Contents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
6.2.2 General Preventive Maintenance Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .346
6.3 Cleaning and Decontamination Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
6.4 Cleaning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
6.4.1 Touch Screen, Doors and Cladding . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
6.5 Decontamination . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
6.5.1 Suitable Products. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .348
6.5.2 List of Parts to be decontaminated. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .349
IH-500 | 9
6.6 Specific Cleaning Instructions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
6.6.1 Camera Lens . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .352
6.6.2 Backlight . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
6.6.3 Liquid Container Area and Washing Station . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .353
6.6.4 Piercing Tip . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
6.6.5 Needle Localization Hole . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .354
6.6.6 Centrifuge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .355
6.6.7 Gripper. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .356
6.6.8 Computer. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .358
6.6.9 Power Supply and Reagent Cooling Module . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .359
6.6.10 Transport Arm Controler. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .360
6.6.11 Transport Arm Cover Axis 3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
6.6.12 Needle Cleaning. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .361
6.6.13 Decontamination Liquid Container . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .362
6.7 Visual Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
6.7.1 Gripper Legs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
6.7.2 Gel Card and Diluent Piercing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .363
6.7.3 Centrifuge Rubber Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
6.7.4 TU10, TU11, TU12 & TU13 Liquid Waste Tubing, Quick Connections . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .364
6.8 Functional Checks . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
6.8.1 Gel Card and Diluent Piercing Tips . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
6.8.2 Ionizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .365
6.8.3 Reagent Holders Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
6.8.4 Sample Tubes Holders Springs . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .366
6.8.5 Tool Reference Calibration . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
6.8.6 Left and Right Drawers. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .367
6.8.7 Camera . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .368
6.9 Replacement Procedures. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
6.10 Disassembly . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
6.10.1 Upper Right Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .369
6.10.2 Lower Right Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .370
6.10.3 Upper Left Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .371
6.10.4 Lower Left Panel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .372
6.10.5 Upper Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .373
6.10.6 Lower Rear Panel. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .374
10 | IH-500
Chapter 7 Troubleshooting . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 375
7.1 Alarms and Error Management . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .375
7.2 All Modules . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .376
7.3 Transport Arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .379
7.4 Centrifuge . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .384
7.5 Incubator . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .387
7.6 Pipetor. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .388
7.7 Access to the Pipetting Area . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .390
7.8 Ionizer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
7.9 Consumable Drawer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .391
7.10 Fluidic . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .392
7.11 Internal Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .399
7.12 Reagent Cooling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .400
7.13 Sample Rack . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .401
7.14 Software . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .402
7.15 Solid Waste . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .405
7.16 Vision Station. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .406
Chapter 8 Spare Parts List and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411
Chapter 9 Decommissioning, Storage and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

9.1 Decommissioning . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .413
9.2 Storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
9.2.1 Short Term Storage in Laboratory Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
9.2.2 Other Storage Conditions. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
9.3 Packing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .414
9.4 Disposal. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
9.4.1 Disassembly. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
9.4.2 Disposal Locations . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
9.4.3 Returning to the Manufacturer . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .415
9.4.4 Dismantling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
9.5 Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
9.5.1 Recommended Means of Transportation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
9.5.2 Transportation Data . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .416
Chapter 10 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

10.1 Equipment and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
10.1.1 IH-500 Equipment List . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .417
10.1.2 Optional Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
10.2 CE Compliance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
10.3 Documents / Forms . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
10.3.1 Decontamination Certificate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .418
10.3.2 Maintenance Table . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .420
10.4 Identification Plate . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .422
10.5 List of Documents . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
10.5.1 User Manuals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
10.5.2 Service Manual. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .423
10.6 Hydraulic Connections (A00227f-FL Schematics). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
10.6.1 Fluidic Connection (1/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .424
10.6.2 Reagent Cooling (2/2) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .425
IH-500 | 11
10.7 Electrical Connections (A00227i-EL Schematics) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
10.7.1 Automate Schematic (1/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .426
10.7.2 I/O Board (2/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .427
10.7.3 Pipettor (3/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .428
10.7.4 Fluidics (4/8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .429
10.7.5 Centrifuges (5/8). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .430
10.7.6 Centrifuge Cooling (6/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .431
10.7.7 Integration (7/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .432
10.7.8 Controller & Power Supply (8/8) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .433
10.8 Electronic Boards. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
10.8.1 E09982 - Main Power Supply Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .434
10.8.2 0595034 (E09972) - Fluidic Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .436
10.8.3 0595031 (E09978) - I/O Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .438
10.8.4 0595037 (E10904) - Pipetting Applicative Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .440
10.8.5 0590002 (E07722) - Novi-Core Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .441
10.8.6 0595036 (E09974) - PDS Applicative Board. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .442
10.8.7 (E10040) Pressure Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
10.8.8 0595029 (E09990) and 0590018 (E08818) Temperature Sensor Board
and 0595179 (E11248) Coated Temperature Sensor Box . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .443
10.8.9 0595028 (E09980) - Gripper Applicative Board
0595042 (E10026) - Motor Control Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .444
10.8.10 0595035 (E09984) - Sample Rack Detection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .445
10.8.11 0595030 (E09968) - Centrifuge Applicative Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .446
10.8.12 0595033 (E10928) - Cooling Driver Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .448
10.8.13 0595162 (E11246) - Level Detection Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
10.8.14 0595032 (E09986) - Pipetting Connective Board . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .450
10.9 Power Management (Fuses). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .451
Index . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 453
12 | IH-500
1 Generalities
This chapter contains basic information on the instrument and the document structure.
1.1 Intended Use

The IH-500 is an instrument to be exclusively used as an in vitro diagnostic device.
The IH-500 may only be used by trained and authorized personnel in a medical laboratory. It may not
be used in the patient’s direct environment.
Use of the IH-500 is only permitted in conjunction with the corresponding software or in a configuration
which is authorized by Bio-Rad.
Only use IH-500 with gel cards and reagent authorized by Bio-Rad. The use of any material other than
the one specified in the Service Manual (e.g. non-authorized substances) is forbidden.
b reference to the safety instructions.

The instructions contained in this Service Manual must be adhered to, with particular
Reliability of results is dependent upon compliance with good laboratory practices.
The User Manager module is required to define the IH-500 users and the related appropriate access
rights. The IH-500 cannot be operated without registered users.
Refer to the appendix B User Manager Module of the IH-500 User Manual for more information.
IH-500 | 13
Generalities
1.2 Warranty Limitation

Bio-Rad denies any responsibility in case of:
• wrong use of the instrument;
• unauthorized modification (willingly or unwillingly);
• not complying to the instructions contained in the manuals provided with the instruments and
software;
• non-compliance with the safety instructions contained in the manuals;
• damages linked with the use of the instrument, in particular any data loss or any financial loss which
could possibly be attached to the use of the software;
• if the instrument is used in a manner not specified by the manufacturer, the protection provided by
the instrument may be impaired.
When the instrument is connected to a host, the user takes the entire responsibility for an error-less
transmission of the results (hardware, software, firmware, etc...) to this system.
k Any
warranty will, be deemed void if fault is found to have been caused by maltreatment,
misuse, unauthorized maintenance of service or negligence of regular maintenance and service,
accidental damage, incorrect storage or use of the products for operations outside their
specified limitations, outside their specifications, contrary to the instructions given in this manual.
Each Bio-Rad IH-500 is tested by the manufacturer before shipping.
1.3 Glossary
The following terms, among others, are used in this manual.
1.3.1 Persons
Manufacturer
The manufacturer of the IH-500 is:
DiaMed GmbH
Pra Rond 23
1785 Cressier FR
Switzerland
Operator
The operator is the owner of a IH-500 when using it as its owner and when transferring it to a third-
party.
Personnel
The personnel gathers persons who have any kind of activity with the IH-500 and who are qualified in
accordance with the manufacturer’s requirements and who are consequently authorized.
Technical Personnel
The term «technical personnel» designates the duly trained persons, who are permitted to perform
specific tasks on the IH-500.For instance, an electrician is designated as technical personnel for the
activities linked to wiring the IH-500 to the electrical network.
14 | IH-500
Glossary
Personnel Qualifications
The personnel qualifications define the minimum requirements which must be met by the authorized
personnel.
Minor Injury
A Reversible injury that does not require medical treatment.
Moderate Injury
A Reversible injury that does require medical treatment.
Major Injury
The damage that is irreversible, causes handicap or death.
1.3.2 Product
Instrument
This is the IH-500 distributed by the manufacturer.
Bio-Rad Authorized Gel Card

Gel Card based on column agglutination technique including a Micro-Tube-System consumable where
the antigen-antibody binding is fixed in the Gel-Matrix.
b Only gel cards manufactured by Bio-Rad may be used in the instrument.

Assure that any operations performed by the user are in compliance with the instructions
for use of the gel card.
Sample
Content of any sample tube.
Bio-Rad Authorized Reagent

A Consumable substance or compound that is added to a system in order to get a chemical reaction.
Such a reaction is used to confirm the presence of another substance.
b Only reagents authorized by Bio-Rad may be used in the instrument. Assure that any
operations performed by the user are in compliance with the instruction for use of the
reagents.
Diluent
A Consumable dilution solution to produce a suspension with RBCs from Samples.
Consumable (Resource)
All items placed inside the Instrument by a user except Sample tubes.
Barcode
A Barcode based data tag (an identification tag attached to a Consumable or Sample that can be
automatically read by the Instrument).
IH-500 | 15
Generalities
RBC
Red Blood Cell.
APF
Assay Protocol File.
System
The complete Fully Integrated System hardware (PC integrated), software, Consumables and
operating procedures.
DMS
Data Management Software.
STAT
SAMPLE with high priority to be integrated in the current workflow of SAMPLE processing.
1.4 Typographical Conventions

The following styles are used in this manual.
1.4.1 Warning
b Toan designate:
imminent and dangerous situation which, if not avoided, may lead to major injury of the
user; or a potentially dangerous situation which, if not avoided, may lead to:
• moderate injury of user or in the tests being false;
• injury of user or in important delay in delivery of the test results.
1.4.2 Note
k Indicates:
• a preferred procedure or recommended use;
• a general or informative remark.
16 | IH-500
2 Safety and Handling
This chapter sets out safety instructions to ensure safe and trouble-free operation of the IH-500 and its
associated software. It also describes the handling and storage conditions.
2.1 Introduction
2.1.1 Principles
Before carrying out any operation on the IH-500, it is imperative to read this chapter and fully
understand it.
In case of any doubt, consult your Instrument support.
2.1.2 Importance of the Safety Instructions

All the safety instructions in this Service Manual and on the instrument must be complied with in order
to prevent accidents to persons, damage to equipment or pollution of the environment.
In a similar manner, the legal bylaws and the recognized technical rules which apply in the country of
use of the IH-500 must be adhered to.
2.1.3 Disregarding the Safety Rules

Disregarding the safety rules, as well as existing legal and technical regulations, may lead to accidents,
property damages or environmental pollution.
Disregarding the instructions for use given by the manufacturer may reduce the level of protection
offered by the instrument.
IH-500 | 17
Safety and Handling
2.2 Environmental Conditions

Electro-medical equipment needs special precautions regarding EMC and needs to be installed and
put into service according to the EMC information provided in this manual.
b The IH-500 may not be exposed to direct sunlight, heat, dust or excessive humidity (use
The IH-500 must be kept away from potential sources of interference.
only in a clean laboratory environment).
b may interfere with proper operation.

The instrument must not be located near sources of high electromagnetic radiation which
The use of the instrument in a dry environment especially if synthetic materials are
present (clothes, synthetic carpets, etc.) may cause electrostatic discharges and lead to
false results.
k Assess
the electromagnetic environment of the site in which the IH-500 is located before
switching it on.
k The
recommended maximum length for the power cable is 2.5 meters.
The use of accessories, transducers and cables other than those specified, with the exception of
transducers and cables sold by Bio-Rad as replacement parts for internal components, may
result in increased emissions or decreased immunity of IH-500.
IH-500 should not be used adjacent to or stacked with other equipment. If adjacent or stacked
use is necessary, IH-500 should be monitored to verify normal operation in the configuration in
which it will be used.
IH-500 complies with the EMC requirements according to IEC 61326-2-6.

It should be considered to perform an electromagnetic survey before putting the IH-500 into operation.
IH-500 is intended for use in the electromagnetic environment specified below. The customer or the
user of IH-500 should ensure that it is used in such an environment.
Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance

RF emissions Group 1 IH-500 uses RF energy only for its internal function.
CISPR 11 Therefore, its RF emissions are very low and are not likely to cause any
interference in nearby electronic equipment.
RF emissions Class B IH-500 is suitable for use in all establishments including domestic
CISPR 11 establishments and those directly connected to the public low-voltage
Harmonic emissions Compliant power supply network that supplies buildings used for domestic
purposes.
IEC 61000-3-2
Voltage fluctuations/ Compliant
flicker emissions
IEC 61000-3-3
18 | IH-500
Environmental Conditions
Electromagnetic environment -
Immunity test IEC 60601 test level Compliance level guidance
Electrostatic ±6 kV contact ±6 kV contact Floors should be wood, concrete or
discharge (ESD) ceramic tile. If floors are covered with
IEC 61000-4-2 synthetic material, the relative humidity
±8 kV air ±8 kV air
should be at least 30%.
Electrical fast ±2 kV for power supply lines ±2 kV for power Mains power quality should be that of a
transient burst ±1 kV for lines no input/output supply lines typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-4 ±1 kV for lines no environment.
input/output
Shock waves ±1 kV line to line ±1 kV line to line Mains power quality should be that of a
IEC 61000-4-5 ±2 kV line to earth ±2 kV line to earth typical commercial or hospital
environment.
Voltage dips and <5% UT <5% UT Mains power quality should be that of a
outages (>95% dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle (>95% dip in UT) for 0.5 cycle typical commercial or hospital
IEC 61000-4-11 environment. If the user of IH-500
40% UT 40% UT
requires continued operation during
(60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles (60% dip in UT) for 5 cycles
power mains interruptions, it is
70% UT 70% UT recommended that IH-500 be powered
(30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles (30% dip in UT) for 25 cycles from an uninterruptible power supply or
<5% UT <5% UT a battery.
(>95% dip in UT) for 5 sec (>95% dip in UT) for 5 sec
Power frequency 3 A/m 3 A/m Power frequency magnetic fields
(50/60 Hz) should be at levels characteristic of a
magnetic field typical location in a typical commercial
IEC 61000-4-8 or hospital environment.
NOTE: UT is the a.c. mains voltage prior to application of the test level.
IH-500 | 19
Safety and Handling
IEC 60601 test

Immunity test level Compliance level Electromagnetic environment - guidance
Conducted RF 3 Vrms 3 Vrms Portable and mobile RF communications equipment should be
IEC 61000-4-6 150 kHz to 80 used no closer to any part of IH-500, including cables, than the
MHz recommended separation distance calculated from the equation
applicable to the frequency of the transmitter.
Recommended separation distance:
d = 1.2 P : 150 kHz to 80 MHz
d = 1.2 P : 80 MHz to 800 MHz
d = 2.3 P : 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
where P is the maximum output power rating of the transmitter
Radiated RF 3 V/m 3 V/m in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer and d is
IEC 61000-4-3 80 MHz to 2,5 the recommended separation distance in meters (m).
GHz Field strengths from fixed RF transmitters, as determined by an
electromagnetic site survey (a) should be less than the
compliance level in each frequency range (b).
Interference may occur in the vicinity of equipment
marked with the following symbol:
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
a) Field strengths from fixed transmitters, such as base stations for radio (cellular/cordless) telephones and land mobile radios,
amateur radio, AM and FM radio broadcast and TV broadcast cannot be predicted theoretically with accuracy. To assess the
electromagnetic environment due to fixed RF transmitters, an electromagnetic site survey should be considered. If the measured
field strength in the location in which the IH-500 is used exceeds the applicable RF compliance level above, the IH-500 should be
observed to verify normal operation.
If abnormal performance is observed, additional measures may be necessary, such as reorienting or relocating the IH-500.
b) Over the frequency range 150 kHz to 80 MHz, field strengths should be less than 3 V/m.
20 | IH-500
Environmental Conditions
The IH-500 is intended for use in an electromagnetic environment in which radiated RF disturbances
are controlled. The customer or the user of the IH-500 can help prevent electromagnetic interference
by maintaining a minimum distance between portable and mobile RF communications equipment
(transmitters) and the IH-500 as recommended below, according to the maximum output power of the
communications equipment.
Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]

150 kHz to 80 MHz 80 MHz to 800 MHz 800 MHz to 2.5 GHz
Rated maximum output power of
transmitter [W] d = 1.2 P d = 1.2 P d = 2.3 P
0.01 0.12 0.12 0.23
0.1 0.38 0.38 0.73
1 1.2 1.2 2.3
10 3.8 3.8 7.3
100 12 12 23
For transmitters rated at a maximum output power not listed above, the recommended separation distance d in meters (m) can
be estimated using the equation applicable to the frequency of the transmitter, where P is the maximum output power rating of
the transmitter in watts (W) according to the transmitter manufacturer.
NOTE 1: At 80 MHz and 800 MHz, the higher frequency range applies.
NOTE 2: These guidelines may not apply in all situations. Electromagnetic propagation is affected by absorption and reflection
from structures, objects and people.
b The
IH-500 may only be used indoors and never in the immediate vicinity of patients.
The electrical safety of the IH-500 is guaranteed only if the electrical installation of the
building complies with national regulations applicable to buildings for medical purposes
or laboratories and if this installation is functioning perfectly.
The IH-500 may not be used in premises subject to risks of fire or explosion.
b As
for any other electrical device, the IH-500 may not be located near a water tap.
Do not allow any liquid to penetrate inside the housing of any instrument. In case of major
spillages of liquid inside any instrument, proceed immediately as follows:
A. Switch off the IH-500 at the power switch.
B. Disconnect the plug.
C. Dry the instrument.
D. Clean and decontaminate the instrument.
E. Check all electrical functions.
k For more information, contact your Instrument support.
IH-500 | 21
Safety and Handling
2.3 General Safety Instructions and Signs
b The IH-500 is not flame resistant. Sparks may cause a fire or an explosion.
FLAME RESISTANCE
Do not install the IH-500 in the vicinity of inflammable or explosive products.
b The IH-500 is not protected against water penetrations. Water penetrating the instrument
CONTACT WITH WATER
may cause an electrical discharge.

Do not install the IH-500 in the vicinity of water or in any place where a risk of water
penetration is possible.
b appointed by the manufacturer

Repair and service operations must only be performed by a qualified service engineer
The sole possession of the service manual does not allow the personnel to perform any
kind of repair on the IH-500.
Take into account all the warnings and follow all instructions provided on the IH-500 and
in the documentation.
The IH-500 may only be connected to the electrical power sources specified.
It is imperative to use the liquids specified in the manual to clean the IH-500. If you intend
using a different liquid, do so only after consulting the manufacturer and receiving his
approval.
The use of materials other than those defined in the Service Manual (unauthorized
hazardous substances such as inflammable, explosive or chemically unstable
substances) is forbidden. Any infringement of this rule will be considered by the
manufacturer as guilty negligence.
Never attempt to use spare parts other than those supplied by the manufacturer.
b Reagents,
Gel cards, samples, liquid and solid wastes should be considered potentially
infectious. Before performing any operation on IH-500 the instrument must be
decontaminated. Local safety regulations and good laboratory practice must be followed.
It is imperative to wear protective gloves when decontaminating the instrument and
working with potentially infectious materials.
For any other materials referred to in this manual (e.g NaOH, Wash Solution A, Microcide
SQ™ or Micro 10®+) corresponding safety data sheets should be consulted before the
first use, adequate protective measures should be applied and any applicable regulations
should be followed.
b the optional table.

The instrument may only be placed on a flat surface capable of bearing its weight, or on
Do not place anything on top or above IH-500.

The IH-500 must be located near to an electrical wall socket to avoid using an extension
power cable.
The IH-500 must be located in such a manner that operating its disconnecting devices
(the main power switch and the separable plug of the power cable) is possible at all times.
In the latter case, the socket outlet must be placed near the equipment and must be
easily accessible by the operator.
Ensure that the ventilation around the IH-500 is sufficient to avoid any excessive heating
which may cause malfunctions and/or failure of the instrument. A space of 300 mm
(11.8 in) on left and right sides of the instrument must be left clear of any obstacle (50 mm
spacers are installed by default on the rear of the instrument).
b except in case of an emergency.

Always stop the IH-500 with the SHUTDOWN function. Never use the main power switch,
Always disconnect the power cable before accessing internal parts of the instrument. A
contact with live conductors may cause an electrocution.
22 | IH-500
General Safety Instructions and Signs
b approved by the manufacturer (example: handheld barcode scanner).

The IH-500 may only be operated with the software supplied and with the accessories
Always scan USB devices (USB key, camera...) with adapted anti-virus software prior to
connecting to the instrument.
Make sure that the LIS is equipped with the necessary protection to ensure no virus nor
access is transmitted to the IH-500.
Never modify or suppress any file from any PC. Files are maintained up to date by the
tools provided to the FSE.
Never configure any OS automatic update.
Always perform a backup before any intervention on the instrument.
k This class (B) apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

2.3.1 Special Safety Instructions
Appropriate safety instructions are mentioned in the specific chapters. They should be observed in the
same way as the general safety instructions contained in this chapter.
In case of defective operation or any other technical incident for which no remedy is described in the
Service Manual, please contact the manufacturer or your Instrument support immediately.
2.3.2 Signs
The following signs can be found on the IH-500. Associated risks are explained in the table.
Sign Description Explanation

Caution, consult -
accompanying
documents
Biological hazard INFECTION

All blood samples should be considered potentially infectious. Contact with skin/
mucous membranes must be avoided.
Always wear protective gloves when working with gel cards, sample tubes, waste
bin and with any instrument, in accordance with laboratory safety regulations.
All biological waste must be handled and treated by the user before disposal in
accordance with local procedures and directives.
High voltage danger ELECTROCUTION
During maintenance work, use extreme caution at all times when the IH-500 is
powered and uncovered; the instrument must not be left unmonitored.
Avoid using non-isolated metallic parts to work inside the instrument such as
screwdrivers.
Laser beam danger CLASS 2 LASER - PERMANENT EYESIGHT INJURY
• Never look directly into the barcode reader laser beam.
• Never modify, open or remove any protections of the laser beam.
• Never interrupt the laser beam with a reflecting object.
Most metals reflect the laser beam.
Burning danger HOT SURFACE
Contact may cause burns. Do not touch.
Electrostatic shock ELECTROSTATIC

danger Use appropriate protection to manipulate boards (antistatic wrist strap or gloves)
High voltage danger DO NOT TOUCH - ELECTROCUTION

During maintenance work, use extreme caution after switching off the IH-500.
Do NOT TOUCH the power supply during the next five minutes.
IH-500 | 23
Safety and Handling
Sign Description Explanation

Corrosive product CORROSIVE
Causes severe burns.
Avoid contact with skin and eyes.
Do not push Pushing on the side panels deforms the main frame of the instrument.
Main power switch Power ON
Main power switch Power OFF
Protective earthing EARTH GROUND

Indicates where the internal ground of each elements of the instrument is
connected.
2.3.3 Packaging Signs

Sign Description
Fragile, handle with care
Keep dry
Keep upright
Maximum and minimum humidity limitation
Maximum and minimum temperature limit
Hand trucks must not be used on this side to handle the package.
stacking limit by number

Not to be vertically stacked higher than the specified number of items.
n
Phytosanitary treatment of the pallet
Serial Number
SN
24 | IH-500
3 Description
This chapter describes in detail the components of the IH-500.
IH-500 | 25
Description
3.1 Technical Data

3.1.1 Dimensions and Weight
Instrument and Optional Accessories
Description Instrument Optional table Battery pack UPS (220 V / 110 V)

Width 1150 mm (45.28 in) 1204 mm (47.40 in) 440 mm (17.32 in) 440 mm (17.32 in)
Width (1 workstation) - 1745 mm (68.70 in) - -
Width (2 workstations) - 2283 mm (89.88 in) - -
Height 980 mm (38.58 in) 653 mm (25.71 in) 90 mm (3.54 in) 90 mm (3.54 in)
Height (with optional - 972 mm (38.27 in) - -
table workstation)
Depth 850 mm (33.46 in) 812 mm (31.97 in) 490 mm (19.29 in) 700 mm (27.56 in)
Depth (doors open) 1410 mm (55.51 in) 1354 mm (53.31 in) - -
Weight 213 kg (470 Ib) 100 kg (220 Ib) 29 kg (63.9 Ib) 41 kg (90.4 Ib)
Weight (with UPS and - 170 kg (375 Ib) - -
battery pack)
Commissioning (Crates)
Description Instrument Optional table Battery pack UPS (220 V) UPS (110 V)
Width 1450 mm 1450 mm 570 mm 580 mm 580 mm
(57.09 in) (57.09 in) (22.44 in) (22.83 in) (22.83 in)
Height 1230 mm 388 mm (15.28 in) 225 mm 225 mm 220 mm
(48.43 in) (08.86 in) (8.86 in) (8.66 in)
Depth 1080 mm 1075 mm (42.32 680 mm 825 mm 880 mm
(42.52 in) in) (26.77 in) (32.48 in) (34.65 in)
Weight 326.5 kg 130 kg 36 kg 48 kg 48 kg
(720 Ib) (286 Ib) (79.4 Ib) (105.8 Ib) (105.8 Ib)
Weight (with UPS and - 200 kg - - -
battery pack) (440 Ib)
3.1.2 Electrical Data

Power supply Connection on a standard system (presence of normal overvoltage)
Voltage 100-120V/230 VAC
Frequency 50/60 Hz
Power 1550 VA maximum
k connected to a protective earth.

The IH-500 earthing protection is via the power cable therefore the mains power supply must be
The instrument must be powered by an earthed mains power supply.

The power cable must be replaced by a power cable which is in accordance with local
regulations. Voltage/Current specifications are: 230V/8A or 110V/20A.
26 | IH-500
Technical Data
3.1.3 Environmental Conditions

Operating temperature 18°C (64.4°F) to 28°C (82.4°F)
Storage & transport temperature -20°C (-4°F) to 55°C (131°F)
Relative humidity, no condensing 5 to 80% rh (storage, transport and operating)
Power fluctuation ±10%
Transient over-voltage Category II
Max. altitude 2000 m (6’562 feet)
Figure 1.
3.1.4 Emissions
Heat emission 1000 W max.
Noise 65 dB (A) max
Pollution level 2
IH-500 | 27
Description
3.2 General Description

3.2.1 Front View
10
1
8
7
2
6
4
5
3
Figure 2.
1 Pipetting area door (equipped with a window)

2 Samples loading area
3 Liquid containers door (liquid waste and system liquid)
4 Right drawer (gel cards loading only)
5 Solid waste area door
Access to solid waste bin, decontamination liquid container (NaOH), cleaning liquid container,
keyboard and 1 USB port
6 Left drawer (gel cards, reagents and diluent loading and output)
7 Instrument power button
8 Touch-screen (18.5”)
9 Maintenance access door
10 Status light
28 | IH-500
General Description
3.2.2 Rear View
12 1
11
3
10
9 4
7
8
5
6
Figure 3.
1 Handheld barcode scanner

2 Handheld barcode scanner holder
3 Left USB port
4 Main power switch
5 Teflon sliders
6 Adjustable foot
7 USB and RJ45 ports
8 Rear central foot
9 Electrical connections and fuses
10 Identification plate
A second identification plate is in the Solid wastes area, refer to section Solid Wastes Area on
page 58.
11 Wall spacer
12 Fan V2
IH-500 | 29
Description
3.2.3 Internal View - Working Zone
1 Reagents pipetting and cooling area

2 Gel cards pipetting area (4 x blocks)
3 Diluent pipetting area (3 racks)
4 Washing station
5 Sample racks loading and pipetting area
6 Pipetting area
7 Intermediate diluent position
8 Right drawer (input) for gel cards only (up to 36 gel cards)
9 Transport arm (6 axis robot)
10 Left drawer (input/output) for gel cards (up to 36), reagents (up to 17) and diluents (up to 4)
11 Touchscreen
12 Centrifuge trap door for access to front cooled centrifuge (closed)
13 Gel cards internal storage (up to 98 gel cards)
14 Centrifuge trap door for access to rear cooled centrifuge (open)
15 Ionizer power supply
16 Gel cards piercer area
17 Vision station
18 Gel cards preparation area (up to 32 cards)
19 Incubator 37°C
20 Pipettor
30 | IH-500
General Description
16
15 20
17
18
1
14
19
2
13
3
12 4
5
7
10 8
11 6
Figure 4.
IH-500 | 31
Description
3.2.4 Internal View - Lower Components
9
6
5 10
7
8
2
3
1
Figure 5.
1 Liquid containers
2 Solid waste
3 Cleaning liquid container (storage area)
4 Front cooled centrifuge (12 gel cards)
5 Rear cooled centrifuge (12 gel cards)
6 Centrifuge cover
7 Centrifuge trapdoor (open)
8 Computer
9 Reagent cooling module
If there is an excessive noise or not enough cold produced, this may be caused by a lack of
cooling liquid in the compressor. Refer to the notification IH-500 NI Filling Cooling v2.1 for more
information.
10 Power supply and transport arm controller
32 | IH-500
Doors Opening, Closing and Locking (Doors open)
3.3 Doors Opening, Closing and Locking (Doors open)

The solid wastes area door and the liquid containers door are kept closed by magnets. They can be
opened at any time.
To open the pipetting area door, the instrument must not be operating. An electromagnetic latch
controls opening of the door.
To open the maintenance door, the pipetting area door must be open. A mechanical latch allows to
open or close the maintenance door.
5
6
2
3
1
1
4 4
3
Figure 6.
1 Magnet and metallic washer

2 Magnet
3 Rubber stop
4 Magnet
5 Mechanical latch
6 Electromagnetic latch
IH-500 | 33
Description
3.4 Drawers
Two drawers on the front of the IH-500 allow the user to load and unload the resources. The drawers
are locked by a magnetic latch and actuated manually. They can not be inverted.
The electromagnetic latch is managed by the I/0 board.
The embedded sensor of the transport arm detects the type, number and position of the resources
loaded in the drawer.
5
6 8
7
4
3
1
Figure 7.
1 Right drawer
2 Left drawer
3 Drawers frame
4 Warning label to inform the user about correct & wrong gel card tray positioning
5 Drawer slide
6 Full solid waste sensor
8 Drawer ejector
34 | IH-500
Drawers
3.4.1 Resources Identification (Numbering)
1
13 1 2 3
13 24
14 1 2 3 4
4 5 6
15
16
7 8 9
17 36
25
10 11 12
12
Left drawer Right drawer
25
13
1 12
14
15
16
17 13 24
36
Figure 8.
3.4.2 Right Drawer Configuration

The right drawer is only dedicated to gel cards (input). It is possible to load 3 trays, each tray can
contain 12 gel cards. Imprints clearly indicate how to load the trays in the drawer.
Gel cards tray Diluent Reagent Configuration

3 x 12 0 0
IH-500 | 35
Description
3.4.3 Left Drawer Configuration

The left drawer offers multiple loading options for reagents vials, ID-Diluent racks and gel card trays
(input and output). Imprints clearly indicate how to load the resources.
A sticker placed on the drawer indicates the correct positioning of the gel cards trays.
Gel cards tray Diluent Reagent Configuration

0 4 17
1 x 12 2 17
1 x 12 2 11
2 x 12 2 5
2 x 12 0 11
3 x 12 0 5
36 | IH-500
Transport Arm
3.5 Transport Arm

The transport arm moves samples, resources and components from one area to another in the working
zone of the IH-500. It is a 6 axes robot programmed to detect its environment.
X Y
Z axis orientation
2
3
1
Figure 9.
1 Transport arm
2 Complete gripper
3 Working zone (outlined red)
IH-500 | 37
Description
3.5.1 Transport Arm (Axis Rotation)

Axis and rotation direction are written on each part of the transport arm.
J3
J4
J5
J6
J2
J1
Figure 10.
b axes robot as this could damage the instrument.

During any technical intervention on the instrument, never move manually any of the 6
38 | IH-500
Transport Arm
3.5.2 Complete Gripper

The complete gripper detects the type and position of the resources with the mapping sensor. No
contact is needed. The grippers handles the components.
Figure 11.
1 Gripper legs
2 Gripper motor
3 Mapping sensor
4 Gripper applicative board
5 Motor control board
IH-500 | 39
Description
3.6 Vision Station

The vision station are:
• reads barcodes to identify the type of resources;
• captures pictures of reagents and samples to verify them (e.g. cap detection, volume control,
sample tubes diameter detection);
• captures pictures of the gel cards to analyze them with the data management software.
The vision station includes a barcode reader (1D), a camera with a back-light and a protective cover
which allows easy access to adjust the vision station.
Samples and reagent 1D barcodes are identified by the barcode reader and all other resources
(including reagent 2D barcode) by the vision camera before and during the whole process.
After centrifugation, the transport arm takes the gel card to the vision station, reads the gel card and
then sends it either to the waste bin or to the left drawer.
5
4
7
6
3
2
1
Figure 12.
1 Support
2 Camera assembly with lens
3 Internal temperature sensor
4 Protective cover
5 Field of camera vision
6 Samples barcode reader
7 Back-light
40 | IH-500
Gel Cards Internal Storage
3.7 Gel Cards Internal Storage

The gel cards internal storage is the main storage area for gel cards.
It is possible to store 92 gel cards. Each location can receive one gel card.
The gel cards internal storage includes:
• the front centrifuge cover and trapdoor;
• the internal storage frame (gel card slots);
• blocking screw to lock the frame in operating postilion;
• hinges and the mechanical latch to rotate and lock the frame in maintenance position.
For maintenance, it is possible to rotate the internal storage frame 90° towards the left of the instrument
and lock with the mechanical latch.
The maintenance position allows access to the centrifuges.
3
6 5
2 7
1
Figure 13.
1 Front centrifuge cover

2 Front centrifuge trapdoor (closed)
3 Hinges
4 Locking system
5 Maintenance position
6 Gel cards support
7 Blocking screw
IH-500 | 41
Description
3.8 Gel Cards Piercer / Ionizer Module

The gel card piercer / ionizer module is positioned to the rear left, above the vision station. Its function
is to pierce the gel cards aluminum protection foil.
The instrument is equipped:
• with one unique piercer, each well of the gel cards are pierced separately;
• with one ionization system (2500 VCC), which allows to ensure quality, accuracy and improve the
effectiveness of the dispense phase.
The associated ionization electronics is managed by the fluidic board (E09972-0595034).
Figure 14.

2 Gel card piercing tip
3 Ionizer
4 Ionizer cover
42 | IH-500
Gel Cards Preparation Area
3.9 Gel Cards Preparation Area

The gel cards preparation area is part of the internal frame and consists of 8 locations which can each
receive a gel card block with 4 x gel cards.
This area allows:
• preparation of gel cards before pipetting operations;
• incubation at ambient temperature after pipetting;
• preparation of gel cards before incubation at 37°C;
• preparation of gel cards before transport to the vision station.
Figure 15.
1 Blocks preparation area

2 Gel cards block
3 Internal storage (no longer used)
IH-500 | 43
Description
3.10 Pipetting Area

The pipetting operations and the distribution between the resources and samples are realized in the
pipetting area.
The pipetting area includes the following areas:
• Sample racks loading and pipetting area;
• Diluents pipetting and piercing area;
• Reagents pipetting and cooling area;
• Gel cards pipetting area;
• Pipettor;
• Washing station.
Z
X Axis orientation
Y
6
7
2
Figure 16.
1 Sample racks loading and pipetting area

2 Gel cards pipetting area
3 Internal frame
4 Reagents pipetting and cooling area
5 Pipettor
6 Diluents pipetting and piercing area
7 Washing station
44 | IH-500
Pipetting Area
3.10.1 Samples Loading Area

The samples loading area allows to load racks at any time according to instrument needs. It is possible
to load sample racks in any of the 5 grids available.
Each grid is numbered and a led indicates the status of each grid (green: free or rack restored, red: rack
loaded, blinking red (quickly): sample rack in error, blinking red (slowly): rack restoring).
Each sample rack can contain two sample blocks (2 x 5 sample tubes) which are handled by the
transport arm.
To load a sample rack, completely insert it (about 3 mm inside the grid). The sample rack is detected by
the instrument and can no longer be manipulated. The sample rack is in operation position. To unload a
sample rack, the system unlocks it and the transport arm moves it out of the grid (about 30 mm out).
The sample rack is in standby position.
The grids panel allows an easy access to the pipetting area in case of incident in this zone.
8 9
7 4
6
3
5
2 1
Figure 17.
1 Sample rack detection board

2 Grids frame
3 Sample area LED display
4 Grids panel (operating position)
5 Sample rack
6 Sample block
7 Sample tube spring
8 Tubes
9 Grids panel (maintenance position)
IH-500 | 45
Description
3.10.2 Diluents Area (Pipetting and Piercing)

Three diluent racks can be loaded in the diluents area.
Racks are identified and then locked in position by the transport arm.
The diluents area includes two piercing tips located near the transport arm foot.
When necessary, the transport arm moves the piercing tip to the diluents area to pierce the diluent
wells of the rack. The rear tip is used to pierce ID-Diluent 1 racks and the front for tip for ID-Diluent 2
racks.
An intermediate diluent position and swap position are available on the internal frame next to the
sample area. These areas are intermediate positions used before pipetting and piercing operations.
6
5
4
1
3
Figure 18.
1 Intermediate diluent area

2 Diluent swap area (diluent rack to be positioned in the intermediate area rep. (1))
3 Diluent rack
4 Piercing tips (storage area)
5 Diluent lock
6 Diluent pipetting and piercing area
46 | IH-500
Pipetting Area
3.10.3 Gel Cards Pipetting Area

The gel cards pipetting area consists of 4 locations which can each receive a block with 4 x gel cards.
One location always remains empty for urgent sample process (STAT).
Figure 19.
1 Gel cards block

2 Gel cards pipetting area
IH-500 | 47
Description
3.10.4 Reagents Module

The reagent module is designed to maintain up to 34 reagent bottles in suspension at a controlled
temperature during maximum 7 days.
The system is equipped with a reagent mixing motor to agitate the reagents vials. The duration and
frequency of the agitation cycles are managed by the instrument.
A cooling system maintains the temperature of reagents at 14°C to 18°C. The temperature is controlled
by sensors.
If reagents remain loaded in the instrument during standby mode of the system, the cooling module
remains in operation mode.
5
4 6 6
Figure 20.
1 Gearings box
2 Cooling plate
3 Cooling module input
4 Cooling module output
5 Reagent mixing motor
6 Coated temperature sensor box
7 Reagent holder and reagent holder spring
48 | IH-500
Pipetting Area
3.10.5 Pipettor Module

The pipettor module is a 3 dimensional Cartesian axis robot.
It is composed of the sampling needle, a complete sampling module:
• three linear rulers;
• three stepper motors;
• three encoders (X and Z axis encoders are the same).
3.10.5.1 Pipettor Module (Front View)
5 9
6
7
10
11
2
3 1
Figure 21.
1 Pipettor Y axis encoder

2 Cable chains
3 Pipettor Y axis belt
4 Ruler (Y axis)
5 Protection covers
6 Needle and support
7 Pipettor X & Z axis encoder (Z)
8 Pipettor X & Z axis encoder (X)
9 PDS applicative board
10 Pipettor connection board
11 Ruler (X axis)
IH-500 | 49
Description
3.10.5.2 Pipettor Module (Rear View)
10
11
8
12
7 1
13
6
3
5
Figure 22.
1 Gearing rack (Z axis)

2 Pipettor Z axis motor with pulley
3 Pipettor X axis belt
4 Ruler (Y axis)
5 Pipettor Y axis belt
6 Pipettor X axis motor with pulley
7 Complete sampling module
8 Pressure board
9 Pump
10 Solenoid valves
11 Level detection board
12 Ruler (Z axis)
13 Pipettor Y axis motor with pulley
50 | IH-500
Pipetting Area
3.10.6 Washing Station

The Washing station allows:
• to wash the system (with system liquid);
• to decontaminate the needle (with decontamination liquid (NaOH));
• to drain the needle.
Depending on which type of resources the needle is contact with, washing is performed according to
these two needle statuses:
• if NOT in contact with contaminated samples, the needle has the status “soiled” and it is rinsed with
system liquid;
• if in contact with contaminated samples, the needle has the status “contaminated” and is washed
with decontamination liquid (NaOH) and rinsed with system liquid.
Figure 23.
1 Liquid waste coupling

2 Collect well
3 Decontamination well
4 Overflow well
5 Solenoid valves
IH-500 | 51
Description
3.11 Liquid Containers Area and Fluidic System Diagram

The liquid containers area includes the three following containers:
• the system liquid container which allows to rinse the system;
• the decontamination liquid container (NaOH) to decontaminate the needle;
• the liquid waste container for contaminated liquids.
The three types of containers can not be inverted.
The equipped intermediate tank has a buffer function to create a volume exempt of impurities (< 10 μm)
between the system liquid containers and the washing station.
1
1
2
5 4
2
3
Figure 24.
1 Liquid waste containers

2 System liquid containers
3 Decontamination liquid container
4 Overflow area
5 External drain (optional)
6 Fluidic system
7 Washing station
8 Intermediate tank
52 | IH-500
Liquid Containers Area and Fluidic System Diagram
3.11.1 Fluidic System
7
7
7
5 5
6 6
5
5
2
2
1
1
4
4
1
1
1
Figure 25.
1 Container level sensor (5x)

2 Fluidic filters 25 μm (2x)
3 Overflow sensor
4 Container presence sensor (4x)
5 Pump (4x)
6 Fork sensor (4x)
7 Solenoid valve (3x)
8 Solenoid valves
IH-500 | 53
Description
3.11.2 Fluidic System (Diagram)
Figure 26.
54 | IH-500
Incubator
3.12 Incubator
The incubator module allows to incubate the gel cards at 37°C (98.6°F).
It includes:
• an incubation area with 28 locations for gel cards;
• a cabled heating base;
• two sensors which allow temperature regulation.
Figure 27.
1 Temperature sensor (regulated)

2 Incubator module
3 Temperature sensor (redundant)
4 Heating base
IH-500 | 55
Description
3.13 Cooled Centrifuge Module

The centrifuge module is composed of 2 cooled centrifuges which can each contain 12 gel cards.
Once the selected gel cards are loaded, the centrifuge is available for a cycle. To maintain balancing of
the centrifuge, the system always loads an even number of gel cards.
Each centrifuge has a top cover with a trapdoor. This trapdoor is open for loading, unloading and gel
cards presence detection.
Each centrifuge is equipped with a cooling system to maintain an internal temperature range at 18°C to
25°C during a cycle. The temperature is controlled by a sensor.
5
4
2
3
Figure 28.
1 Complete centrifuge (12 gel cards)

2 Cooling system
3 Centrifuges applicative board
4 Top covers
5 Gel cards internal storage
6 Centrifuge trap door
7 Cooling driver board
56 | IH-500
Cooled Centrifuge Module
Centrifuge 12 Gel Cards Head

The centrifuge 12 gel cards are loaded through the trapdoors.
The centrifuge heads are protected by the top covers.
Rotation direction:
• Normal run - positive: counter-clockwise;
• Negative: clockwise.
Figure 29.
1 Gel card holder

2 Complete centrifuge (head with 12 removable gel card holders)
IH-500 | 57
Description
3.14 Solid Wastes Area

The solid wastes area is accessible by lower left access door of the instrument. It allows access to the
following:
• storage for the cleaning liquid container;
• 1 USB port;
• the solid waste bin.
The solid waste bin is actuated manually and locked by an electromagnetic latch witch is managed by
the I/O board.
The full solid waste sensor mounted to the drawers frame allows to detect when the bin is full (7).
8 9
10
10
6 1
2
4 3
Figure 30.
1 Solid wastes area support

2 Solid waste locking screw
3 Bin ejector
4 Drawer slides
5 Solid waste drawer
6 Cleaning liquid container
7 USB port
8 Identification plate
9 Solid waste bin
58 | IH-500
Main Frame Assembly
3.15 Main Frame Assembly

3.15.1 Front View
5 4
1
2
6 3
Figure 31.
1 I/O board (support open)

2 Fluidic board
3 External temperature sensor
4 Computer
5 Computer ON/OFF switch
6 Main frame
9 Fan V2
IH-500 | 59
Description
3.15.2 Main Frame - Rear View
8
3
7
4 1
6
2
Figure 32.
1 USB and RJ45 ports

3 Transport arm controller interface (for DSI module)
4 Power supply
5 Transport arm controller
6 I/O board support (open)
7 Power supply management board
8 Pipetting applicative board
60 | IH-500
Samples and Resources Racks and Trays
3.16 Samples and Resources Racks and Trays

3.16.1 Sample Rack
The function of the samples rack is to position the samples tubes so that they can be identified and
processed.
The samples racks can be inserted in any of the five grids of the sample loading area.
4
2
1 6
1
1
1
Figure 33.
1 Barcode identification sticker

2 Sample block
3 Sample tube numbering
4 Sample tube
5 Sample tube
6 Handle
3.16.1.1 Sample Requirements ABO/Rh Testing

Centrifuged blood samples are required for tests which involves red cells. EDTA is considered an
acceptable anticoagulant for patient and donor samples.
Clotted samples (no anti coagulant in the sample) cannot be used when red cell testing is being
performed. Clotted, grossly hemolyzed or grossly lipemic samples may result in inaccurate typing or
increased “not interpretable” results.
Anti-coagulated blood samples can be tested for up to 5 days after collection. If the samples are not
tested within 24 hours of collection, samples should be stored at 2 to 8 °C.
The samples must return to room temperature prior to analysis. The use of cold samples may cause
dispensing errors or non-specific reactions.
There must be a distinct separation between the cellular and plasma layers with sufficient supernatant
above the erythrocyte phase prior to being analyzed on the IH-500. Samples shall be centrifuged at
1500 g for 10 minutes (refer to good laboratory practices).
3.16.1.2 Antibody Screen Testing

Plasma or serum can be used for the antibody screening, antibody identification, reverse grouping and
crossmatch on the IH-500.
IH-500 | 61
Description
3.16.1.3 Sample Block Barcode Label Set
11 22 33 44 55 6 6
77
Figure 34.
62 | IH-500
Sample block barcode label set (description)

The barcode label set includes six different groups of stickers according to the following:
Tube type barcode Tube type color

# Description sticker Figure sticker (7) Color Tube type (#)
Spherical tube Green T01
1
barcode sticker
set
(standard spherical
bottom tube)
Pediatric tube Blue T02

2
barcode sticker
set
(for red cells only)
Conical tube Pink T03

3
barcode sticker
set
Flat and Orange T04

4
plunger tube
barcode sticker
set
P1T04 P2T04 P3T04 P4T04
Special flat Yellow T05

5
bottom tube
barcode sticker
set
P1T05 P2T05 P3T05 P4T05

Used for - Red T06
6
customizable
tubes
P1T06 P2T06 P3T06 P4T06

Tube type colour - - - -
7
sticker set
IH-500 | 63
Description
Barcode Label Set (Identification)

Each set is composed of four barcode stickers to be used on a sample block. Each set is identified as
follows:
PxTyy
• «x» is the separator barcode Position (P1 to P4);
• «yy» is the Tube type (T01 to T06)
The first number defines the sample loading level of a rack:

• T01 to T06: standard sample loading;
• T11 to T16: STAT (priority) sample loading (See chapter STAT Sample Block Barcode Label Set on
page 65.).
5 4
2 1
Figure 35. Example using a sample tube holder with flat bottom tubes (T04)
1 P4T04
2 P3T04
3 Tube type orange sticker
STAT (emergency) sample is identified with an S, see section STAT Sample Block Barcode
Label Set on page 65.
4 P2T04
5 P1T04
k corresponding color sticker.

The barcodes of a sticker set must only be used on the same sample block, with the
Never mix barcodes of several sticker sets on the same sample block.
64 | IH-500
3.16.1.4 STAT Sample Block Barcode Label Set
Figure 36.
IH-500 | 65
Description
3.16.2 Gel Card Tray
Figure 37.
1 Aluminum protection foil strip

2 Gel card tray
3 Gel card barcode
3.16.3 Diluents Rack
Figure 38.
4 ID-Diluent rack
5 Additional positioning support
6 Identification sticker
Diluents racks can only be inserted in the left drawer.
k Only
use racks with positioning support (5):
• ID-Diluent 1 (brown plastic);
• ID-Diluent 2 (translucent plastic);
• ID-Titration Rack (translucent plastic).
66 | IH-500
3.16.4 Removable Reagents Tray
Figure 39.
1 Handle
2 Reagent vial numbering
3 Removable reagents tray
The removable reagents tray can only be inserted in the left drawer.
IH-500 | 67
Description
3.17 Electronic Boards

3.17.1 Right View
4
1
Figure 40.
1 Fluidic board
2 White light board (fixed on the top panel)
3 Novi-Core board
4 Pipetting applicative board
5 I/O board
68 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
3.17.2 Sample Loading Area
Figure 41.
1 Sample rack detection board

2 Sample area LED display
3.17.3 Pipettor Module
4
3
Figure 42.
3 Pipettor connection board

4 Pressure board
5 PDS applicative board
IH-500 | 69
Description
3.17.4 Centrifuges
1 2
Figure 43.
1 Centrifuge applicative board

2 Cooling driver board
3.17.5 Vision Station
Figure 44.
3 Internal temperature sensor
3.17.6 Incubator
Figure 45.
4 Temperature board sensor
70 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
3.17.7 Complete Gripper
1
2
Figure 46.
1 Gripper applicative board

2 Motor control board
3.17.8 Reagent Module
3 3
Figure 47.
3 Coated temperature sensor box
IH-500 | 71
Description
3.18 Electrical System Diagram
Figure 48.
72 | IH-500
0595077 (M20325) IH-500 Gauge Kit
3.19 0595077 (M20325) IH-500 Gauge Kit

The kit contains all the tools required to set up, calibrate and control the instrument.
6
4 8
5 7
1 2 19 9
11
10
12
18
13
22 20
14
25
21
24 15
17
23 16
Figure 49. Description - IH-500 gauge kit
No. Order Num. Ref. number Designation

1 - M19774 Levelling tool
2 - M14474 Liquid level
3 0595071 M19892 x 5 Reagent area teaching tool
4 0595066 M20093 Pipettor localization tool (and 4 x screws)
5 0595145 M20880 Reagent tool
6 0595144 M20873 Gripper calibration and mapping sensor location tool
7 0595070 M18741 Localization tool
8 0595147 M20881 Solid waste detection tool
9 0595171 M21004 X 2 B2C Cards
10 0595146 M20882 Z needle control tool
11 - M16140 Gel card and diluent piercing tool
12 0590147 M17612 Sample camera calibration tool
13 0595121 M18275 Fixed probe support with 2x screws M5 x 16 mm (with connection board E08862)
14 0595143 M20579 Gel card tool
15 0595120 M18681 Probe support with 2x screws M3 x 5 mm (with connection board E08862 and cable
E10352)
16 - M17799 Probe body tool
17 - M17798 Probe tip tool
18 0595049 E10349 Gripper board prog cable
IH-500 | 73
Description

19 0595072 M20158 Diluent rack tool
20 0690224 E11253 High voltage detector
21 0595118 M18979 Sharpness setting tool
22 0595040 M19639 Camera azimuth adjustment tool
23 - M12450 x 2 Tube Ø12x75 (4.5 ml)
24 - M12452 x 2 Tube Ø13x100 (7 ml)
25 - M12453 x 2 Tube Ø17x100 (15 ml)
The following components are the same as for IH-1000 and can be ordered separately. It is possible to
store them in the kit with the probe 15.

- 0590142 M16637 Touch probe body
- 0590143 M17540 Touch probe head
- 0590090 M20667 Touch probe tip
74 | IH-500
IH-500 Optional Table
3.20 IH-500 Optional Table

The optional table is a support for IH-500 and offers additional volume to store accessories and
resources.
The workstation can be installed to the left or to the right of the table and can support a weight of
20 kg. The external solid waste bin replaces the IH-500 solid waste bin and allows an increased
capacity.
4
10
2
6
Figure 50.
1 Workstation (left)
2 External solid waste bin
3 Solid waste input
4 Storage area (paper, gel cards)
5 Workstation (right)
6 Printer storage area
7 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply)
8 Battery pack
9 Adjustable foot
10 Storage area (sample rack and gel cards)
IH-500 | 75
Description
PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
76 | IH-500
4 Commissioning
This chapter describes the unpacking procedure of the IH-500, its installation, its connections and
installation with optional table. Moreover, this chapter explains all the remaining procedures required to
put the instrument into operation.
4.1 Safety
4.1.1 General Safety Requirements
b The instrument is not protected from water.

Do not install the instrument near a water source or in any place where there is a risk of
water splashes.
b the optional table.

The instrument may only be placed on a flat surface capable of bearing its weight, or on
Do not place anything on top or above IH-500.

The IH-500 must be located near to an electrical wall socket to avoid using an extension
power cable.
The IH-500 must be located in such a manner that operating its disconnecting devices
(the main power switch and the separable plug of the power cable) is possible at all times.
In the latter case, the socket outlet must be placed near the equipment and must be
easily accessible by the operator.
Ensure that the ventilation around the IH-500 is sufficient to avoid any excessive heating
which may cause malfunctions and/or failure of the instrument. A space of 300 mm
(11.8 in) on left and right sides of the instrument must be left clear of any obstacle (50 mm
spacers are installed by default on the rear of the instrument).
b The electric installation must comply with the national regulations applicable to buildings
The instrument may only be used indoors and never close to patients.
for medical use.

The electrical installations must be in working order.
The instrument must be connected to an appropriate power supply source.
The instruments may only be connected to the electrical power sources specified.
IH-500 | 77
Commissioning
b Do not press the side panels to move the instrument.

CAUTION
There is a risk:
• to damage the frame of the instrument;
• to drop the instrument on the floor.
Use the lifting handles or push the optional table to move the instrument.
Figure 51.
4.1.2 Personnel Qualification

The setup procedures outlined below must be followed strictly to ensure that the IH-500 system
operates correctly. The system should be set up by qualified staff having suitable experience in
electronics and computer systems.
4.1.3 Documents
Carefully study all the relevant setup procedures before starting to set up the IH-500.
4.1.3.1 Packing List

Check that the shipment is complete viewing the packing list delivered with the IH-500.
See chapter Equipment and Accessories on page 417.
78 | IH-500
Unpacking
4.1.3.2 Documents to fill in

The following documents must be filled in.
Installation Protocol
To be filled and sent by the technician installing the instrument at the customer’s within 3 weeks.
The official electronic document can be found on the Bio-Rad website:
https://www.bio-radsecretarea.com under Level: I Technical Area - Official forms.
4.1.4 Location
In order to optimize the manipulations and to guarantee an incident-free operation, a location having
the specifications specified in Environmental Conditions on page 27 must be chosen.
4.2 Unpacking
The IH-500 is carefully packed for transport. In order to unpack the instrument correctly, make sure that
the arrows on the crate are oriented upwards.
The elements in the crate are protected but must be handled with care.
k Before
unpacking the IH-500, prepare the lab table or the optional table on which will come the
instrument.
If the option table is available, unpack and install it first.
See chapter Optional Table on page 86.
Store all packagings panels, clips, screws and foams in a storage room for later use (e.g
transport).
b On
external casing, in order to protect the instrument against the shocks and tilt during
the transport, a detector of shock and tilt, and labels of location on packing are added
(spies).
Before anything, check these detectors at reception.
If the equipment shows any sign of damage or any part missing, do not attempt to set it
up, but contact Bio-Rad or your local dealer immediately.
Figure 52. Shockwatch and Tiltwatch
IH-500 | 79
Commissioning
4.2.1 IH-500
b The IH-500 weighs 213 kg (470 Ib).

HEAVY LOAD
A Place the crate on the floor in order to have enough room to open all panels.
b The crate must always be placed on the floor for unpacking.

B Remove the safety screws maintaining the higher clips (2).
Only one clip per face is screwed.
C Remove the 8 clips (2) which maintain the upper panel and the side panels.
With a large flat screwdriver.
k Keep these clips in a safe place as they will be used to store the crate after installation.
D Remove the upper panel (1).
E Remove the lower clip safety screw.
F Remove the 6 clips (6) which maintain the front panel marked “FRONT”.
G Remove the front panel (5).
H Remove the screen protective foam (4).
I Remove the lower clips safety screws.
J Remove the 4 clips (7) which maintain the right panel.

K Remove the right panel (8).
L Remove the lower clips safety screws located on the rear (9) and left (3) panels.
M Remove the 4 clips which maintain the rear panel (9) (marked “REAR”) on the
base.
With a large flat screwdriver
k panel when removing only the left panel.

Remove the rear (9) and the left (3) panels together so it is not necessary to maintain the rear
N Remove the 2 clips which maintain the left and the rear panel together.
80 | IH-500
Unpacking
2
2
5 6
6
Figure 53.
IH-500 | 81
Commissioning
O Remove the 3 screws (3) from the right flange (4).
P Remove the right flange (4).
Q Remove the 3 screws from the left flange (1).
R Remove the left flange (1).
3
2
Figure 54.
82 | IH-500
Unpacking
4.2.1.1 Installation with Forklift
b Never stand or work under a lifted component.

Choose a forklift according to the instrument’s weight: 213 kg (470 Ib).
A Load the instrument on the forklift.

It must be perfectly centered and aligned.
b Be careful with the rear central foot.

B Lift the instrument off the pallet and move it to the laboratory room.
C Place the instrument on an appropriate laboratory table or on the optional table.

Centre and align it in regard to the table.
For installation on the optional table, see section Installation with Optional
Table on page 100.
D Lower the instrument on the table.
Figure 55.
IH-500 | 83
Commissioning
4.2.1.2 Manual Installation (Lifting Kit)
b It is mandatory that manual lifting of IH-500 is performed by professional transport

The instrument’s weight is: 213 kg (470 Ib).
company following all applicable local regulations and applying all required safety
measures.
k workstation(s).
To lift the instrument on the IH-500 Optional table, ensure to first remove the optional table
A Unpack the lifting kit M20537 - 0595140.
B Insert the lifting handle (1) under the instrument in the appropriate locations.
Above the Teflon sliders (2).
b Never use the lifting kit on the instrument without the right and left lower panels
mounted.
C Tighten the 2 screws (3) in the 2 front holes.

Tightening torque: up to 18 Nm ± 0,4% with a torque wrench.
D Repeat steps B to C to fix the lifting handle on the left side of the instrument.
E Place one person on each corner of the instrument.
F Lift the instrument to the height of the table.
G Place the rear central foot and the 2 front feet of the instrument on an appropriate
laboratory table.
H Push the instrument on the table.
I Remove the 2 lifting bars (1).
84 | IH-500
Unpacking
2 3
3
4x
Figure 56.
IH-500 | 85
Commissioning
4.2.2 Optional Table
4.2.2.1 Unpacking
b The optional table weighs 100 kg (220 Ib) with 1 workstation.

HEAVY LOAD
The optional table with battery and UPS weighs: 170 kg (375 Ib).
b The UPS weighs 41 kg (90.4 Ib).

HEAVY LOAD
A Place the crate on the floor in order to have enough room to remove the elements.
b The crate must always be placed on the floor for unpacking.

B Cut the strap wires (1). Remove the 4 corner clips (2).
C Lift the box (3).
k Do not use cutter to open the box because workstations are just below.
D Remove the 4 lateral foams (4) and the central foam (5).
k The
optional table can be ordered with a second workstation and with UPS and its battery
(inside the table).
E Remove the screw (6) which maintains the workstation.
F Rise the workstation (11), turn it around and replace it in its location as indicated.
k Ifthetheworkstation
instrument is lifted manually on the option table with the lifting kit, it is mandatory to install
after.
See chapter Installation with Optional Table on page 100.
G Store the screw (13) under the workstation as indicated.
H Perform the same steps for the second workstation (10, if previously ordered).
I Cut the strap wires (8).
k is used instead.
Unpacking figures illustrate packaging with UPS box. If no UPS box was ordered a raising block
J Remove the 8 corner clips (9) and the UPS box (7).
K Remove the right and left packing flanges (12).
k Do not lose the washers.

L Remove the optional table from the pallet with a forklift.
See chapter Installation with Forklift on page 88.
86 | IH-500
Unpacking
4 5
4 6
8
9
10
11
13
12
Figure 57.
IH-500 | 87
Commissioning
4.2.2.2 Installation with Forklift
b UPS and battery.

Choose a forklift according to the table’s weight: 100 kg (220 Ib) or 170 kg (375 Ib) with
Never stand or work under a lifted component.
A Load the optional table on the forklift.

It must be perfectly centred and aligned.
B Pull the optional table out of the pallet and move it to the desired location.
Figure 58.
88 | IH-500
Installation
4.3 Installation
k bin and place them on a table.

Before installing the IH-500, remove the accessories packed for transportation in the solid waste
If accessories show any sign of damage or if one of them is missing, contact Bio-Rad or your
local dealer.
IH-500 | 89
Commissioning
4.3.1 Leveling of the Instrument
b push on the top of the instrument and check the rear feet.
Perform this procedure every time the instrument is moved to another location. Do not
k If the procedure is not followed, there is a risk of distortion for the chassis of the instrument.
A Check that the rear central foot (7) is in place.
B Set the 2 rear feet (1) to the minimum height.
C Move the instrument to its final location:

• with a forklift (see Installation with Forklift on page 83);
• with the lifting kit (see Manual Installation (Lifting Kit) on page 84).
D With the proper wrenches, adjust alternatively the front feet (2) in order to get a
distance of 65 mm between the instrument bottom and the table or the optional
table.
To level the instrument on the optional table, see section Instrument Installation
on the Optional Table on page 101.
To level the instrument, loosen the nut (5) and adjust the instrument with feet
nuts (6).
Tighten the nut (5) to block the adjustments.
E Disconnect and remove the liquid containers.
F Place the leveling tool (4) on the Y-axis pipettor rail guide (3).
G Use the 2 front feet (2) to level the instrument.

Check the spirit level.
H Tighten the nut (5) of the 2 front feet (2).
b The instrument must not be set down on the Teflon sliders.

I Place the leveling tool (9) in the containers area.
Ref. M19774 delivered with the IH-500 gauge kit.
J Place the liquid level (8) on the leveling tool (9).

Ref. M14474 delivered with the IH-500 gauge kit.
K Check the level of the overflow area.
L When the level is OK, bring the 2 rear feet (1) in contact with the table or the
optional table (with the hand and not with a tool).
The rear central foot must always support the instrument.
M Tighten the nut (5) of the 2 rear feet (1).
N Check the level.
O Remove the leveling tools.
P Insert and connect the liquid containers.
90 | IH-500
Installation
7
1
5 8
65 mm
6 9
2
Figure 59.
IH-500 | 91
Commissioning
4.3.2 Sample Racks

A Open the pipetting area access door (4).
B Remove the adhesive tape used to maintain the 5 sample racks (3).
C Close the pipetting area access door (4).
4.3.3 Sample Blocks

A Remove the sample blocks (5) from the solid waste bin.
B Prepare the sample blocks by sticking the barcode labels.

See chapter Sample Block Barcode Label Set on page 62.
4.3.4 Removable Reagents Tray

A Open the left drawer (2).
B Remove the adhesive tape used to maintain the removable reagents tray (1).
C Close the left drawer (2).
Figure 60.
92 | IH-500
Installation
4.3.5 Diluent Piercing Tips

A Open the pipetting area access door (1).
B Open the maintenance door (2).
C Remove the diluent piercing tips from their bubble bag in the solid waste bin.
D Place the diluent piercing tips (4) in their housing.

Near the base of the transport arm.
4.3.6 Gel Cards Block

A Remove the 8 gel card blocks from the solid waste bin.
B Open the pipetting area access door (1).
C Open the maintenance door (2).
D Place the 8 gel card blocks (3) in the preparation area for gel cards.
1
2
Figure 61.
IH-500 | 93
Commissioning
4.3.7 Hand-held Barcode Scanner Connection

A Remove the hand-held barcode scanner holder from the solid waste bin.
B Mark the desired position (1) of the hand-held barcode scanner.

On the left upper panel.
C Remove the adhesive protective film from the scanner holder.
D Press strongly the scanner holder (2) for a few seconds on the marked area (1).
E Unpack the hand-held barcode scanner.

Box which was in the solid waste area, in front of the cleaning liquid container.
F Connect the hand-held barcode scanner (3) to the USB port (4) and place it on its
holder (2).
4.3.8 Keyboard Connection

A Open the solid waste area door (7).
B Remove the Velcro strip from the solid waste bin.
C Place the Velcro loop strip under the keyboard (5) and the hook strip on the waste
bin area door (7) to fix the keyboard.
D Connect the keyboard (5) to an USB port (6).
3
2
4 6
7
Figure 62.
94 | IH-500
External Liquid Waste Optional Kit Installation
4.4 External Liquid Waste Optional Kit Installation

This kit allows to use an external liquid waste system instead of the 2 liquid waste containers supplied
with the instrument.
A Open the liquid containers area

door and the solid waste door.
B Disconnect and remove the

containers (1). 1
Figure 63.
C Unclip the intermediate tank

overflow tubing (2) of the cover.
Figure 64.
D Remove the cover (3).

2 cover screws (4).
4
4
Figure 65.
E Take the kit tubing (5).

Insert the first end-of-pipe under
the instrument by following the
overflow area. 6
F Insert the second end-of-pipe
into the bulkhead (6) next to the
decontamination tubing.
Draw the tubing to at least
500 mm.
5
Figure 66.
IH-500 | 95
Commissioning
G Insert the tubing behind the

forks connector support. Draw it
to the right extremity of the
overflow area.
Figure 67.
H Release the tube tightening clip

which maintains the Waste
Pump (PO05) and the Switching
Solenoid Valve (EV03) tubing (7)
to the waste pump (8) (upper
tubing on the waste pump).
8
Use bended nose 1/2” 7
round pliers.
I Disconnect the tubing.

Figure 68.
J Connect the external liquid

waste tubing (9) to the waste
pump (10).
K Place the new clip on the

10
tubing.
L Tighten at maximum the tube 9

tightening clip.
Use bended nose 1/2”
round pliers.
Figure 69.
M Reassemble the cover and the containers by proceeding reversely.

See steps D to A on page 95.
N Connect the IH-500 tubing to the liquid waste external system.
k During starting up of the instrument, check for leakage around the modified parts.
O Enable the option External liquid waste (GENERAL TOOLS screen, User
options area).
See chapter User Options on page 323.
96 | IH-500
Condensate Recovery Kit Installation (Optional)
4.5 Condensate Recovery Kit Installation (Optional)

4.5.1 Optional Table with Right Workstation
b Carefully install the tubing in order to avoid a siphon effect.

A Connect the tubing (2) with the 90° fitting (1) to the pipettor drainage pipe.
B Place the container (3) on the floor nearby the instrument.
C Insert the tubing (2) in the container.
3
Figure 70.
IH-500 | 97
Commissioning
4.5.2 Optional Table without Right Workstation
b Carefully install the tubing in order to avoid a siphon effect.

A Remove the lower right panel (2).
B Replace the right handle of the panel by the pierced handle (3).
Included in the kit.
C Extract the pipettor drainage pipe (1) from behind the pipetting applicative board.
D Slide the pipe (1) through the handle of the panel (3).
E Refit the lower right panel (2) on the instrument.
F Adjust the vertical position of the container.

The bottom of the container must be on the same plan of the optional table (5).
G Stick the loop part of the Velcro scratch (4) on the container.
H Put the hook part (4) on the loop part.
I Remove the support paper.
J Place the container (4) as described in step F.
K Press the container to stick the scratch sticker.
Figure 71.
98 | IH-500
Condensate Recovery Kit Installation (Optional)
4.5.3 Workbench
The installation on a workbench is similar as an optional table without right workstation. See chapter
Optional Table without Right Workstation on page 98.
The use of Velcro scratch is optional.
Figure 72.
IH-500 | 99
Commissioning
4.6 Installation with Optional Table

4.6.1 Leveling of the Optional Table
b sufficient to avoid any excessive heating.

If the optional table is installed with the UPS, make sure that the ventilation behind is
Excessive heating may cause malfunctions and/or failure. A space of 300 mm (11.8in) on
the left and right sides of the instrument/optional table must be left clear of any obstacle
(50 mm (1.97in) spacers are installed by default on the rear of the instrument).
A Move the optional table to the final location.
B Let the 4 adjustable feet (1) touch the floor.

Use appropriate wrenches.
C Level the optional table.

Loosen the feet nuts (4) by half a turn. Block the adjustment by tightening the
other nuts (3).
k the wheels.
Do not act on the feet at a height above 100 mm. The optional table must not be set down on
D Check the leveling.

Place a leveling tool (2) positioned on the top of the table.
1
1
Max. 3.94 in
4 (100 mm)
1
Figure 73.
100 | IH-500
Installation with Optional Table
4.6.2 Instrument Installation on the Optional Table

A Approach the instrument in front of the optional table.
B Lift the instrument.

Refer to:
• section Installation with Forklift on page 83;
• section Manual Installation (Lifting Kit) on page 84.
C Centre and align the instrument in regard to the optional table.

See figure below.
D Check the level of the optional table.

Use appropriate wrench.
E Check the level of the instrument.

Place a liquid level in the containers area.
See chapter Leveling of the Instrument on page 90.
F Install the workstation(s).

See step F, section Optional Table on page 86.
Figure 74.
IH-500 | 101
Commissioning
4.6.3 UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) and Battery Pack Installation
b Battery weight: 29 kg (63.9 Ib).

UPS weight: 41 kg (90.4 Ib).
k installed in the optional table but not the UPS.

If UPS and battery pack were ordered at the same time as the table, the battery is already
A Open the front doors.
B Slide the UPS (1) into the left shelf.
C Tighten the 2 UPS screws (3) on the frame.
D Slide the battery pack (2) into the right shelf.
E Tighten the 2 battery screws (3) on the frame.
F Close the optional table front doors.
Figure 75.
102 | IH-500
b OFF.
Make sure that the power switches of the instrument, the UPS and the battery pack are
G Connect the battery pack to the UPS DC48V connector (4).

If necessary, remove the cover plates on the back of the table.
H Connect the UPS to the instrument.

Use the power cable (5) which needs to be ordered separately (0595139).
I Connect the UPS to the electrical network.

Use the power cable (6).
k Two different cables are provided with the UPS:

• Europe standard;
• UK standards.
For the other countries, an adapter is required.
If the UPS is out of order, it is possible to connect the instrument directly to the power network
using the cable delivered with the accessories.
For countries with a 120 VAC network, a 20 A cable is required.
Figure 76.
IH-500 | 103
Commissioning
4.6.4 Optional Table Solid Waste Installation

A Open the pipetting area door
and the maintenance access
door.
B Open the left and right drawers.
C Lift the gel cards internal

storage.
Maintenance position.
Figure 77.
D Cut the plastic clamping ties (1).
E Disconnect the solid waste 2

sensor cable E10194 from the
extension cable connector (2). 1
Figure 78.
F Open the solid waste bin of the

instrument.
G Remove the 2 higher plate

screws (3).
H Remove the plate. 3

2 screws, 2 washers 3
Figure 79.
I Remove the plate (4).

4 rear bin plate screws.
Figure 80.
104 | IH-500
J Cut the 2 plastic clamping ties

(5).
K Disconnect the connector (6) 6 5

from the electromagnetic latch 5
cable E10555.
Figure 81.
L Bring the full solid waste sensor

extension cable E11032 and
Electromagnetic latch extension
cable E11031 from the top of
the optional table in-between
the solid waste area and the
liquid container area.
Figure 82.
k The extension cables E11032 and E11031 are pre-assembled on the optional table.
M Connect the optional table solid
waste sensor cable E11032 (8)
9
to the extension cable
connector (9).
IH-500 solid waste sensor 8
cable E10194 (7).
7
b
Do not mix up «full solid waste sensor
extension cable E11032» and
«Electromagnetic latch extension cable
E11031».
Figure 83.
N Connect the Electromagnetic

latch extension cable E11031.
Fix the cable with plastic
clamping ties.
In the instrument.
IH-500 | 105
Commissioning
O Mount the higher plate and the

rear bin plate by proceeding
reversely.
Steps N on page 105 to I on
page 104.
P Fix the full solid waste sensor

extension cable E11032 and the 10
free IH-500 solid waste sensor
cable E10194 with plastic
clamping ties (10) so it doesn't 10
move around. Figure 84.
Q Remove the solid waste bin.
Figure 85.
R Remove the plate (11).

3 screws.
11
Figure 86.
S Place the deflector plate in the

bin as shown besides.
Use 3 screws for fixing the
deflector plate.
Figure 87.
106 | IH-500
T Close and lock the solid waste

drawer.
Use the securing screw (12)
on the right.
12
Figure 88.
U Insert the discharge chute in its location.

Refer to the documents IH-500 IP-0595168_V1_Discharge_chute, point E
and/or IH-500 NI Optional Table, point 1.2.
V Mount the higher plate and the rear bin plate by proceeding reversely.
Steps I on page 104 to G on page 104.
W Lower the gel cards internal

storage. Close both drawers.
X Check that the access to the

solid waste bin is free.
Y Close the 2 front doors of the

instrument.
Figure 89.
Z Open the doors of the optional

table.
AA Remove the solid waste bin

cover.
From the optional table.
AB Close the doors of the optional

table. Figure 90.
AC Start-up the instrument.

See chapter Starting up on page 116.
AD Select the TOOLS button.

From the Service software main screen.
See chapter Starting Procedure on page 116.
AE Select External solid waste (GENERAL TOOLS screen, User options area)
to activate it.
See User Options on page 323 for more information.
IH-500 | 107
Commissioning
AF Check with Input/output menu that the optional table solid waste opening and
closing and waste detection state are functional.
See Solid Waste Open/Close Check on page 157 for more information.
AG Adjust the full solid waste sensor.

Refer to the document RP-0510008 Full Solid Waste Sensor – Optional Table.
4.6.5 Printer Installation

A Install the printer (1) in the dedicated location.
B Connect the printer to the USB connector (2) at the rear of the instrument.
C Plug the power cable supplied with the printed to the mains electrical network.
Figure 91.
108 | IH-500
4.6.6 Workstation Installation

A Insert the workstation (1) in the guide.
B Use the screw (2) to fix the workstation (1).
C Level the workstation with the 4 screws (3).
3 3 1
Figure 92.
IH-500 | 109
Commissioning
4.7 Electrical Connection

4.7.1 Fuses Configuration
b Disconnect the instrument from the electrical network before changing the fuses.
ELECTROCUTION
The instrument is delivered by default with 2 x T8A-230Vac fuses. Those fuses are
adapted to countries using a “230 VAC” electrical network.
For countries with a “110 VAC” electrical network, it is necessary to replace the mounted
F1 and F2 T8A fuses of the power supply by the 2 x T20A fuses delivered with the
instrument.
To replace the T8A fuses by T20A:
A Use the fuses delivered with the instrument.

Bag located in the solid waste bin.
Figure 93. Fuses
B Open the 2 fuse holders F1 (3) and F2 (4) with a flat screwdriver.
On the rear of the instrument.
C Replace the 2 x 8A fuses with the 2 x 20A ones.
D Close the 2 x fuse holders.
E Store the 2 x 8A fuses in the bag.
4.7.2 Connection to the Network
b The instrument is delivered by default with a power cable for countries using a “230 VAC”
electrical network.
The instrument must be ordered with the adapted power cable of the country.
For countries with a “110 VAC” electrical network, it will be necessary to use a 110 V
adapter or a power cable in accordance with the standards in the country of use. The
minimum capacity for the cable is 20 A at 110 VAC.
k The connector type used for the power cable must be a C19 IEC power socket.
The IEC power cable mounted on the instrument is a C20 connector.
A Check that the power cable is equipped with the ferrite (5) as shown on the
picture.
B Make sure that the main power switch is OFF «O» (2).
C Connect the instrument to the electrical network with the power cable (1).
110 | IH-500
Electrical Connection
5 3
Figure 94.
IH-500 | 111
Commissioning
4.8 Blocking Device Removal

4.8.1 Pipettor X-Axis
A Remove the X-axis blocking screw (1). Screw it in the storage area (2).
Located on the left side of the pipettor.
4.8.2 Pipettor Y-Axis

A Remove the Y-axis blocking screw (3). Screw it in the storage area (4).
On the front side of the pipettor.
4.8.3 Pipettor Z-Axis

A Remove the Z-axis blocking screw (5). Screw it in the storage area (5).
On the front side of the pipettor.
Z-Axis
Y-Axis
3
2
4
1 X-Axis
Figure 95.
112 | IH-500
Blocking Device Removal
4.8.4 Transport Arm

A Loosen the 2 screws (3) on the right side of the blocking device from the main part
(4).
B Loosen the 2 screws (5) of the right side of the blocking device from the frame.
C Remove the screws, the washers and the blocking.
D Loosen the screw (2) on the main part of the blocking device
E Remove the main part (1) of the blocking device from the gripper.
3
3
5
5
Figure 96.
IH-500 | 113
Commissioning
4.9 Centrifuge Trap Check

A When unpacking the instrument, check that the centrifuge traps are opened or
closed.
The cleat of the centrifuge trap must be fully inserted in the groove.
If necessary, adjust the position of the trap so that it is straight.
b The centrifuge traps must not be in an intermediate position.

b repositioning.
Pay attention when handling the hatches by hand. There is a risk of incorrect
If necessary, adjust the orientation of the traps. The cleat must be fully inserted in the
housing. Keep the flap straight, never at an angle.
Closed Undefined Open
Figure 97.
α = 0° α ≠ 0°
Figure 98.
114 | IH-500
Maintenance and Pipettor Doors Adjustment
4.10 Maintenance and Pipettor Doors Adjustment

The pipetting area door is considered to be correctly adjusted when a clearance of 5 to 8 mm is
measured between the maintenance access door and the pipetting area door with the upper
electromagnetic latch (2) released and the lower magnet sticked.
The normal opening of the pipetting area door via the HMI releases only the upper electromagnetic
latch (2). The lower magnet of the pipetting area door remains active.
If the upper electromagnetic latch (2) remains sticked on the upper magnet when opening the door,
check the following points:
• The maintenance access door must be correctly closed. The 2 marks (1 - visible on the picture
below) must be aligned.
• When the maintenance access door is locked, there must be no free play on it. If this is not the
case, check the tightness of the 2 nuts (3) on the latch inside the door. If necessary, adjust the
locking assembly (the latch should not be too difficult to close with the key and there should be no
play once the latch is closed).
• If the upper electromagnetic latch is still in contact, adjust the position of the upper magnet (4) of
the pipetting area door. Do not touch the lower magnet.
4
1 5-
8
mm
2 3
3
Figure 99.
IH-500 | 115
Commissioning
4.11 Starting Procedure

4.11.1 Starting up
A Make sure that at least the following items are installed in the instrument:
• one full system liquid container;
• one full decontamination container;
• one empty liquid waste container.
B Switch ON the instrument.

ON/OFF power switch position (1) to “I” (ON).
C Press the instrument power button (2) until an audible sound is produced.
 The Service Software starts automatically. The login screen is displayed.
D Login.
• Username: fsefis.
• Password: fsefis, followed by addition of the day, the month and the year.
Example:
For 3rd December 2020 = 2020+12+3 = 2035.
The correct password is fsefis2035.
E Confirm.
OK
 The warning message “Perform decontamination with cleaning liquid
before replacing or adjusting parts inside the instrument.” is
displayed.
F Acknowledge the message.

OK
 The main screen is displayed.
b the instrument.
Perform decontamination with cleaning liquid before replacing or adjusting parts inside
Figure 100.
116 | IH-500
Starting Procedure
4.11.2 Software Pack Check

A Check the software version (1).
It should be identical to the last software release available on official website. If
not, an update is strongly recommended.
Figure 101.
4.11.3 Language Configuration (OS, Keyboard and Barcode Scanner)

A Select the TOOLS button.
From the main screen.
B Select Software update.

SOFTWARE UPDATE
 All applications will close. A message appears to remove all resources.
Figure 102.
C Confirm.
OK
k Resources
only need to be removed in case of a software update, as this will delete the loaded
resources information.
D Log into Bio-Rad (Windows user account).

Type the password bior@d500 to access windows desktop.
The Windows classic desktop is now available. It is possible to configure the
regional settings, the keyboard language and the barcode scanner.
See spare part replacement procedure.
E Open the Control Panel.

Select the «Windows» button (left bottom corner).
F Select Region and Language.

From the Windows control panel screen.
IH-500 | 117
Commissioning
G Select the required language (1).

In the Format tab.
1
Figure 103.
H Select the tab Keyboards and Languages (2).
3
4
Figure 104.
I Choose the keyboard display language (4).
J Select Change Keyboards... (3).

 The following screen is displayed.
Figure 105.
K Select the required Language (5).
L Check that the required type of keyboard is configured in the field Installed
services (6).
If not, select on Add, choose the correct keyboard and select OK.
M Select OK. Close all the windows.
N To configure the hand-held barcode scanner, refer to its replacement procedure.
O Shut down and restart the instrument to access the Service software main screen.
118 | IH-500
Starting Procedure
4.11.4 Backup
A Select the TOOLS button from the main screen.
See Database Snapshot on page 317 for more information.
B Select the date of the day. Type the number of previous days to be backed up.
Figure 106.
C Start the backup.

SNAPSHOT
D Select or set the backup path (1).
Figure 107.
k It is only possible to backup on a external hard drive.

E Confirm.
OK
Wait until the process is completed.
F Select GOT TO FILE to access to the backed up data.

GO TO FILE
From the TOOLS general menu.
k This is only possible after a snapshot has been performed.
IH-500 | 119
Commissioning
4.11.5 Global Controller Menu Check

A Select the Global controller menu.
B Check that the software is launched correctly (green point).
Figure 108.
C Select INITIALIZE ALL button.

INITIALIZE ALL
D Close this screen.
E Open the state module panel.

Refer to State Module Panel on page 137 for more details.
F After global initialization, check that all the modules are functional (green).
Figure 109.
G Select the expander button to retract the panel.
120 | IH-500
Starting Procedure
4.11.6 Hydraulic Check
b Wash Solution A Concentrate is toxic (T) and dangerous to the environment

(N).
k (ISO 3696) or Type II (AstM D1193- 91).

When using demineralized water, make sure that the water quality corresponds at least Grad 2
k In case of spillage or contact, refer to the Wash Solution A Concentrate Instructions for Use.
k Do not activate the pumps and the solenoid valves for too long (as there is no liquid in the
system).
A Inspect the fluidic tubing and the fluidic connections to ensure integrity.
See chapter Fluidic Connection (1/2) on page 424.
B Select the HYDRAULIC button.

See Hydraulic Menu on page 262 for more information.
C Select UNITS.
Perform a quick check of the main hydraulic I/O to verify if the pumps and
solenoid valves are activated correctly.
See Units on page 262 for more information.
D Check that each container can easily be connected / disconnected from the
instrument.
Figure 110.
IH-500 | 121
Commissioning
E Remove the SYSTEM LIQUID containers (blue).
Figure 111.
F Fill the containers with system liquid:

• dilute a Wash solution A Concentrate bottle (100ml) with 2 liters of distilled or
demineralized water.
G Reconnect the containers.
H Select the menu HYDRAULIC - FLUIDIC CIRCUIT.

1 2
Figure 112.
I Perform 2 cycles by pressing 2x START FLUSHING in the Fluidic Circuit area

START FLUSHING (1).
J Follow the instructions as displayed. Select Next for each step.

Next
 The button Next is only available when the corresponding bottles have been
disconnected, filled, and re-connected to the instrument.
K Select on Finish.
Finish
When the flushing process is finished.
L Perform 2 cycles by pressing 2x START PRIME in the Fluidic circuit area (2).
START PRIME
k Priming is only available when the automatic intermediate tank filling is activated.
M When the priming is finished, check:
• the absence of air bubbles in the visible tubing of the pipettor,
• and check that the aspiration of the washing pot has correctly functioned (pot
and well completely empty).
N Select START PRIME in the Decontamination well area (3).

START PRIME
122 | IH-500
Starting Procedure
O Check that the decontamination well is full when the priming process is
completed.
P START the weekly maintenance.

START Weekly maintenance takes about 20 minutes.
Q Remove the CLEANING LIQUID container from its storage area.

Verify the expiry date, the solution is stable for one week.
Figure 113.
R Fill the container with cleaning liquid solution:

• dilute 8 ml of Microcide SQ™ or 40 ml of Micro 10®+ with 2 liters of distilled or
demineralized water (corresponding at least to Grad 2 -ISO 3696 or Type II -
ASTM D1193-91) or
S Tighten the cap on the container.
T Follow the instructions as displayed. Select Next for each step.

Next
U Confirm when the weekly maintenance is completed.

Finish
V Verify that the weekly maintenance date was updated.
4.11.7 Configuration of the Pediatric and Low Volume Tubes

It is possible to define, for the pediatric tubes (sample block type 02 and 12 (STAT)), and for the sample
block «low volume» (sample block type 06 and 16) the following parameters:
• the position of the bottom of these tubes: this position is calculated via an offset compared to the Z
reference of each tube;
• the offset for CRBC and Serum sampling compared to the position of the bottom of each tube;
• the depth of the tube: it corresponds to the internal height of the tube, between the bottom (value
declared above) and the top of the tube.
These data will be used during serum patient and CRBC sampling in such tubes.
k The customer is responsible for the validation of this adjustment.

See Block Adjustment on page 258 for information about the configuration of the pediatric and low
volumes tubes.
IH-500 | 123
Commissioning
4.11.8 Final Check / QC (Autocheck)

A Check that the centrifuge traps are opened.
See chapter Centrifuge Trap Check on page 114.
B From the main screen, select the FINAL CHECK / QC button.
C Select contextual menu - FINAL CHECK.

See chapter Software Generalities on page 133.
D Select START.
START See Final Check / QC Menu on page 313 for more information.
Figure 114.
E Follow the instructions on screen.

Prepare the required resources and configure the instrument as described.
k If no 5ml reagent vial is available a 10ml vial can be used.

F Select OK.
OK
G Check that the procedure is progressing and ends without error messages.
H When the Final Check is completed, verify that all the elements are checked (green
check ), meaning they are functional, and no element is aborted (red cross ).
k Ifpage
one element has a red cross control the element, refer to section Final Check / QC Menu on
313 for more information.
124 | IH-500
Starting Procedure
I If necessary, select PRINT to print the report.

PRINT
J Select VALIDATE QCFinalcheckVal... to confirm autocheck.
K Select MENU - FINAL CHECK / QC to return to main menu.
L From the main screen, select the EXIT button.
M SWITCH TO
Select SWITCH TO EXPLOITATION, to finish the starting procedure.
EXPLOITATION
 The instrument stops, and after restarting, the instrument automatically starts
in exploitation mode (GUI is launched).
4.11.9 QC Client
A Perform a QC according to local procedures with customer.
IH-500 | 125
Commissioning
126 | IH-500
5 Checks and Adjustments
The present chapter describes procedures to be carried out for particular calibration and controls after
parts replacement or in case of trouble. It contains procedures aimed at checking the functions of the
instrument. They do not require any hardware replacement.
All these checks and adjustments are performed through the dedicated Service software.
b Repair
and service operations must only be performed by a qualified service engineer
appointed by the manufacturer, in accordance with Good Laboratory Practices.
b Before
any technical intervention on the instrument, verify that the instrument is correctly
decontaminated (refer to the decontamination certificate).
If necessary perform a complete decontamination.
See chapter Cleaning and Decontamination Instructions on page 348.
k itself.
The procedures describing hardware replacement are given separately with the replacement part
IH-500 | 127
Checks and Adjustments
5.1 Service Software General Description

5.1.1 Access to Service Software
The Service software is started from the User Software (Graphical User Interface).
Figure 115. IH-500 GUI screen (Graphical User Interface)
b Decontaminate the instrument with cleaning liquid before replacing or adjusting parts.
A Start the IH-500 Software (GUI) from the FIS Launcher.
If not already started.
B Select LOG IN or LOG OUT.
k When a user is logged, the button automatically changes to LOG OUT.
128 | IH-500
Service Software General Description
C Log in with the username fsefis and the password.

The password changes daily. It contains the username and the calculated
current date. Example:
• Date: 12.12.2020 -> 12+12+2020 = 2044
• Password: fsefis2044.
Figure 116.
D Validate.
E Select MENU.
F Select STOP ALL if enabled.
k The button STOP ALL will stop all running processes. All running tests will be canceled.
G Select SERVICE SOFTWARE.
 The following warning screen is displayed.
Figure 117.
H Acknowledge the message.

OK
 The Main screen is displayed.
See chapter Main Screen and Software Structure on page 130.
IH-500 | 129
5.1.2 Main Screen and Software Structure

This screen allows access to all service software main menus, the global controller, the state module
panel, the information tab (system logs), open the pipetting door, switch on/off the light and to exit the
software.
Each menu buttons allows access to a new screen. Buttons are inactive (gray) if not available.
Menus are designed around different topics according to menu selected, for details see chapter
Service Software Structure on page 132.
1 2 3 4 5
7 8 9 10
15
11 12 13 14
17 18 19 20
16
Figure 118. Main screen
1 Access to Global controller menu (See section 5.2 on page 136)

2 Command to open the pipetting area door
Press the button to open the pipetting area door.
3 Command to turn ON/OFF the internal light
Press the button to turn ON or OFF the light.
4 % of the IH-500 modules in use
5 Date, time and software version
6 Contextual menu displaying the selection function
7 Access key to display or update the instrument firmware
See chapter Firmware Menu on page 140.
8 Access key to display or adjust the input/output
See chapter Input / Output Menu on page 149.
9 Access key to display or adjust the vision station
See chapter Vision Station Menu on page 163.
10 Access key to display, adjust or teach the transport arm
See chapter Transport Arm Menu on page 176.
11 Access key to display or adjust the centrifuge
See chapter Centrifuge Menu on page 235.
130 | IH-500
12 Access key to display, adjust or teach the pipettor

See chapter Pipettor Menu on page 244.
13 Access key to display or adjust the hydraulic circuit
See chapter Hydraulic Menu on page 262.
14 Access key to display or adjust the incubator
See chapter Incubator Menu on page 303.
15 Tab to display the Instrument State Module
See chapter State Module Panel on page 137.
16 Tab to display the information area
See chapter Information Area on page 135.
17 Access key to display or adjust the reagent plate
See chapter Reagent Plate Menu on page 307.
18 Access key to perform a final check or QC after any adjustment
See chapter Final Check / QC Menu on page 313.
19 Access to display miscellaneous functions
See chapter Tools Menu on page 316.
20 Command to exit the Service Software
See chapter Exit on page 344.
IH-500 | 131
Service Software Structure
Main menu Firmware Firmware update
Transport arm update
Pipettor Pre control

Transport arm error logs
Check
Input / Output Input /Output
Burn-in
Check temperature
Block adjustment
Vision station Pre adjustement
Hydraulic Units
Adjustement
Fuidic circuits
Check
Level detection
Transport arm Pre control
Sampling/Dispensing
Mapping
Incubator Adjustement
Transfer
Check temperature
Cycles
Reagent plate Pre control

Teaching
Adjustement
Secure posing
Check temperatures
Centrifuge Pre control Front centrifuge
Final check / QC Final check

Pre control Rear centrifuge
QC Cycles
Check temperatures
Tools General tools
IP Config
Open pipetting door
Check serial numbers
Turn light ON / OFF Status
Fluidic curves
Modules
Exit Exit options
Figure 119. Service software synoptic
k menu.
The third level is displayed on the main screen header (contextual menu) according to selected
132 | IH-500
5.1.3 Software Generalities
5.1.3.1 Contextual Menu

When accessing a menu from the main screen, a contextual menu displays the available functions on
the top of the screen. The left button (1) always leads back to the main screen.
1 2 3
Figure 120.
1 Back to main screen

2 Active function screen
3 Other function screen(s) available
5.1.3.2 Buttons
Buttons toggle between available actions.
Figure 121.
When a button is not usable, it turns to inactive (grayed).
4 5 6 5
Figure 122.
4 Active button
5 State information
6 Inactive button (grayed)
5.1.3.3 State Information

Information provided by the various sensors display in state information round indicators.
Figure 123.
IH-500 | 133
5.1.3.4 Axis Movements
Figure 124.
To move axis, select corresponding (-Y / +Y / -X / +X) buttons or slide the round cursor.
XY speed (mm/s) displays the maximum speed when using the slide cursor
XY step (mm) displays the movement done at each button selection
To change values, select the current value (a new window appears) and enter the new value.
k Itscreen.
is also possible to use the keyboard arrow keys (left/right/up/down) instead of the touch
5.1.3.5 Validation
Some adjustments need to be validated with the VALIDATE button. If a validation is not OK, use
CANCEL VALIDATION button.
Select the VALIDATE button to change the specified adjustment status of the module.
Modules current states are available in the STATUS screen, from the TOOLS menu. See chapter
Status on page 336.
Figure 125.
k ToInvalidated
ensure proper working of the instrument, all validation buttons need to be OK.
adjustment status of one module can involve several other status changes. Software
manages statuses relationships.
134 | IH-500
5.1.3.6 Information Area
Figure 126. Information area - Closed
Click on Information to display the software logs.
Figure 127.
5.1.3.7 Levels
Some menus display information on two levels (For example the upper level shows internal storage and
the lower level shows the centrifuges).
The buttons allow to switch from one level to the other.
Figure 128. Change level buttons
IH-500 | 135
5.2 Global Controller Menu

The Automation controller area displays information about the controller. The controller is used to
communicate with the 6 axis transport arm.
When selecting STOP / START (3), the controller status changes and the information displayed under
Current state: (1) changes accordingly.
1
3
6
5
Figure 129.
1 Current state
2 Close Global controller menu
Press to close the global controller menu.
3 STOP / START button
4 INITIALIZE ALL button
This function initializes all modules.
5 Current speed:
The speed of the transport arm is displayed. Change it with the corresponding + / - buttons.
6 TURN ON/OFF TRANSPORT ARM button
To power off/on the transport arm.
Is ON per default, but it may be necessary to power it OFF.
136 | IH-500
State Module Panel
5.3 State Module Panel

This menu displays the current status of the different modules.
5
3
1 2 4
Figure 130.
1 Modules Current status

2 INITIALIZE buttons
3 State module panel bar
4 Expander button
5 Modules area
A Select the expander button (4) to access this menu.
B Initialize each module by selecting the corresponding button.

INITIALIZE
 After a successful initialization, the Modules Current status button (1) turn
green and display Functional.
5.3.1 Module In Error

When a module is in error, the State Module Panel bar is red.
A Expand the menu to identify the faulty module.
Figure 131.
B Acknowledge the error.

ACK FAULT
 Corresponding button turns from ACK FAULT to INITIALIZE.
C Initialize the module.
INITIALIZE
IH-500 | 137
5.3.2 Transport Arm in Error

Proceed as follows in case of a transport arm error.
A Acknowledge the error.

ACK FAULT
Figure 132.
B Check if an object is in the gripper.
Figure 133.
C If no, select the Default option. Select Next.

Next
 The error is acknowledged and it is possible to initialize the transport arm.
If yes, select the ObjectInGripper option. Select Next.
Next
 The following message is displayed and the pipetting door opens.
D Open the door and ensure good access to the object in the gripper.
Figure 134.
E Select Next.
Next
 A countdown of 5 seconds starts before the gripper is powered off.
Figure 135.
138 | IH-500
State Module Panel
F Hold the object and remove it as soon as the countdown is over.

 The following message is displayed indicating gripper is in freewheel.
Figure 136.
G Close the doors.

Next
Select Next.
 The following message is displayed, indicating the Transport arm is initializing.
Figure 137.
H Select Finish.
Finish
IH-500 | 139
5.4 Firmware Menu

This menu upgrades the electronic boards or transport arm firmwares. This operation may be required
after a software update or after spare part replacement.
k Before updating firmware, the automate controller is automatically shut down.

A Display the menu from the main screen.
5.4.1 Firmware Update
1
9
8
7
2
6
Figure 138.
1 Contextual menu - FIRMWARE UPDATE

2 Boards area showing installed firmware versions
3 VALIDATE /CANCEL VALIDATION button
4 Progression area
5 Expected versions area
6 SELECT NONE button
7 SELECT ALL button
8 UPLOAD button
Admin user level required. Refer to Software Update / Admin Mode on page 321.
9 Command button to check the installed firmware versions
140 | IH-500
Firmware Menu
5.4.1.1 Procedure
k User in Admin mode required. Refer to Software Update / Admin Mode on page 321.
The expected firmware versions are displayed in the Expected versions area (5).
k If a version is not correct, the board is automatically activated for upload (Check box dark red).
k If the Version information displays “???”, no firmware is loaded on the corresponding board.
A CHECK
Display the loaded versions.
VERSIONS
B If a board is not activated for upload after check versions but an update is
required, select the corresponding check box.
To select all boards, select SELECT ALL.

SELECT ALL
 The UPLOAD button is enabled.
To cancel all selections, select SELECT NONE.
SELECT NONE
C Start the process.

UPLOAD
 In the Progression area (4), Board upload progress shows the upload
status of the current board and Upload progress shows the overall status.
Figure 139.
5.4.1.2 Remark
When replacing an electronic board with a board without firmware, an error may occur when trying to
upload the firmware.
This error is due to an issue with the “Automation Controller” that may not be stopped correctly if a
board has no firmware.
IH-500 | 141
5.4.1.3 Workaround
To perform the firmware upload to an empty electronic board, it is required to verify that certain
processes are stopped.
Open the task manager and kill the following processes if they are running:
Figure 140.
142 | IH-500
Firmware Menu
5.4.2 Transport Arm Update
4
12 1 2 3 5
11
10 6
9 7
Figure 141.
1 Application area
2 Name of the firmware installed
3 Installed version area
4 Contextual menu to display this screen
5 Expected version area
6 Current progress bar
7 Overall progress bar
8 Information filtered by: area
9 Upload firmware command
10 Upload gripper firmware command
11 Upload application button
12 Version check command
k APN application concerns gripper software, see chapter Gripper Firmware Update on page 145.
IH-500 | 143
5.4.2.1 Procedure
A CHECK
Display the current firmware versions.
VERSIONS
B Check the information in the areas:

• Application (type of firmware) (1);
• Name (name of firmware) (2);
• Installed version (3);
• Expected version (4).
k Ifcorresponding
the Installed version information displays “???”, no firmware is loaded on the
board.
k The APN application corresponds to the gripper software. See chapter Gripper Firmware
Update on page 145.
C If one of the installed version differs from the expected version, select:
UPLOAD FIRMWARE (9) to install the firmwares, except for gripper.

UPLOAD FIRMWARE
UPLOAD GRIPPER (10) to install the gripper firmware.

UPLOAD GRIPPER
UPLOAD APPLICATION (11) to install the applications.

UPLOAD APPLICATION
 Current progress bar (6) shows the upload status of the current task and
Overall progress bar (7) shows the overall status.
Steps are logged in the Information filtered by: area (8).
k Operation can take few minutes.

D Check that no error message appears in this area.
E Select OK to validate the Upgrade Completed message.

OK
Figure 142.
F Shut down and start again the instrument to complete the upgrade.
 The Installed version and Expected version areas should display the
same values.
144 | IH-500
Firmware Menu
5.4.2.2 Gripper Firmware Update

If the transport arm APN installed version is different from the expected version, a gripper upgrade is
required.
k Use the IH-500 Gripper board prog cable (E10349) to upgrade the firmware.
A Disconnect the gripper cable (1) from the transport arm.
Figure 143.
B Connect the IH-500 Gripper board prog cable (E10349) (2) to the transport arm
and to the gripper spiral cable (3).
Figure 144.
C Open both drawers.
D Lift up cards internal storage to access the front centrifuge.
Figure 145.
IH-500 | 145
E Remove 2 x screws (4) and the protective plate to access the computer.
4 4
Figure 146.
F Connect the serial port of the IH-500 Gripper board prog cable (E10349) to an
available port on the computer.
COM2 (5) is recommended.
Figure 147.
G Open the EEPROM Programmer window.

UPLOAD GRIPPER
6
7
Figure 148.
H From the Communication settings tab, select the serial Port (6) (computer
port connected to the IH-500 gripper board prog cable E10349) and 38400 in
Baud Rate (7).
146 | IH-500
Firmware Menu
I From the Application tab, use the Browse button (8) and select APN version
available in C:\ProgramData\IH-500\Firmwares\APN01.xx.yy.zz.sw.
9 10
Figure 149.
k ProgramData is a hidden folder, type it manually to access it.

J Select Download button (9) to start update.
K Check that green OK icon (10) is displayed.
L Disconnect the IH-500 gripper board prog cable (E10349) and plug the gripper
cable back on the robot.
k Disconnecting cable makes board reset which is necessary to start last downloaded version.
M Put back the protective plate.
N Shut down and restart the instrument.
IH-500 | 147
5.4.3 Transport Arm Error Logs
1
2 4
Figure 150.

2 Command to display the errors which occurred on the transport arm.
3 List of errors which occurred on the transport arm
The entries can be;
• sorted with the column headers;
• filtered by activating the option Active Filter.
4 The filter allows to hide some logs of transport arm.
This filter is configured in factory. It is not possible to change the settings of the filter.
148 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
5.5 Input / Output Menu

This menu checks:
• the functions and temperatures of the modules;
• the communication with the sensors.
5.5.1 Input / Output Screen
1 2
3 4 5 6
15 7
14 12 8
13 11 9
10
Figure 151.
1 Contextual menu - INPUT/OUTPUT

2 Access to the CHECK TEMPERATURES screen
See chapter Check Temperatures on page 162.
3 Ionizer start/stop command
4 Fans start/stop command
5 Internal light switch ON/OFF command
6 External light switch ON/OFF command
7 Signal frequency field
8 Sample racks (check of detection sensor)
9 Doors area
10 VALIDATE / CANCEL VALIDATION button
11 Solid waste area
12 Sample racks LED strip light area
13 Drawers area
14 Resource sensor area
15 Temperatures area
IH-500 | 149
5.5.1.1 Ionizer
Figure 152.
b ELECTROCUTION
High voltage > 2500 V.
A Switch ON the ionizer power supply.

START In the Ionizer area (1).
 A message displays high voltage danger.
Figure 153.
B Confirm.
YES
A hazard symbol appears in the Ionizer area to remind about the high
voltage.
Figure 154.
 The ionizer is activated during 30s.

C Place the high-voltage tester pen HT 3-7KV (ref. E09625) on the gel card piercing
tip (2).
D Check the presence of high voltage.

The pen indicating light should be ON.
E Switch off the ionizer power supply.

STOP
150 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
5.5.1.2 Fan
Figure 155.
A Activate the fan.

START In the Fans area.
B Check the air flow direction.

It should go outwards the instrument.
C Deactivate the fan.

STOP
5.5.1.3 Internal Light
A Switch ON the internal light area.

SWITCH ON
B Check the internal light switches on over the pipetting area door.
C Switch OFF the internal light area.

SWITCH OFF
IH-500 | 151
5.5.1.4 External Light
Figure 156.
A Select one of the colour buttons in the External light area.
Figure 157.
B Check that the external light switches on with the selected colour.
C Select again the color button to switch it OFF.
D Check the other color buttons.
5.5.1.5 Temperatures
A Check the temperature values displayed for each module in the Temperatures
area.
Refer to the table below.
Module Temperature displayed

Incubator 37°C ± 2°C
Centrifuges 18°C to 25°C
Reagent cooling 16°C ± 2°C
Machine temperature Internal temperature: 18°C to 31°C
External temperature: 15°C to 28°C
For an optimum function of the instrument, these temperatures ranges must be respected.
152 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
5.5.1.6 Signal Frequency
A Check the Signal frequency value when:

• the hydraulic circuit is purged;
• the hydraulic circuit is primed.
Refer to the table below in accordance with the board installed on the
instrument.
k The Signal frequency is used for the level detection.

Level Detection Board PN Circuit purged Circuit primed
0590261 (E09998) 10kHz ± 2kHz > 5kHz
0595162 (E11246) 13.7kHz ± 1.5kHz > 5kHz
5.5.1.7 Gripper Mapping Sensor (Resource Sensor)
A Move an object towards the sensor to activate the resources detection.

 The sensor orange led switches ON.
Figure 158.
B When the LED is ON, check that three check boxes in the Resource sensor
area turn active together.
Figure 159.
k The mapping sensor is wired on the three inputs.

C Remove the object.
D Check the Led switches OFF and that the check boxes in the Resource sensor
area are all inactive.
Figure 160.
IH-500 | 153
5.5.1.8 Sample Racks LED Strip Light

The sample loading area LED indicate the presence of racks.
• Red: rack loaded;
• Green: no rack.
A Check the LEDs.

SWITCH ON
In the Sample racks LED strip light area.
 The LEDs light up one after the other. First all in green, then all in red, and
finally all LEDs light off.
B Deactivate the LEDs.

SWITCH OFF
Figure 161.
154 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
5.5.1.9 Sample Racks
A Insert a sample rack.
B Check the status of the corresponding rack changes.

In the Sample racks area.
Present
C Check that the corresponding LED lights up in red.

When the sample rack is inserted.
D Repeat for each position.
E Remove all sample racks.
F Check that all status are inactive.
Figure 162.
IH-500 | 155
5.5.1.10 Drawers
A Open the resources drawer(s).

LEFT DRAWER
 The respective drawer(s) unlock and move forward.
RIGHT DRAWER
B Check that the corresponding drawer status is Open.

The button is inactive (greyed out).
Open
C Close the drawer(s).
D Check that the corresponding drawer status is Closed.

The button is active.
Closed
Figure 163.
5.5.1.11 Doors
A Open the Pipetting area door.

PIPETTING DOOR
The Pipetting area access door unlocks and opens.
B Check that the door status is Open.
Open
C Close the door.
D Check that the door status is Closed.
Closed
Figure 164.
156 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
5.5.1.12 Solid Waste Open/Close Check
k Same procedure when using the optional table.

A Unlock the drawer.
WASTE DRAWER
B Open the waste bin area door.

Check that the drawer moves freely.
C Open the drawer.
D Check that the status is Absent.
Absent
E Close the drawer.
F Check that the status is Present.
Present
Figure 165.
5.5.1.13 Full Solid Waste Sensor Check
b adjustment.
Place carefully the IH-500 solid waste detection tool on its position to avoid incorrect
k table.
Refer to the appropriate procedure to check the full solid waste sensor when using the optional
A Open the waste bin area door.
B Open solid waste bin drawer.
C Remove the waste bin from the drawer.
IH-500 | 157
D Place the IH-500 solid waste detection tool (M20881) on the drawer back face
upper edge.
Figure 166.
E Close the drawer.
F Open the pipetting door and the right drawer.
G Check that the detection is active when the sighting point (1) is on the tool central
part.
Is full
The orange led (2) is ON and steady and the Waste state status is full.
Figure 167. Central part
k The sighting point (1) must be on the tool edge.

H Move the tool to the left.
I Check that the detection is inactive when the sighting point (3) is on the tool right
part.
Is empty
The orange led (4) is OFF and the Waste state status is empty.
Figure 168. Right part
J Close the pipetting door and the right drawer.
K Open the solid waste drawer.
L Remove the IH-500 solid waste detection tool.
158 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
M Place back the bin in the drawer.
N Close the drawer.
5.5.1.14 Full Solid Waste Sensor Adjustment
k when using the optional table.

Refer to the appropriate replacement procedure (RP-0510008) to adjust full solid waste sensor
In the Solid waste area, the Waste state detected by the sensor is displayed.
b Place carefully the IH-500 solid waste detection tool on its position to avoid incorrect
adjustment.
A Open the waste bin area door.
B Open the drawer.
C Remove the waste bin from the drawer.
D Place the IH-500 solid waste detection tool (M20881) on the drawer back face
upper edge.
Figure 169.
E Close the drawer.
F Open the pipetting door and the right drawer to reach the full solid waste sensor.
Figure 170.
IH-500 | 159
G Slightly loosen the 2 x sensor support screws (1).
2
1
Figure 171.
H Centre the sighting point on the tool line (2).
I Tighten the 2 x sensor support screws (1).
J Disconnect then reconnect the sensor connector.

The rear led lights up blue, and the sensor programming mode is ON.
Figure 172.
k If no action is made on sensor within 5 minutes, the sensor programming mode turns OFF.
K Insert a metallic tool (e.g. screwdriver) at the rear of sensor.
Figure 173.
L Wait 2 seconds before to remove the tool.

 All LEDs should blink at 1Hz.
1Hz
Figure 174.
160 | IH-500
Input / Output Menu
M Briefly insert the metallic tool to validate the distance.

 When the sensor is configured, the LEDs blinks at 1Hz.
1Hz
Figure 175.
N Within a delay of 4 seconds, briefly insert the metallic tool to change the operating
mode.
 Successful calibration is confirmed if rear led lights up blue.
ᅛ
Figure 176.
 If calibration fails, all LEDs flash at 8Hz.
8Hz
ᅟ
Figure 177.
O Close the pipetting door and the right drawer.
P Open the solid waste drawer.
Q Remove the IH-500 solid waste detection tool.
R Place back the bin in the drawer.
S Close the drawer.
IH-500 | 161
5.5.2 Check Temperatures

This menu checks the measured temperatures and the automatic temperature regulation.
1 3 4
8 7 6 5
Figure 178.
1 Modules selection checkbox to display the temperature graphic

When active, the corresponding temperature is displayed
2 Temperature sensors graphic
3 Access to the INPUT/OUTPUT menu
See chapter Input / Output Screen on page 149.
5 Cooling temperature regulation START/STOP command
Press the button to start or stop the regulation.
6 Centrifuge temperature regulation START/STOP command
7 Incubator temperature regulation START/STOP command
8 Fan temperature regulation START/STOP command
9 Command to export graphic into a file
Press the button to create a Excel file containing the graphic data.
162 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
5.6 Vision Station Menu

This menu adjusts, calibrates and checks the camera.
5.6.1 Pre-Adjustment
4
1 2
Figure 179.
1 Camera START/STOP command

Press the button to start or stop the camera.
2 Function to capture picture from the camera
The captures are saved under: C:\Users\Public\IH-500\Images\Camera\.
3 Camera parameters area
5 Camera current view when active
6 Calibration status of the camera
Status: Calibrated / Not Calibrated
k Protection cover needs to be removed to adjust the azimuth, aperture and sharpness.
IH-500 | 163
5.6.2 Camera Initialization

A Expand the State module panel.
Located on the right side of the screen.
B Initialize the camera.

INITIALIZE
Select the button under Vision.
5.6.3 Camera Pre-Adjustment
5.6.3.1 Camera Azimuth
A Open the pipettor and maintenance doors.
B Remove the protection cover (2).
C Check that the iris diaphragm aperture is set to 6 (3).
k Ifcompletely
the graduations are not visible, rotate the lens to see the scale. Never remove the lens
though.
D Place the camera azimuth adjustment tool (1) on the backlight.

Tool reference: M19639.
b Place
carefully the camera azimuth adjustment tool on its position to avoid incorrect
adjustment.
E Select Azimuth check box.

In the Camera parameters area.
F Check that the black shape is between the red template (4).
If it is not the case, follow the next steps to adjust the camera.
2 3
Figure 180.
164 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
G Loose the screws (5) and (6).
H Adjust the camera azimuth.

Use the knurled head screw (7).
I Slightly tighten the screws.
J Check that the red line adjustment is still OK (4). Tighten all screws.
K Remove the camera azimuth adjustment tool.
L VALIDATE
VALIDATE the operation.
Azimuth
 A green check mark displays by the validate button.
M Refit the protection cover.
N Close the instrument doors.
5
6
Figure 181.
5.6.3.2 White Balance
k Make sure that:

• the camera protection cover is back in place;
• the instrument doors are closed;
• the internal light is OFF.
A Select White balance check box.

IH-500 | 165
B Start the balancing process.

START The operation may take a few minutes.
At the end of the process, the following message appears.
Figure 182.
C Validate the operation.

OK
 A green check mark displays by the start button.
5.6.3.3 Aperture
A Open the pipettor and maintenance doors.
B Remove the protection cover.
C Identify the iris ring (exterior ring).
D Select Aperture and beep check boxes.

k Make sure that the sound is on.

E Set the aperture to 205 ± 3 points.
Turn the iris ring (exterior ring) (1).
Figure 183.
k Beep frequency increases when target approaches.

F VALIDATE
Aperture
G Refit the protection cover.
H Close the instrument doors.
166 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
5.6.3.4 Sharpness
b Place carefully the sharpness setting tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
b Place assembly in front of the backlight.
A Open:
• the pipettor door;
• the maintenance doors.
B Remove the protection cover.
C Insert a gel card (1) in the IH-500 Sharpness setting tool (2).
Tool reference M18979.
D Select the Sharpness: check box.

E Adjust the focus ring (3) to reach the highest sharpness value.
k Highest value is a peak. By turning one direction it is reached but will then decrease.
F VALIDATE
VisionStationSha...
G Remove the gel card and the IH-500 Sharpness setting tool (M18979).
H Refit the protection cover.
I Close the doors.
1
2
Figure 184.
IH-500 | 167
5.6.3.5 Exposure Time
A Select the Exposure time check box.

B Start the camera calibration.

START  A green mark check displays by the start button.
 If all steps succeed, the following message box appears.
Figure 185.
C Acknowledge the message.

OK
D VALIDATE
Validate the pre-adjustment of the vision station (camera parameters).
ExposureTime
 The camera parameters area displays: Calibrated.
168 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
5.6.4 Adjustment
This menu allows the computer to calculate the mm/pixel ratio, and to detect height and diameter of
samples.
3 2
5
Figure 186.

2 Automatic validation
3 START PIXEL/MM RATIO button
4 Sample rack detection area
5 Rack position 1
Procedure
b Place carefully the sample camera calibration tool on its position to avoid incorrect
adjustment.
A Place the sample camera calibration tool (M17612) in position 8.

On the sample rack.
Figure 187.
IH-500 | 169
B Start the adjustment.

START
PIXEL/MM RATIO Select the START PIXEL/MM RATIO button.
The following screen appears.
Figure 188.
C Place the sample rack to the position 1 in the loading area.

Refer to Figure 186.
D Validate the sample rack insertion.

OK
 When the adjustment is done, a window with tool screen capture is displayed.
Figure 189.
k The ratio value is given only for information.

E Validate.
OK
F Remove the sample camera calibration tool.
k The validation of the status is automatic.
170 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
5.6.5 Checks
This menu verifies the reading and interpretation of the different resources used on the instrument.
2
10
9
8
1
7
6 3
Figure 190.
1 Resource selection area

3 Switch level button
4 Function to validate the results of the reading and interpretation
5 START check button
6 Options for cards area
7 START MAPPING command
8 UNLOAD SAMPLE RACKS button
9 OPEN RIGHT DRAWER button
10 OPEN LEFT DRAWER button
k The
check can be performed with various configuration of resources: gel card and/or reagent
and/or diluent and/or sample tube.
IH-500 | 171
Procedure
A Open the left drawer.

OPEN LEFT DRAWER
To access the resources area.
11
12 12
11
Figure 191.
B Load reagents in position 1, 4 and 7 (11).

10ml and/or 5ml (if used).
C Load a Diluent 1 and a Diluent 2 in position 1 and 2 (12).

If used.
D Close the left drawer.
E Open the right drawer.

OPEN RIGHT DRAWER
To access the resources area.
Figure 192.
F Load a gel cards basket partially or completely full in position 1 of the right drawer.
G Close the right drawer.
H Insert a sample block on a samples rack.
k Samples block and samples tubes are equipped with barcode label identification.
172 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
I Insert the sample rack in the instrument.
Figure 193.
J Start the resources mapping.

START MAPPING
 All resources but samples are detected.
k The detected resources appear in blue.

K Select the available sample blocks manually.
 Selected resources turn active (dark red).
Figure 194.
L Mapping makes START button enabled, select it to start the sequence.

START
M Check the quality of the picture and available information displayed in Results
area for each card.
Figure 195.
IH-500 | 173
N Check the quality of the picture and information displayed in Results area for
each sample.
Figure 196.
Information about the sample tubes are displayed below.
O Check the quality of the picture and information displayed in Results area for both
diluents.
Figure 197.
P Check:
• the quality of the picture and information displayed in Results area for the
three reagents;
• that the cap detection and volume are correct.
Figure 198.
174 | IH-500
Vision Station Menu
Q Exit the window.

CLOSE RESULTS
R VALIDATE
Select VALIDATE (4) to memorize status.
VisionStationChe...
S Remove the samples.

Use the buttons OPEN RIGHT / LEFT DRAWER and the button UNLOAD
SAMPLE RACKS.
Remarks
According to the selected option, the following features are verified by the instrument during the vision
check:
• Identification: the instrument checks that the ressources barcodes are correctly identified and the
gel control is correct for gel cards;
• Result analysis: the instrument checks and interprets the result of a reading.
• Brightness analysis: the instrument verifies the quality of the image, checks for the brighness of
each well and calculates the variance of brightness between the wells.
IH-500 | 175
5.7 Transport Arm Menu

This menu allows pre-calibration, mapping, and checks of the transport arm and the gripper.
5.7.1 Pre Control
4
3
5
2
11 10 8 7
9 6
Figure 199.

2 Gripper X, Y and Z axis movements command
Use the corresponding buttons to move the gripper in X-, Y- and Z- direction (transport arm
MOVES in all 6 axes).
3 Transport arm area
4 Gripper movements and speed management
Enter values in XY step (mm):, Z step (mm): and %TA speed: fields to adjust the
movement steps and the transport arm speed.
5 Gripper area
See chapter Gripper Calibration on page 178.
6 Pipetting area door opening command
Function to open the pipetting area access door.
7 Command to move the transport arm to the position where to mount the gripper tool
8 Command to move the transport arm to the instrument transport position command
The function moves the transport arm to the transport position.
9 Burn-In Gripper area
This area contains the function to perform a burn-in of the transport arm and gripper.
10 Command to move the transport to the robot disassembly position command
The function moves the transport arm to the disassembly position.
176 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
11 Command to move the transport arm to the resource sensor adjustment position button
The function moves the transport arm to the resource sensor adjustment position.
5.7.1.1 Gripper - Resources Types
D E G
Figure 200.
b Be careful to keep fingers out of the legs.

A Expand the State module panel. Initialize the gripper.
INITIALIZE
 After successful initialization, the status should turn from Not Initialized to
Functional.
B Select a resource type to check the gripper calibration.

In the Gripper - Resources types area.
C Open the gripper.

OPEN
 The legs move from the initialization position to the resource catch preparation
position (according to the resource type previously selected).
D Manually maintain a resource inside the legs.
E Close the gripper.

 Gripper catches the resource.
F Check that the resource is correctly hold by the legs with no error message.
G Release the resource from the legs.

OPEN
k Hold the resource to prevent it from falling.
IH-500 | 177
5.7.1.2 Gripper Calibration
A Start the calibration to detect the initialized position of the gripper.

START CALIBRATION
 If no error appears, the status Gripper Calibrated displays as succeeded
(green check mark).
k Calibration on page 230.

It is mandatory to perform the gripper teaching after performing this step. See chapter Gripper
This step is to be performed with no tool nor resource loaded in the instrument.
5.7.1.3 Gripper Localization Check
b Place carefully the localization tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
b The localization tool is delicate, a crash or a fall can destroy it.
A Start the localization.
CHECK LOCALIZATION
 A request window appears.
Figure 201.
B Insert the localization tool (M18741) in the gripper legs.
Figure 202.
C Centre carefully the tool.
178 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
D Select OK on the transport arm request window.

OK
 A second message appears.
Figure 203.
E Close the instrument door.
F Acknowledge the second message window to confirm good positioning of the

OK
tool.
 Transport arm checks a first time with tool and comes back to the localization
tool mount position.
Before opening legs, a message asks the user to get ready to take the tool.
Figure 204.
G When ready, confirm.

OK
k The
localization tool needs a process in at least 3 steps to ensure that the tool is OK. Each step
consists in operating a 180° rotation.
H Turn the tool (180°).
Figure 205.
IH-500 | 179
I Acknowledge when done.

OK
 The following message appears.
Figure 206.
J Select OK to acknowledge the confirmation message.

OK
 Transport arm teaches a second time.
After the last localization and before opening legs, a request appears.
Figure 207.
K When ready to take tool, select OK.

OK
L Remove the tool.
M Close the doors.
N Acknowledge when done.

OK
Figure 208.
180 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.1.4 Gripper Burn-In
A Enter the amount of cycles to launch.

In the Burn-in gripper area.
Figure 209.
B Start the burn-in.

START Wait until all cycles are done.
C Check that all cycles passed.

 Cycle passed: «X» should correspond to amount of cycles launched.
D VALIDATE
Validate to memorize the status.
GripperBurninVal...
5.7.1.5 Note about Gripper Tolerance

The Gripping Distance Control function checks that resources are correctly picked by the transport
arm.
The tolerance defined in this function (+1 mm/-2 mm) allows the instrument to detect an incorrectly
picked-up resource according to the gripper distance reference.
The cause of this issue is that the gel card could be picked up misaligned with a relative angle
compared to the gripper plan.
In this case, the transport arm could pick up the gel card tray with the gel cards and move them to the
vision station.
Consequently, the transfer will end in fault.
Two possibilities may interrupt the transfer:
• drop of gel cards tray and all picked-up gel cards moved to the vision station area;
• breakage of one or both gripper legs.
The image shows:
• a good pick-up of a gel card is correctly (gel card fully inserted in the V-shape of the legs);
• a bad pick-up of a gel card, when this one is not correctly aligned between the gripper jaws. The
card is not fully inserted inside the “V” of the legs.
IH-500 | 181
Figure 210.
Note that the field procedure which consists to add a layer of tape on the gel card used to adjust the
gripper has a direct impact on the pickup of the gel card.
The tape increases the gripping distance reference used to check the correct pick-up of gel card.
182 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.2 Mapping
This menu checks the resources sensor detection in all available positions.
Figure 211.
1 Contextual menu to display the screen

2 Modules selection check boxes
3 START MAPPING button
4 Change level button
5 Detected resources area
Procedure
A Remove all resources from the instrument.
k It is possible to check the desired modules selection boxes for mapping only these modules.
B Start the process.
START MAPPING
IH-500 | 183
C Check that no resources are detected.
Figure 212.
Otherwise the resource sensor localization shall be done again. See chapter
Resources Sensor Localization on page 228.
k case, the instrument checks with the gripper the presence of the vial.
On the reagent plate, the mapping sensor may detect a vial whereas no vial is present. In this
2 wrong detections of vials are acceptable.
D Load a few resources in the instrument.
E Start the mapping.

START MAPPING
F Check that the loaded resources are detected (displayed blue).
Figure 213.
G Remove all resources from the instrument.
H VALIDATE
If the check is successful, select VALIDATE to validate the mapping check status.
TransportArmMa...
 Else, resource sensor localization shall be done again. See chapter Resources
Sensor Localization on page 228..
184 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.3 Transfer
This menu allows to remove resources from one position to the next. Only logical moves (which are also
performed by the instrument in the user software) can be performed.
b a resource to a place which may already occupied.

There is a risk of crash if a Transfer is performed without Mapping. The instrument moves
Always perform a mapping before a transfer.
Figure 214.

2 Resources area
3 Change level button
4 START TRANSFER button
5 Global commands area
6 Actual selection area
Procedure
A Select the desired area to access resources.

In the Global commands area.
B Select the resource location to be moved.

SELECT FROM
IH-500 | 185
C Select the initial location resource to move.

Use the Change level button to access invisible area (centrifuge, cards
block...).
Figure 215.
D Check if the selected position is in SELECT FROM field.

 The button SELECT TO turns active.
Figure 216.
E Select the final position of the resource.

SELECT TO
The move is symbolized by an arrow.
Figure 217.
F Check if the selected position is in SELECT TO field.
Figure 218.
G Move the resource.

START TRANSFER
186 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
k
If a move is impossible an Error on moving resource window appears.
Figure 219.
For example, moving a gel card directly in pipettor area provokes an error (the right way is to
move cards in cards block and then cards block in pipettor area).
H Modify the move configuration.

OK
I Select the desired action to perform:
Figure 220.
• Return to source: opposite move;

Select from and Select to fields are automatically swapped at the end of
the move.
• Transfer next: repeat move when same resource available and destination
area is free (mapped);
• Rotate: operate a rotation of gel card;
• Ionizer: activate ionizer when piercing.
IH-500 | 187
5.7.4 Cycles
This menu allows performing movement cycles for the different resources. In addition piercing cycles
for cards and diluents can be performed.
6
5 2
3
4
Figure 221.

2 Functions to check the transfer of diluent and/or reagent product by the transport arm
3 Functions to check the diluent piercing process
4 Functions to check the gel cards piercing process
5 Functions to check the transfer of gel cards from the drawer to the internal storage and
preparation area positions by the transport arm
6 Command to open the left and/or right drawer
k reagent or diluent.
Card offset, reagent offset or diluent offset refer to position number of corresponding card,
5.7.4.1 Transfer Cycles - Cards

The transfer cycles check the pick-and-place of gel cards by the transport arm on all positions for:
• left and right drawer;
• internal storage;
• preparation area.
The transport arm moves a or more gel cards in a loop:
• from the left drawer to a position on internal storage;
• then from the internal storage to a position of the preparation area;
• from the preparation area back to left drawer.
The transport arm repeats these movements for all positions of internal storage and preparation area.
The cycle test is defined by the following parameters.
188 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
Parameter Description
Number of cards Indicates the number of gel cards to be used
Card offset Positions on internal storage and preparation area to ignore during the cycle test.
For example, if the parameter is 5, the positions 1 to 5 are not checked by during the cycle.
Number of cycles Number of cycles to perform
Figure 222. Transfer cycles path
A Open the drawers.

OPEN LEFT DRAWER
OPEN RIGHT DRAWER
k Gel Card transfer cycles take time.

B Load:
• one gel cards tray (7) with one gel card in the first position of the tray in the left
drawer first basket position;
• five empty trays (8) in all other positions of left and right drawers.
7 8
8 8
8 8
Figure 223.
IH-500 | 189
C Enter the corresponding values in Number of cards: and Card offset: fields.
Figure 224.
The parameter Number of cards indicates the number of gel cards used for
the cycling test.
The setting Card offset indicates that the positions on the internal storage to
ignore during the cycling test.
D Enter the required values in Number of cycles: field.
E Run the transfer check.

START CARD CYCLES
 A message requesting the mapping of the machine appears.
F Confirm.
YES
 The successful cycles are displayed under Cycle passed: field.
G When all required cycles are processed, remove gel cards trays from the drawers.
5.7.4.2 Transfer Cycles - Reagents and Diluents
A Open the left drawer.

OPEN LEFT DRAWER
B Load one reagent in position 1 and one diluent in position 1.
Figure 225.
C Enter the corresponding values in Number of reagents:, Reagent offset:,

Number of diluents: and Diluent offset: fields.
Figure 226.
k Itused.
is possible to use only reagents OR diluents by entering «0» in number of resource filed not
190 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
D Select the check box:

• Reconstruction to execute mixing of the diluent to obtain a reconstruction of
the diluent solution;
• Swap to use the intermediate diluent position during cycles.
E Enter the required values in Number of cycles: field.
F Select START REAGENT/DILUENT CYCLES to run transfer check.

START REAGENT/
DILUENT CYCLES  A message requesting the mapping of the machine appears.
G Confirm.
YES
 The successful cycles are displayed under Cycle passed: field.
H When all required cycles are processed, remove gel cards trays from the drawers.
5.7.4.3 Cards Piercing Cycles
A Insert gel cards in the internal storage.
B SELECT ORIGIN
Select SELECT ORIGIN CARD PLACES (2) to select the available resources.
CARD PLACES
 The following screen displays the cards location.
Figure 227.
C Select the cards (1) and the wells (2) to be pierced.
D Validate to go back to Cycles screen.

VALIDATE SELECTION
IH-500 | 191
E MODIFY INTERMEDIATE
Select MODIFY INTERMEDIATE POSITION.
POSITION
Figure 228.
F Select the position.
G Validate to go back to Cycles screen.

VALIDATE SELECTION
H Start the process.

START At the end of the process, the number of cycles performed is displayed in the
Card piercing cycles area.
I Open the doors and remove all gel cards.
J Use the gel card and diluent piercing tool (M16140) to check all pierced wells.
The tool should go through the wells only by its own weight and without
pressure.
Figure 229.
192 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.4.4 Diluent Piercing Cycles
A Load one or several ID-Diluent 2 (1) in the pipettor area.

Risk to contaminate the n°2 diluent tip if using ID-Diluent 1.
1
2
Figure 230.
B Move the diluent completely to the right to have the same position as the
instrument puts the diluent.
C Lock the diluent rack (2).
D Select SELECT DILUENT WELLS to select available resources.

 Cycle Tips and Diluent wells area screen displays.
Figure 231.
E Select the tip (4) to use.
k Use
a Diluent 1 for the diluent tip which is responsible for diluent 1.
Use a Diluent 2 for the diluent tip which is responsible for diluent 2.
F In Diluent wells area, select wells (3) to pierce.
G Validate to go back to the Cycles screen.

VALIDATE SELECTION
H Select START button to start the process.

START
I Repeat previous operations with the other tip.
J At the end of the process, open the door and remove the diluent racks.
IH-500 | 193
K Use the Gel card and diluent piercing tool (M16140) to check all pierced wells.
Figure 232.
k The tool should go through the wells only by its own weight and without pressure.
5.7.4.5 Cycles Validation
A VALIDATE
Validate the cycles check status.
Transport Arm C...
194 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5 Teaching
This menu allows palpating the different modules of the instrument after a replacement or for
readjustment.
1
5
2 3 4
7
6
10 9
Figure 233.

2 Function to mount the probe on the gripper
Inactive if the probe is already mounted.
3 Function to remove the probe from the gripper
Inactive if the probe is not mounted.
4 LOCALIZE GRIPPER button
5 (Un)select all check box
6 Definition of the teaching positions for the pipettor area
7 Definition of the teaching positions for the transport arm area
8 Function to start the teaching of the selected positions above
9 Scrutations check box (active/inactive)
When checked, the probe state information (10) (touch / no touch) is displayed.
10 Probe state information
The option Scrutations must be enabled.
k Inperform
case of a module change or a module part change, refer to the replacement procedure to
teaching.
IH-500 | 195
5.7.5.1 Touch Probe Installation (Probe Mounting)

The touch probe is always used for teaching, except for resources sensor localization, gripper
calibration and all pipettor area teachings.
b•
Before using the touch probe, check the following points:
the body (M16637) of the touch probe is correctly tightened on the touch probe
support (M18681);
Use the probe body tool (M17799) from the gauge kit to fix the touch probe body.
• the head (M17540) is correctly magnetized on the body;
• the tip (M20667) is correctly tightened on the head.
Use the Probe tip tool (M17798) from the gauge kit to fix the touch probe tip.
k Remove dust on the vision station backlight before starting.

k mounted at the beginning of the process and removed at the end.
Several teachings with use of the probe can be performed at the same time. The probe is
k Several teachings without use of the probe can be performed at the same time.
3
1
1
Figure 234.
b Verify the correct assembly of the touch probe.

A Start the probe installation process.
MOUNT PROBE
 The transport arm moves into touch probe installation position. The instrument
doors open. A Transport arm request message is displayed.
Figure 235.
196 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
B Install the touch probe between the gripper legs.

Use 2 screws CHC M3X5 (1).
C Plug the touch probe cable (2) on the gripper (3).
D Validate the installation.

OK
 A new Transport arm request message is displayed.
Figure 236.
E Manually and carefully move the touch probe tip (4) several times.
Do at least 3 times.
F Acknowledge the message to continue.

OK
 A message displays successful connection.
Figure 237.
G Validate.
OK
 The following message appears.
Figure 238.
H Close the doors.
I Validate.
OK
IH-500 | 197
5.7.5.2 Gripper Localization
b•
Before using the touch probe, check the following points:
the body (M16637) of the touch probe is correctly tightened on the fixed probe support
(M18275);
Use the Probe body tool (M17799) from the gauge kit to fix the touch probe body (M16637).
• the head (M17540) is correctly magnetized on the body;
• the tip (M20667) is correctly tightened on the head.
Use the Probe tip tool (M17798) from the gauge kit to fix the touch probe tip (M20667).
1 4
1
Figure 239.
b adjustment.
Place carefully the localization tool (M18741) on its position to avoid incorrect
b The IH-500 localization tool is delicate, a crash or a fall can destroy it.
b Verify the correct assembly of the touch probe.
A Start the teaching of the gripper position.
LOCALIZE GRIPPER
 A confirmation request is displayed.
198 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
B Continue.
OK
 Pipetting door and right drawer open.
A Transport arm request message is displayed.
Figure 240.
C Install the touch probe as shown above.

Use 2 screws CHC M6X16 (1).
D Connect the instrument cable to the probe holder (2).
k The cable is placed under the right drawer.

E Continue.
OK
 A new Transport arm request message is displayed.
Figure 241.
F Manually and carefully move the touch probe tip (3) several times.
Do at least 3 times.
G Acknowledge the message to continue.

OK
 A message displays successful connection.
Figure 242.
IH-500 | 199
H Validate.
OK
 A Transport arm request message is displayed.
Figure 243.
I Insert and center the IH-500 localization tool (M18741) in the gripper legs (4).
J Validate the tool mounting.

OK
 The gripper legs clamp the IH-500 localization tool.
The following message appears.
Figure 244.
K Check that the tool is correctly clamped.
L Close the pipetting door.
M Acknowledge to perform the teaching.

OK
 After teaching, the transport arm goes back to its initial position. A Transport
arm request message is displayed. The pipetting door is opened.
Figure 245.
N Confirm when ready to take the tool.

OK
Figure 246.
O Perform a 180° rotation of the tool.
200 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
P Acknowledge when the tool has been turned.

OK
 The gripper legs clamp the IH-500 localization tool. The following message
appears.
Figure 247.
Q Check that the tool is correctly clamped.
R Close the pipetting door.
S Acknowledge to perform the teaching.

OK
 After teaching, the transport arm goes back to its initial position. A Transport
arm request message is displayed. The pipetting door is opened.
Figure 248.
T Confirm when ready to take the tool.

OK
U Perform another 180° rotation of the tool and repeat steps above.
V Remove the tool.
W Disconnect and remove the fixed touch probe.
X Bring back the cable in the correct position.
IH-500 | 201
Y Acknowledge the message when ready.

OK
 After successful localization, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the LocalizeGripperDone status.
Figure 249.
Z Perform a secure posing.

See chapter Secure Posing on page 233.
AA Check the following items:

• Left drawer teaching (see Left Drawer on page 213 - steps Y and Z);
• Incubator teaching - mapping (see Incubator on page 218 - step L);
• Incubator teaching - reverse transfer (see Incubator on page 218 - step M);
• Locking of the diluent rack.
Place a diluent rack in the left drawer.
With the Service Software, ask the transport arm to move it to the vision
station and then to the pipetting area position n°1 (see Transfer on page 185).
If this check or one of the above-mentioned is NOT OK, check and adjust the
gripper position. The gripper must be placed in the middle of the mechanical
looseness around the pin (between the gripper and the transport arm). The
localization, the secure posing and the four checks must be performed again.
Figure 250.
202 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5.3 J1 Calibration
The first operation performed by the manufacturer is the J1 robot calibration. The transport arm robot
(reference face (1)) has to identify its position relatively to the casing (first touched area (2)).
Figure 251.
1 J1 Robot axis
2 Diluent location used as reference axis
b Ifthetheinstrument.
J1-axis is modified, it is necessary to make a complete teaching and adjustment of
This operation is reserved to manufacturer. Perform this operation only
after confirmation from instrument support.
A Install the touch probe.

See chapter Touch Probe Installation (Probe Mounting) on page 196.
B Select Calibration J1.

In Teaching zones - Transport arm area.
Figure 252.
A password is requested: fsefis, followed by addition of the day, the month

and the year.
Example:
For 3rd February 2020 = 2020+2+3 = 2025.
The correct password is fsefis2025.
C Enter the password. Acknowledge.

OK
IH-500 | 203
D Start the teaching.

START TEACHING
 A confirmation message is displayed.
E Confirm to continue the calibration.
OK
 A palpation is performed. A message inviting to a firmware restart is displayed.
F Restart the transport arm firmware.
OK
Transport arm firmware needs to restart to use its new calculated position.
G Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:

• disconnect and remove the touch probe;
• close the doors.
H Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
 After a successful calibration, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the Calibration J1 status.
5.7.5.4 Reading Station

B Select Reading station.

C Start the teaching.

START TEACHING
 A message describing the instructions to follow is displayed.
The pipetting door opens automatically.
D Follow the instructions displayed on the screen:

• open the left door;
• withdraw all resources from the instrument;
E Confirm.
OK
 A transport arm request message is displayed.
F Follow the instructions displayed on the screen.
G Acknowledge the message when done.

 After a successful teaching, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the Reading station status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
 The transport arm moves to its touch probe removal position.
The instrument doors open.
A message is displayed.
204 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
I Follow the instructions on screen:

J Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
5.7.5.5 Front Centrifuge
Figure 253.
k Before the teaching, remove dust from the interior of the centrifuges and on the cards holders.
B Select Front centrifuge.


START TEACHING
 After the localization of front centrifuge, a Transport arm request message is
displayed.
The left drawer and the pipetting door open automatically.
D Lift up the internal storage grid.

Close the doors.
E Validate to continue.
OK
 A check is required to ensure the localization is possible.
F Check that:
• the touch probe is above the hole (1);
• the card holder N°1 is directed towards the front of the instrument.
IH-500 | 205
G Validate if the touch probe is above the hole (1).

OK
Cancel if the touch probe is not above the hole (1).

Cancel
Proceed to the next step to teach the position or adjust the position of the
centrifuge module through the 4 oblong fixing holes if the touch probe falls outside
the hole (1).
For more details see the point 3 in the notification IH-500 NI Centrifuges
Module Position.
 The pipetting door opens.
A message with instructions is displayed.
H Follow the instructions on screen.
I Open the doors and put the internal storage back in place.
J Close the drawers and the doors.
K Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
L Follow the instructions on screen.
OK
Validate.
 After the successful teaching, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the Front centrifuge status.
M Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
N Follow the instructions on screen:

O Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
206 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5.6 Rear Centrifuge
Figure 254.

B Select Rear centrifuge.


START TEACHING
 After the localization of front centrifuge, a Transport arm request message is
displayed.
The left drawer and the pipetting door open automatically.
D Open the door. Turn the internal storage up. Uncover the rear centrifuge. Remove
the reading station cover. Close the doors.
E Validate to continue.
OK
 A check is required to ensure the localization is possible.
F Check that:
• the touch probe is above the hole (1);
• the card holder N°1 is directed towards the front of the instrument.
G Validate if the touch probe is above the hole (1).

OK
Cancel if the touch probe is not above the hole (1).

Cancel
Proceed to the next step to teach the position or adjust the position of the
centrifuge module through the 4 oblong fixing holes if the touch probe falls outside
the hole (1).
For more details see the point 3 in the notification IH-500 NI Centrifuges
Module Position.
 The pipetting door opens.
A message with instructions is displayed.
IH-500 | 207
I Open the doors. Put the rear centrifuge, the internal storage and the reading
station covers back in place.
J Close the drawers and the doors.

OK
L Follow the instructions on screen.
OK
Validate.
 After the successful teaching, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the Rear centrifuge status.
M Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
N Follow the instructions on screen:


OK
5.7.5.7 Front Centrifuge Trap Door

B Select Front centrifuge trap door.


START TEACHING
D Follow the instructions on screen:

• close the centrifuge trap door and the pipetting door.
E Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
F Follow the instructions on screen.
G Validate when done.

OK
 After successful teaching, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for the Front centrifuge trap door status.
208 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
5.7.5.8 Rear Centrifuge Trap Door

B Select Rear centrifuge trap door.


START TEACHING

• close the centrifuge trap door and the pipetting door.

OK

OK
mark for the Rear centrifuge trap door status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
IH-500 | 209
5.7.5.9 Diluent Piercing Tips

B Select Diluent piercing tips.


START TEACHING
D Follow the instructions on screen.

OK
F Remove the diluent piercing tips for this teaching.

G Follow the instructions on screen.
H Validate when done.

OK
mark for the Diluent piercing tips status.
I Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
J Follow the instructions on screen:


OK
5.7.5.10 Right Drawer
b avoid incorrect adjustment.

Place carefully the gripper calibration and mapping sensor location tool on its position to
k Remove dust from the right drawer.

B Select Right drawer.

210 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu

START TEACHING
 The pipetting door opens automatically.

• close the pipetting door.

OK
 The right drawer opens automatically.
A transport arm request message is displayed.
F Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the first position.

The arrow must point to the back.
1
2
Figure 255.
G Lock the tool in its location.

Use the adjusting (2) and tightening (1) screws.
H Close the drawer.

OK
A transport arm request is displayed.
J Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the second position.

The arrow must point to the right.
1
2
Figure 256.
K Lock the tool in its location.

L Close the drawer.
IH-500 | 211
M Acknowledge when done.

OK
N Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the third position.

1
2
Figure 257.
O Lock the tool in its location.

P Close the drawer.
Q Acknowledge when done.

OK
R Follow the instructions on screen:

• remove the gripper calibration tool;
• close the drawer.
S Validate when done.

OK
 A transport arm request is displayed.
T Follow the instructions on screen.
U Validate when done.

OK
mark for the Right drawer status.
V Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
W Follow the instructions on screen:

X Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
212 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5.11 Left Drawer
b Place carefully the gripper calibration tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
k Remove dust from the left drawer.
B Select Left drawer.


START TEACHING

• close the pipetting door.

OK
 The left drawer opens automatically.
F Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the first position.

1
2
Figure 258.
G Lock the tool in its location.

H Close the drawer.

OK
IH-500 | 213
J Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the second position.

1
2
Figure 259.
K Lock the tool in its location.

L Close the drawer.
M Acknowledge when done.

OK
N Insert the gripper calibration tool (M20873) in the third position.

1
2
Figure 260.
O Lock the tool in its location.

P Close the drawer.
Q Acknowledge when done.

OK
R Follow the instructions on screen:

• remove the gripper calibration tool;
• close the drawer.
S Validate when done.

OK
T Follow the instructions on screen.
214 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
U Validate when done.

OK
mark for the Left drawer status.
V Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
W Follow the instructions on screen:

X Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
Y Perform the secure posing related to the left drawer.

Z Perform a mapping of the left drawer.

See Mapping on page 183 for more details.
A basket full of cards must be placed in the third position of the drawer.
If the mapping cannot be performed entirely, it means that the drawer is too
close to the transport arm.
Check and adjust the positioning of the drawer (plunger and covering panels).
Do the teaching, the secure posing and the check again.
5.7.5.12 Internal Storage 1
b the internal storage and associated controls is necessary.

In case of disassembly or adjustment of any part of the internal storage, the teaching of

B Select Internal storage 1.


START TEACHING

OK
k Internal storage teaching takes time.

IH-500 | 215

OK
mark for the Internal storage 1 status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
5.7.5.13 Piercer

B Select Piercer.

START TEACHING

OK

OK
mark for the Piercer status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
216 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5.14 Internal Storage 2
k The internal storage 2 is no longer used since software version V2.2.22.

B Select Internal storage 2.

k Internal storage 2 is the storage position behind the transport arm.

START TEACHING

OK
k Internal storage teaching takes time.


OK
mark for the Internal storage 2 status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
5.7.5.15 Preparation Area

B Select Preparation area.

IH-500 | 217

START TEACHING

OK
k palpation).
Two palpations are performed so it can take a long time (gripper turns 180° for the second

OK
mark for the Preparation area status.
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
5.7.5.16 Incubator

B Select Incubator.

START TEACHING

OK

OK
mark for the Incubator status.
218 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
H Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
K Perform the secure posing related to the incubator.

L Perform a mapping of the incubator.

See Mapping on page 183.
If the mapping cannot be performed entirely, it means that the incubator is too
close to the transport arm.
Adjust the positioning of the incubator and place it as far as possible from the
transport arm (closer to the pipetting robot by using the mechanical looseness
of the screws).
Do the teaching, the secure posing and check again.
M Check the reverse transfer.

This check verifies the possible transfer of the card in reverse position n°16
(See Transfer on page 185).
To do so, place a card in a card block in the preparation area.
With the Service Software, ask the transport arm to map all positions of the
instrument and to move the card block from the preparation area to the
pipetting area (in an empty position).
Ask the transport arm to move the CARD from the pipetting area to the vision
station and then to the incubator position n°16.
Ask the transport arm to take the card from the incubator and to move it to the
vision station. This final transfer is the one at risk. If the robot successfully took
the card, the check is OK.
Ask the robot to move the card to the solid waste.If it is impossible, adjust the
position of the incubator and place it as far as possible from the transport arm
(closer to the pipetting robot by using the mechanical looseness of the
screws). Do the teaching, the secure posing and the check again.
IH-500 | 219
5.7.5.17 Pipetting Reagent Area
1 2
2nd row
3rd row 4th row 5th row

Figure 261.
b Place
carefully the IH-500 reagent area teaching tool on its position to avoid incorrect
adjustment.

B Select Pipetting reagent area.


START TEACHING
E Remove the knurled screw (1).
F Move the reagent module insulating body (2) to the rear to release it from the
retaining clips.
220 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
G Rotate and extract the reagent module insulating body (3).
3
2
Figure 262.
b Do not damage the motor connector when removing the reagent module insulating body.
H Place the five IH-500 reagent area teaching tools M19892 in the middle of the
second row.
I Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
J Follow the instructions on screen.
K Move the five IH-500 reagent area teaching tools M19892 to the middle of the
third row.
L Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
M Follow the instructions on screen.
N Move the five IH-500 reagent area teaching tools M19892 to the middle of the
fourth row.

OK
P Follow the instructions on screen.
Q Move the five IH-500 reagent area teaching tools M19892 to the middle of the fifth
row.
R Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
S Follow the instructions on screen.
mark for the Pipetting reagent area status.
IH-500 | 221
T Refit the reagent module insulating body.

By proceeding reversely.
b Do not damage the motor connector when installing the reagent module insulating body.
U Remove the probe.
REMOVE PROBE
The instrument doors open. A message is displayed.
V Follow the instructions on screen:

W Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
X Perform an update of the pipetting reagent area points.

See chapter Pipettor Area Update on page 232.
5.7.5.18 Pipetting Cards Block Area
b Dispensing in the gel cards is critical. The adjustment must be very accurate.
B Select Pipetting card block area.


START TEACHING

k The reagent module insulating body must be to removed.

k Make sure that the gel card block is inserted correctly.
mark for the Pipetting card block area status.
k Put the reagent module insulating body back in place.

F Remove the probe.
REMOVE PROBE
222 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
G Follow the instructions on screen:

H Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
I Update the pipetting card block area points.

J Check the Pipettor position in the card block for all position. Adjust if needed.
See chapter Check on page 247.
5.7.5.19 Pipetting Diluent Area

B Select Pipetting diluent area.


START TEACHING

F Acknowledge the message when done.

OK
mark for the Pipetting diluent area status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE
H Follow the instructions on screen:


OK
J Update the pipetting diluent area points.

IH-500 | 223
5.7.5.20 Pipetting Sample Area

B Select Pipetting sample area.


START TEACHING


OK
mark for the Pipetting sample area status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
J Update the pipetting sample area points.

5.7.5.21 Diluent Swap Rack

B Select Diluent swap rack.


START TEACHING

224 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu

OK
mark for the Diluent swap rack status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
5.7.5.22 Diluent Intermediate Rack

B Select Diluent intermediate rack.


START TEACHING


OK
mark for the Diluent intermediate rack status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
IH-500 | 225
5.7.5.23 Washing Station

B Select Washing station.


START TEACHING


OK
mark for the Washing station status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
J Update the washing station area points.

226 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.5.24 Common Reference Point
Figure 263.
b Place carefully the pipettor localization tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
B Select Point of reference transport arm.


START TEACHING
E Place the pipettor localization tool M20093 (1) on the diluent pipetting area.
Use 4 screws CHC M3x8.
F Validate when done.

OK
mark for the Point of reference transport arm status.
G Remove the probe.

REMOVE PROBE


OK
J Perform a teaching of pipetting area points.

See chapter Pipettor Teaching on page 231.
b This step is mandatory and must be performed directly after this procedure.
K Perform all the pipettor points update.
IH-500 | 227
5.7.5.25 Resources Sensor Localization
b position to avoid incorrect adjustment.

Place carefully the gripper calibration and mapping sensor localization tool on its
A Select Resources sensor localization.

B Start the teaching.

START TEACHING
C Follow the instructions on screen.
D Insert the gripper calibration and mapping sensor location tool (M20873) in the
third position.
1
2
Figure 264.
E Lock the tool in its location.

F Close the drawer.
G Validate.
OK
I Adjust the resources sensor screw (3) until the LED flashes (unstable detection).
Figure 265.
228 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
J Close the instrument doors.
K Validate.
OK
L Select the button corresponding to the status of sensor (3 requests display).
Figure 266.

The left drawer opens automatically.
M Follow the instructions on screen.
N Close the left drawer.
O Validate.
OK
mark for the Resources sensor localization status.
k case, the instrument checks with the gripper the presence of the vial. 2 wrong detections of
On the reagent plate, the mapping sensor may detect a vial whereas no vial is present. In this
vials are acceptable.
IH-500 | 229
5.7.5.26 Gripper Calibration
b position to avoid incorrect adjustment.

Place carefully the gripper calibration and mapping sensor localization tool on its
A Select Gripper calibration.


START TEACHING
D Insert a B2C gel card in a gel card tray.
Figure 267.
k New manufactured gel cards are identifiable with letter A or B marked between wells 3 and 4.
E Insert the gripper calibration and mapping sensor location tool (M20873) in the
third position.
1
2
Figure 268.
F Center the tool in its location.

G Place the tray with one gel card.
H Close the drawer.
I Validate.
OK
The left drawer opens automatically.
J Follow the instructions on screen.
K Close the left drawer.
230 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
L Validate.
OK
mark for the Gripper calibration status.
5.7.5.27 Pipettor Teaching
Figure 269.
A Check the Teach pipetting cards block 1, 2, 3 and 4 boxes.

In Teaching zones - Pipettor area.
k one.
If only one gel cards tool is available, perform the procedure by selecting gel cards block one by

START TEACHING
D Place 4 gel cards tool M20579 (1) on the gel cards pipetting area.
F Validate.
OK
mark for all update statuses.
IH-500 | 231
5.7.5.28 Pipettor Area Update
k selected area. This update is necessary after a new transport arm teaching of an area shared
The pipettor area points update operates a new calculation of the points coordinates of the
with Pipettor, for example after washing station replacement.
b been done, a pipettor position check in card block must be done.

Dispensing in gel cards is critical. When an update of the card block area points has
See chapter Check on page 247.
A Select the desired points area to update in the Teaching zones - Pipettor area
Washing station points for example.
Figure 270.

START TEACHING
 After successful update, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check mark
for the selected area points status.
Figure 271.
232 | IH-500
Transport Arm Menu
5.7.6 Secure Posing

During this process, transport arm will teach and record, for each position, electrical parameters
corresponding to a normal posing move.
3 5
Figure 272.

2 Selection of the positions to teach in the Card area
3 Function to start the teaching of the selected positions in (2)
4 Selection of the positions to teach in the Others area
5 Function to start the teaching of the selected positions in (4)
b The secure posing is done at factory. It is not required on the field unless clearly
expressed during the replacement of a part.
Refer to the Replacement Procedure document (RP).
k All statuses automatically switch to validated if teaching succeed.

5.7.6.1 Cards
A Select the areas to be secured in the Cards area.
Select (Un)select all to de-select all areas.

START TEACHING
 A message is displayed to verify the instrument state.
C Follow instructions on screen to load resources in specified locations:
• 1 gel card tray with one B2C gel card in position 1 in left drawer;
Do not use the B2C card from the gauge kit.
• 5 empty trays in the drawer;
• 8 card blocks in preparation area.
IH-500 | 233
D Validate to start the teaching.

OK
 After successful process, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for all corresponding statuses (and text Done is displayed).
Figure 273.
E Open the drawers.
F Remove all resources.
G Close the drawers.
5.7.6.2 Others
A Select the types of resources to be secured in the Others area.
Select (Un)select all to deselect all resources.

START TEACHING
 A message is displayed to verify the instrument state.
C Follow instructions to load resources in specified locations:
• 1 reagent;
• 2 diluents;
• 2 diluents tips;
• All sample racks.
D Validate to start the teaching.

OK
 After successful process, the red cross mark is replaced by a green check
mark for all corresponding statuses (and text Done is displayed).
Figure 274.
E Open the drawers and the instrument door.
F Remove all resources.
G Close the drawers and the instrument door.
234 | IH-500
Centrifuge Menu
5.8 Centrifuge Menu

This menu allows to pre control centrifuges and to check their temperatures.
5.8.1 Pre Control – Front Centrifuge and Rear Centrifuge
k Rear Centrifuge.
The description applies for the screens Pre Control - Front Centrifuge and Pre Control -
1 2
6 7
Figure 275.
1 Contextual menu to display the screen PRE CONTROL- FRONT CENTRIFUGE

2 Contextual menu to display the screen PRE CONTROL-REAR CENTRIFUGE
3 Temperature parameters of the centrifuge and command to start/stop the centrifuge
temperature regulation
4 Parameters, functions and status related to the current position
5 Settings and function to test the centrifuge axis
6 Parameters and functions for performing a centrifuge burn-in
7 Parameters and functions for performing a centrifuge cycle
k positions for the transport arm.

Modifying the centrifuge initialization position (SAVE ORIGIN) requires to re-teach the centrifuge
IH-500 | 235
5.8.1.1 Front Centrifuge - Current Position Check
b centrifugation must be checked.

After an intervention on centrifuge motorization, the correct rotation sense for
b must be checked.
After an intervention on centrifuges, the correct lock of centrifuges covers and trapdoors
A Set the centrifuge rotation speed in the Check axis area.

• Step (°) = 30;
• Speed (rpm) = 15.
B Slide the cursor to rotate the centrifuge head.
Figure 276.
Select the rotation buttons to check a step-by-step movement.

According to the value previously entered.
C Lift up the cards internal storage (1) to access the front centrifuge.
D Move the centrifuge head to the initialized position.

INIT
k The
Origin sensor is Active only when the angle current position is near 0°. It indicates the
real initialization position of the motor encoder.
E Check that the gel card holder N°1 (2) is oriented to the front of the instrument.
F If this is not the case, set the centrifuge motor to freewheel.

FREEWHEEL
G Manually rotate the centrifuge head to orientate the holder N°1 in front of the
instrument (2).
H Save the new position.

SAVE ORIGIN
I Confirm the new origin values.

YES
J VALIDATE
Validate.
FrontCentrifugeB...
K Proceed to a teaching of the centrifuge with the new origin position.

See chapter Front Centrifuge on page 205.
236 | IH-500
Centrifuge Menu
Figure 277.
IH-500 | 237
5.8.1.2 Rear Centrifuge - Current Position Check
b centrifugation must be checked.

After an intervention on centrifuge motorization, the correct rotation sense for
b must be checked.
A Set the centrifuge rotation speed in the Check axis area.

• Step (°) = 30;
• Speed (rpm) = 15.
B Slide the cursor to rotate the centrifuge head.
Figure 278.
C Select the rotation buttons to check a step-by-step movement.

According to the value previously entered.
D Uncover the rear centrifuge.
E Select PRE CONTROL-REAR CENTRIFUGE contextual menu to access rear

centrifuge screen.
F Move the centrifuge head to the initialized position.

INIT
G Check that the Origin sensor state information is Active.
k The Origin sensor is Active only when the angle current position is near 0°. It indicates the
real initialization position of the motor encoder.
H Check that the gel card holder N°1 (2) is oriented to the front of the instrument.
I If this is not the case, set the centrifuge motor to freewheel.

FREEWHEEL
Proceed as described in chapter Front Centrifuge - Current Position Check on
page 236.
J VALIDATE
Validate.
RearCentrifugeB...
238 | IH-500
Centrifuge Menu
Figure 279.
IH-500 | 239
5.8.1.3 Trap Door Open/Close Check (Auto-locking)
b must be checked.
5.8.1.4 Centrifugation Burn-In
A Set the Cycle number in the Burn-in area.

For example, Cycle number = 5.
B Start the burn-in process.

START
C Stop the operation before the last cycle ends.

STOP Otherwise one more cycle is performed.
D Check that the number of cycles performed is equal to the one defined in Cycle
number.
Displayed by the field Cycle passed:.
E VALIDATE
Validate.
FrontCentrifugeB...
5.8.1.5 Centrifugation Cycle
b Never start a centrifuge cycle without closing cover and trap.

A Load the 2 centrifuge heads with 12 gel cards (not pierced).
Figure 280.
240 | IH-500
Centrifuge Menu
B Close the rear centrifuge cover or/and the lower the cards internal storage.
Figure 281.
C Close the traps.

Check for the correct closing of the centrifuge trap.
D Set the following parameters for the centrifugation cycle:

• Rotation time = 30s;
• Speed = default value;
• Acceleration = default value.
k Default parameters for speed and acceleration:

Nominal rotation speed reached after 16s.
• speed: 1008 rpm or 6048°/s;

• acceleration: 394°/s2.
E Start the centrifugation cycle.

START
F Check that the centrifuge heads rotates counter-clockwise.
Figure 282.
IH-500 | 241
G Check, through the trapdoors, the rotation speed is 1008 ± 5 rpm.

Use a stroboscope.
Figure 283.
k No speed adjustment is available.

H Check that the holders are moving up to 90° position through the trap.
Use the stroboscope.
90°
Figure 284.
I Stop the centrifugation cycle, if an interruption is required.

STOP CENTRIFUGE
J When the checks are OK, remove all gel cards.
242 | IH-500
Centrifuge Menu

This screen allows to:
• check the measured temperatures;
• control the automatic regulation of the centrifuge cooling.
8 7 6 5 4
Figure 285.

IH-500 | 243
5.9 Pipettor Menu

This menu allows to:
• pre-control and check the needle position;
• perform a burn-in and adjustments for the pediatric and low volume sample tubes.
k Make sure the pipetting area access door is closed. Otherwise the menu is not available.
5.9.1 Pre Control
3
4
Figure 286.

2 Command and setting for moving the pipettor
3 Command and setting for checking the X-Y axis
4 Command and setting for checking the Z axis
244 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
5.9.1.1 Current Position Check
A Press the key.

IDLE FRONT
 The pipettor goes to high position (Z axis), moves to the right (X axis) then to
the front (Y axis) of the instrument.
B Press the key.

IDLE BACK
 The pipettor goes to high position (Z axis), moves to the right (X axis) then to
the rear (Y axis) of the instrument.
Figure 287.
5.9.1.2 Procedure
A Initialize each axis to make sure that the initialization position is available.
INIT X
Use the function keys to initialize each axis in the XY check and Z check
areas.
INIT Y
INIT Z
B Check that the origin state information turn to Active.

Origin sensors only turn active when the current position is close to 0.
Active
k The Origin sensor indicates the real initialization position of the motor encoder.
C Expand the State module panel. Initialize the pipettor.
INITIALIZE
Wait until the pipettor status is Functional.
k The hole and the needle must be clean to perform this operation.
D Check the needle localization.
CHECK CONTACT
DETECTION
k During the check, the pipettor localization is repeated three times at least.
IH-500 | 245
E Validate the result.

OK
The needle tip is not in the hole, if the needle localization fails. Proceed to the
next step to adjust the localization position.
F Align the needle tip with the center of the hole, without touching the bottom.
Use the cursors of XY check and Z check areas to move the needle tip.
k Also possible to use the keyboard arrow keys (left/right/up/down) instead of the touch screen.
G SAVE Save the new position.
LOCALIZATION
POSITION
k correctly, there is no need to use this.

The position is only stored in order to perform a localization test. If the localization works
H Check the needle localization.

CHECK CONTACT
DETECTION
I Validate the result.

OK
X
Y
Figure 288.
246 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
5.9.2 Check
This menu allows to check the position of the needle in every possible position. Single points can also
be adjusted here.
10 2
7 6 5 4
9 8
Figure 289.

2 Area for position selection
3 Functions and parameters for Z-axis adjustment
4 VALIDATE button
5 ADJUST POINT button
6 APPROACH XYZ button
To move the pipettor to the selected position on X, Y and Z axes.
7 APPROACH XY button
To move the pipettor to the selected position only on X and Y axes.
8 Go on click ON/OFF option
If this option is ON, the pipettor moves to the position (X, Y and Z axes) as soon as the tool
position is selected on screen.
9 Automatic door opening ON/OFF option
If this option is ON, the instrument door opens automatically after the pipettor movement, for an
easier check.
10 Macro selection area
b Perform a first approach with APPROACH XY button, then the Z adjustment manually
There is a risk of crash in Z axis if the tool position or adjustments are not correct.
with cursor.
IH-500 | 247
5.9.2.1 Reagents
b Place carefully the reagent tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
k Always install the reagent tool in the longitudinal direction of the reagent module.
A Select Macro selection - Reagents (10 - Figure 289).
B Insert the IH-500 reagent tool (M20880) in position 28 (11) on the reagent module.
C Select the IH-500 reagent tool position.

In the example, position 28.
 If the option GO ON CLICK is selected (ON), the pipettor automatically moves
to the selected position.
D Move the pipettor to the selected position.

APPROACH XYZ
E Check that the needle is centered on the target.

If the position needs to be adjusted, refer to chapter Pipettor Position
Adjustment on page 256.
k Use the Z-axis adjustment function keys to make easier the position check.
k The adjustment is available only for the selected position.
F Select Macro selection - Idle back (10 - Figure 289) to move back the
pipettor.
To get an access to the IH-500 reagent tool.
G Repeat the procedure for the 4 corner positions (12) on the reagent module.
248 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
11
12
Figure 290.
IH-500 | 249
5.9.2.2 Card Blocks
b Dispensing in the gel cards is critical. Adjustments and checks must be very accurate.
b Place carefully the gel card tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
A Select Macro selection - Card blocks (10 - Figure 289).
B Install the IH-500 Gel card tool (M20579) in the card blocks area (1) of the pipettor.
C Select the well 1 of card 1 (6) corresponding to the position of the IH-500 gel card
tool.

APPROACH XYZ
E Place the IH-500 Z needle control tool (M20882) (2) between the top of IH-500 Gel
card tool (M20579) and the needle.
F Check on the IH-500 Z needle control tool that:

• the 2.8 mm thick side (3) and (4) passes;
• the 3.2 mm thick side (2) does not pass.
G Remove the IH-500 Z needle control tool (2).
H Check that the needle is centred on the target (5).

I Select Macro selection - Idle back (10 - Figure 289) to move back the
pipettor.
J Repeat the procedure for the 96 positions of the gel card block.
Adjust only the wells 1 and 6 for each line (card).
The wells 2, 3, 4 and 5 are automatically calculated.
250 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
2 1
Figure 291.
IH-500 | 251
5.9.2.3 Diluents
b Place carefully the diluent rack tool on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
A Select Macro selection - Diluents (10 - Figure 289).
B Place the diluent rack tool (M20158) (1) in position 1 of the pipettor area.
k rack.
Move the tool completely to the right to insert it the same way the instrument inserts a diluent
C Lock the diluent rack tool (2).
D Select well 1 of the rack 1 (4) corresponding to the position of the tool.
E Move the pipettor to the selected position.

APPROACH XYZ
F Check that the needle is centered on the target (3).

G Select Macro selection - Idle back to move back the pipettor.
H Repeat the procedure for the extreme positions of each rack (5).
252 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
4 5
Figure 292.
IH-500 | 253
5.9.2.4 Samples
b Place carefully the sample tube on its position to avoid incorrect adjustment.
A Select Macro selection - Samples (10 - Figure 289).
B Place the tube Ø12x75 (M12450) (1) in position 1 on sample tube rack 1.
C Select sample 1 of rack 1 (3) corresponding to the corresponding sample position.


APPROACH XYZ
E Check that the needle is centered on the target (2).

F Select Macro selection - Idle back to move back the pipettor.
G Repeat the procedure for all positions (4) of the rack.
Figure 293.
254 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
5.9.2.5 Washing Station
A Select Macro selection - Wash (10 - Figure 289).
B Select the top of the overflow well (1).

C Move the pipettor to the selected position.

APPROACH XYZ
D Check that the needle is centered on the selected well (4).

k The point adjustment is available only for the selected position.

E Select Macro selection - Idle back to move back the pipettor.
F Repeat the procedure for the decontamination (2) and overflow (3) wells.
Top and bottom.
2 4
Figure 294.
IH-500 | 255
5.9.2.6 Pipettor Position Adjustment

It may be necessary to adjust a position after teaching.
k The point adjustment is available only for the selected position.

A Select the wrong pipettor position adjustment.
ADJUST POINT
 The pipettor position screen is displayed.
Figure 295.
In the top of the pipettor position screen, the position to be adjusted is

recalled. For example: SystemSolutionWashingHigh.
k Only this position will be saved.

B Move the needle tip.
Use the cursors located in the XY adjustment and Z adjustment areas.
k Also possible to use the keyboard arrow keys (left/right/up/down) instead of the touch screen.
Modify the XY speed and Z speed values to move the pipettor faster.
Fields located in XY adjustment and Z adjustment areas.
k Visible when using the axis cross adjuster.

Modify the XY step and Z step values to allows a pipettor larger incremental
step.
Fields located in XY adjustment and Z adjustment areas.
k Visible when selecting the direction button (+XY, -XY, +Z, -Z).
C Move the needle until the tip is centered and flushed with the target.
~ 0 mm
Figure 296.
D Store the new X-Y position.

SAVE XY
E Confirm.
YES
F Store the new Z position.

SAVE Z
256 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
G Confirm.
YES
H Exit the page and return to the pipettor check menu.

SELECT POINT
5.9.3 Burn In
Figure 297.
A Enter a CYCLE NUMBER.
B Enter a WAITING TIME between 2 cycles.
C Start the burn in.

START
D Check that the CYCLE PASSED number is equal to the predefined CYCLE
NUMBER.
E VALIDATE
Validate.
PipettorBurninVa...
IH-500 | 257
5.9.4 Block Adjustment

This function sets the parameters for sampling RBC for:
• pediatric patient tubes (sample tubes block type 02 and 12);
• sample tubes block “low volume” (sample tubes block type 06 and 16).
The configuration of the pediatric or low volume is performed for a specific type of tube. See chapter
Configuration of the Pediatric and Low Volume Tubes on page 123.
k The user is responsible for the validation of this adjustment.

When validated, it is not possible to use an other type of tube as the one defined.
k If the user wants to sample into other tubes, the FSE must set new parameters for the tubes.
k block of this type of tubes is introduced in the instrument, the tubes are not well identified, a
If the configuration of the pediatric or low volume tube is not performed, and if one sample tube
0x0118902 error will be displayed, and all the tubes will be considered as absent.
2 3
Figure 298.

2 Type of block (pediatric or low volume)
3 Current position data
4 Parameters for the tubes definition
5 Tube position on the rack
258 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
Sampling Parameters
A Bottom position (mm) offset compared to the Z reference of each tube
B Sampling offset Serum (mm) lowest Serum sampling position compared to the bottom of the tube
C Sampling offset CRBC (mm) RBC sampling position compared to the bottom of tube
D Tube’s depth (mm) internal height of the tube, between the bottom (value declared above)
and the top of the tube
E Tube’s internal diameter (mm) the diameter of the tube measured on the top of the tube
Pediatric Tube Low Volume Tube

A
E
D
B
A
B
E D
C
Figure 299.
IH-500 | 259
Pediatric / Low Volume Tube Adjustment

The values for the pediatric and low volume tubes given below as example are for:
• pediatric tube of 5ml;
• low volume of 5ml (with round bottom).
This adjustment allows test of titration or identification with min, 700μl of plasma.
k The user is responsible for the validation of this adjustment.

A Select Pediatric or Low volume in the popup menu Block type.
B Load a sample rack in lane 1, with:

• one Low volume sample block (type 06 or 16) in rear position with, in position
1 of the block (1), one empty tube of the type which will be used on this
sample block;
• and/or one Pediatric sample block (type 02 or 12) in front position with, in
position 1 of the block (position 6 of the rack) (2), one empty pediatric tube of
the type which will be used on this sample block.
1
2
Figure 300.
C Move the pipettor above the tube.

APPROACH XY
D Release the pipettor Z-axis drive motor.

FREEWHEEL Z
E OPEN PIPETTING
Open the pipetting door to reach the needle.
DOOR
260 | IH-500
Pipettor Menu
F Move down the needle until it touches the bottom of the tube.
Pediatric Tube Low Volume Tube
Figure 301.
G Save the current Z axis position.

GET POSITION FROM Z
 The value in Bottom position (mm) is equal to the Z current position.
H Enter the new value in the field Sampling offset CRBC (mm).
In the example:
• Pediatric tube offset = 1.5 mm;
• Low volume tube offset = 1 mm.
I Enter the internal height of the pediatric tube in the field Tube’s depth.
In the example:
• for pediatric tube = 42 mm;
• for low volume tube = 74 mm.
Otherwise an error message is displayed.
J Enter the new value in the field Sampling offset Serum (mm).
In the example:
K Enable the option Level detection active.
L Enter the internal diameter in the field Tube’s internal diameter (mm).
In the example:
M Save the new values.

SAVE PARAMETERS
N Confirm.
YES
O Close the pipetting door.
P Remove the pediatric or low volume sample tube.
Q Restart the instrument to use the new values.
IH-500 | 261
5.10 Hydraulic Menu

• activate all hydraulic components represented in the interactive hydraulic diagram area;
• prime and purge the hydraulic circuit;
• check the level detection;
• check the sampling / dispensing;
• operate the needle replacement.
5.10.1 Units
This screen allows to activate hydraulic components individually.
1
6
5
3
4
Figure 302.

2 Interactive hydraulic circuit diagram
Used to start/stop valves or pumps and display the sensors status.
3 PIPETTOR TO COLLECT WELL command
4 Flushing process start command
Used to start a flushing process of the hydraulic circuit.
5 Fluidic state reset command
Used to reset all hydraulic components to the default state.
6 Intermediate container filling command
Used to fill the intermediate container and to maintain the level.
262 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
Select the valves to activate/deactivate. The status is shown by the continuous line.
EV04 EV04
Figure 303.
Select the pumps to start/stop them. Next available action changes accordingly.
PO05 PO05
Figure 304.
When the hydraulic sensors state changes, the corresponding colour and state information change
accordingly.
CP36 CP36
Connect Disconn
Figure 305.
b Individual hydraulic component activation could cause overflow.

A warning message displays in most risked configuration.
b Except PO02 PDS pump, all components can be driven dry.
IH-500 | 263
5.10.1.1 Sensors
Connection Sensors
A Press down the detection handle of the system liquid container 1 corresponding to
sensor CP36.
B Check that the sensor CP36 state information changes.

In the interactive hydraulic diagram area.
C Repeat the procedure for the sensors CP37, CP30 and CP31.
Level sensors
A Approach the hand to the level sensor CP33 (waste container 2).

C Repeat procedure with CP32, CP41, CP42, CP40 and CP70 (overflow sensor).
CP31
CP37
CP30
CP36
CP33
CP32
CP41
CP42
CP40
CP70
Figure 306.
264 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
Container Presence Sensors

The container presence sensors detect magnets present in the waste and system liquid containers.
A Insert the waste container 1 (2) in position 1 to check the sensor CP34.

C Repeat the procedure for the waste container position 2 and the sensor CP35.
D Insert a cleaning liquid container (black cap) (1) in the first system liquid container
position to check the sensor CP38.
E Check that the sensor CP38 state information changes.

F Repeat the procedure for the system liquid container in position 2 and the sensor
CP39.
CP35
CP34
CP39
CP38
Figure 307.
IH-500 | 265
5.10.1.2 Hydraulic Components
EV05
EV06
EV03
PO04
EV04 EV07
PO05
FT02
FT01
FT05
PO01
PO03
Figure 308.
b Each component can be driven individually, BUT when using liquid make sure dispensing
is sucked in waste circuit.
k All components can be activated when dry (purged circuit), except PDS pump PO02.
k Activation can be validated by state change noise or electrical motor start.
k Sound for solenoid valves can be very low.
266 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
A Insert at least:
• a full system liquid container;
• an empty liquid waste container.
Figure 309.
B Connect the fittings.
k The suggested following configuration allows to check the components.

Filling Pump PO01
b Stop the pump soon enough to avoid liquid overflow.

A Select PO01 to activate the filling pump.
 The filling pump activation increases the liquid level in the intermediate tank.
M18990 Intermediate tank M18990 Intermediate tank
10μm filter 10μm filter
PO01 Floater PO01 Floater
Filling pump Filling pump

10μm filter 10μm filter
Figure 310.
B Select PO01 to stop the filling pump.
C Select RESET FLUIDIC STATE to initialize the component configuration.

RESET FLUIDIC STATE
IH-500 | 267
Waste Pump PO05

Flow diagram for collect well draining.
Decontamination well
Overflow well
Collect well
Overflow
well
EV05
Collect well
EV06
Decontamination
well
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
Waste container 1 Waste container 1
CP34 CP35
Present Present
Figure 311.
A Check that the EV03 drives the flow into the present container.
Otherwise select the EV03 icon to change direction.
B Select PO05 to activate waste pump.
C Listen to suction noise to make sure waste circuit is OK.
D Pour demineralized water in collect well (in the middle).

As soon as the liquid is pumped, the suction noise changes.
E Once finished, check that the well is dry.
F Select PO05 to stop waste pump.
G Select RESET FLUIDIC STATE to initialize the component configuration.

RESET FLUIDIC STATE
268 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
Washing Pump PO04

Flow diagram of the needle washing.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Figure 312.
A Select START INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER FILLING button (6) to allow the

system to automatically maintain the level in the intermediate container.
B Select PIPETTOR TO COLLECT WELL (3) to move the pipettor to the washing
station.
C Check that the EV03 drives the flow into the present container.
Otherwise select the EV03 icon to change direction.
D Select PO05 to activate waste pump.
E Listen to the suction noise to make sure the waste circuit is OK.
F Select EV02 to configure circuit to drain collect well.
G Select PO04 to activate washing pump.
H Check that the liquid flows through the needle.
I Make sure there are no leaks on fittings:

• between faradized vein and needle;
• between faradized vein and complete sampling module.
J Select PO04 to stop washing pump.
K Select PO05 to stop waste pump.

 An overflow warning message is displayed.
L Acknowledge the risks and select FORCE.
M Select RESET FLUIDIC STATE to initialize the component configuration.

RESET FLUIDIC STATE
IH-500 | 269
PDS Pump PO02

Flow diagram of the PDS pump.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Figure 313.
A Select START INTERMEDIATE CONTAINER FILLING button (6) to allow the

system to automatically maintain level in the intermediate container.
B Select PIPETTOR TO COLLECT WELL (3) button to move the pipettor to the
washing station.
C Check that the EV03 drives flow into the present container.
Otherwise select EV03 icon to change direction.
D Select PO05 to activate the waste pump.
E Listen to suction noise to make sure waste circuit is OK.
F Select PO02 to start the PDS pump.
G Check that the liquid flows through the needle.
H Select PO02 to stop the PDS pump.
I Select PO05 to stop waste pump.
J Select RESET FLUIDIC STATE to initialize the component configuration.

RESET FLUIDIC STATE
270 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
Decontamination Pump PO03

Flow diagram of the decontamination circuit:
Overflow
well
Collect well
Decontamination
well
Overflow well
Collect well
PO03 EV05
EV06
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
Decontamination
solution
CP40 CP34 CP35

Filled Present Present
Figure 314.
b This circuit contains Soda NaOH.

A Check that the EV03 drives the flow into the present container.
Otherwise select EV03 icon to change direction.
B Select PO05 to activate waste pump.
C Listen to the suction noise to make sure that the waste circuit is OK.
D Select PO03 to start Decontamination pump.

 The Decontamination pump supplies NAOH in the Decontamination well. Once
filled, the decontamination well overflows in the collect well.
The suction noise changes, indicating that the liquid is pumped and the pump
PO03 works normally.
E Select PO03 to stop the decontamination pump.
F Select EV05 to configure the circuit to drain the decontamination well.

 The content of well is pumped by PO05
The suction noise changes when the well is empty.
IH-500 | 271
G Select PO05 to stop waste pump.

 An overflow warning message is displayed.
H Acknowledge the risks and select FORCE.
I Select EV05 to restore the default configuration.
Overflow well
Collect well
PO03 EV05
EV06
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
Decontamination
solution
CP40 CP34 CP35

Filled Present Present
Figure 315.
J Select RESET FLUIDIC STATE to initialize the component configuration.

RESET FLUIDIC STATE
272 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.2 Fluidic Circuits
2 3 4
10 5
9 6
8 7
Figure 316.

2 Intermediate container filling area
To fill the intermediate container and to maintain the level.
3 Weekly maintenance area
To start weekly maintenance.
4 Needle change area
To periodically replace the needle.
5 Needle washing area
To perform different cycles of needle washing.
6 PDS Activation command
To initiate a cycle of activation for the PDS module (to be performed after a replacement)
7 Draining check area
8 Decontamination well area
To prime or purge the decontamination circuit
9 Fluidic circuit area
To prime, purge or flush fluidic circuits.
10 Containers area
To display the containers in use.
IH-500 | 273
5.10.2.1 Intermediate Container Filling
A Validate the automatic filling mode.

START In the Intermediate container filling area.
5.10.2.2 Weekly Maintenance
A Start the weekly maintenance.

START In the Weekly maintenance area.
B Follow the instructions on screen.

Select Next for each step.
Figure 317.
 Successful Weekly maintenance is displayed.
Figure 318.
C Finish the weekly maintenance.

Finish
274 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.2.3 Needle Change
b The needle can be contaminated. Use protections.

A Start the needle change.
START In the Needle change area.
B Confirm.
Next
 A warning about the mandatory use of gloves is displayed.
C Confirm.
Next

Select NEXT for each step.
k Make sure that the localization hole and the needle are clean.
E Wait during the finalization.
 The automate operates a localization of the needle.
Figure 319.
F Exit the sequence.

Finish
5.10.2.4 Needle Washing
A Select HT (rinsing only) (Hematies Test) check box.

In the Needle washing area.
B Enter Cycle number: 5.
C Start the sequence.

START  When the washes succeed, the field cycles passed display 5/5. The START
button is enabled.
D Select Others (decontamination) check box.

E Enter Cycle number: 5.
IH-500 | 275
F Start the sequence.

button is enabled.
G Select the Initialization & errors check box.

H Enter Cycle number: 1.
I Start the sequence.

button is enabled.
J Select Titration Buffer check box.

Titration Buffer is a short interval for internal needle washing after a titration
test.
K Select Titration 2 check box.

Titration 2 is the needle washing procedure after a titration test.
L Enter Cycle number: 1.
M Start the sequence.

button is enabled.
N VALIDATE
Validate.
Fluidic Circuits
5.10.2.5 Fluidic Circuit
Priming
The priming is used to fill the whole hydraulic circuit between the intermediate tank and the needle.
 All bubbles are eliminated.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Figure 320.
k The START PRIME button is active only if the Intermediate container filling is started.
A Start the priming.
START In the Fluidic circuit area.
A successful priming enables the START PRIME button.
276 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
Purge
The purge allows to empty the hydraulic circuit between the intermediate tank and waste container.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Overflow well
Collect well
EV05
EV06
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
CP34 CP35
Present Present
Figure 321.
k Purge is necessary before using Maintenance solution or before decommissioning.

A Purge the circuit.
START PURGE
In the Fluidic circuit area.
A successful purge enables the START PURGE button.
IH-500 | 277
Flushing
The flushing allows to evacuate particles in the hydraulic circuit.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Figure 322.
k The flushing is necessary when the circuit is filled for the first time with liquid and after
intervention on:
• the intermediate tank;
• the tubing between the intermediate tank and the complete sampling module;
• the washing pump;
• the complete sampling module;
• the faradized vein.
A Validate the automatic filling mode.

START In the Intermediate container filling area.
B Start the flushing process.

START FLUSHING
C Supply the containers as described.
Figure 323.
278 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
D Press the button to proceed.

Next
 Successful Flushing is displayed.
Figure 324.
E Finish the sequence.

Finish
5.10.2.6 Decontamination Well
Priming
The decontamination priming brings the NaOH to the top of decontamination well.
 All bubbles are eliminated.
Overflow well
Collect well
PO03
EV05
Decontamination
solution
CP40
Filled
Figure 325.
A Select START PRIME.

START PRIME
In the Decontamination well area.
A successful decontamination priming enables the START PRIME button.
IH-500 | 279
Purge
The purge allows to empty the hydraulic circuit.
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Overflow well
Collect well
EV05
EV06
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
CP34 CP35
Present Present
Figure 326.
A Select START PURGE.

START PURGE
Purge succeeded turns the inactive START PURGE button in active.
280 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.2.7 Draining Check

CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Overflow well
Collect well
EV05
EV06
PO05
EV03
CP30 CP31
Not full Not full
CP32 CP33
Not full Not full
CP34 CP35
Present Present
Figure 327.
A Check the draining in all collectors and wells.

START In the Draining check area.
IH-500 | 281
5.10.2.8 PDS Activation
k To be performed after the replacement of the complete sampling module.

A Start the sequence of activation.
PDS Activation
This sequence may take some minutes.
At the end of the sequence, an OK message should be displayed below the
PDS Activation button.
If the sequence fails, repeat the procedure.
B Change the needle.

See chapter Needle Change on page 275.
C Check that all statuses are OK.

If not, validate the statuses.
D Perform the final check.

See chapter Final Check on page 313.
5.10.2.9 Fluidic Circuits Validation
A VALIDATE
Validate the fluidic circuits checks.
FluidicCircuitsVal...
282 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.3 Level Detection

This screen allows checks the level detection in reagent, sample tube or in the washing station.
b detection checks.
It is required to perform a priming of hydraulic circuits before performing the level
10 3
9 2
8
7 4
6
Figure 328.

2 Graphical representation of the sample and reagent rack and the washing station
For the selection of the position to perform the level detection.
3 Results area displaying the measured level detection frequency
4 Status of the detection cycle area
5 Final result area
6 Start command of the level detection for the selected position
7 Continue on error option
When un-checked, the instrument stopps at the first level detection failure.
When checked, the instrument continue to perform the level detection process after a detection
failure. The failed detection is displayed in red in the detection cycle area (4).
8 Wash between each level detection option
When active, a wash is performed between each level detection.
9 Type of sample containers option
Enter the type of tube to be used for the level detection.
10 Number of detections: area
IH-500 | 283
5.10.3.1 Level Detection Frequency
A Expand the state module panel.
B Initialize the pipettor.

INITIALIZE
C Check that the Signal frequency is higher than 5 kHz.
5.10.3.2 Level Detection in Reagent
3 ml
Figure 329.
A Fill a reagent vial with 3 ml of system liquid.
B Place the reagent vial in the reagent area.
C Select the corresponding reagent location.
Figure 330.
D Set the level detection parameters.

• Number of detections: 10.
• Wash between each level detection check box unselected.
E Start the level detection.

START
284 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
F Check that the ten level detections are performed without error, under the status of
detection cycle area.
Figure 331.
G Check the level detection result.
Figure 332.
The maximum divergence between Max value and Min value must be less than
0.3 mm.
k displayed is less than the real volume.

The dead volume is taken in account during the level detection cycle. Consequently, the
IH-500 | 285
5.10.3.3 Level Detection in Sample Tube
1 ml
Figure 333.
A Fill a sample tube with 1 ml of system liquid.
B Place the tube in a sample block, in a sample rack.
C Insert the sample rack in a lane.
D Select the corresponding sample tube location.
Figure 334.
E Set the level detection parameters.

• Type of sample container: 01 (for spherical tube), 02 (for pediatric tube)....
F Start the level detection.

START
286 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
G Check that the ten level detections are performed without error, under the status of
Figure 335.
H Check the level detection result.
Figure 336.
0.3 mm.
5.10.3.4 Level Detection in Washing Station
A Select the washing station location.

In the Selection area.
Figure 337.
B Set the level detection parameters.

C Start the level detection.

START
IH-500 | 287
D Check that the ten level detections are performed without error, under the status of
Figure 338.
E Check the level detection result.
Figure 339.
0.3 mm.
5.10.3.5 Level Detection Validation
A VALIDATE
Validate the level detection checks.
LevelDetectionVal...
288 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.4 Sampling / Dispensing
2
11 3
10 7 6 5 4
8
Figure 340.

2 Selection area
Used to select the position of the resources.
The information displayed changes depending on the action selected in Select action area
(10) and on the activation of MODIFY SAMPLING (5), MODIFY DILUTION (6) or MODIFY
DISPENSING (7) buttons.
3 Settings area
Used to select the settings for a test.
The information displayed changes depending on the action selected in Select action area
(10).
4 START button
5 MODIFY SAMPLING button
Command to select the sampling resources position.
6 MODIFY DILUTION button
Command to select the dilution resources position.
7 MODIFY DISPENSING button
Command to select the dispensing resources position.
8 Check dispensing volume check box
Command to activate the dispensing volume control.
b Do not deactivate this function.

9 GO TO CURVE button
Used to see the curve created during dispensing.
It is a short-cut to the TOOL / PRESSURE / LEVEL DETECTION CURVES sub-menu.
IH-500 | 289
10 Titration check box

Command to activate the titration for a sample.
It includes 3 sequences:
1 - Distribute buffer: to dispense the reagent into an empty diluent rack;
2 - Distribute diluent: to do the dilution into a diluent well
3 - Wash in diluent: to perform a distribution in a diluent well
11 Select action area
To select the sampling/dispensing action.
5.10.4.1 Distribute Dilution
Figure 341.
A Select the action DISTRIBUTE DILUTION.

In the Select action area.
B In the pipetting area, load at least:

• one pierced gel card;
• one pierced diluent;
• one sample tube filled with water (colored if possible).
C Select MODIFY DISPENSING to display the gel cards locations.

MODIFY DISPENSING
D Select the current gel card location.
Figure 342.
E Select MODIFY DILUTION to display the diluent locations.

MODIFY DILUTION
290 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
F Select the current diluent well location.
Figure 343.
G Select MODIFY SAMPLING to display the sample tubes locations.

MODIFY SAMPLING
H Select the current sample tube location.
Figure 344.
I Set the Dispensing volume as wanted. Keep other default parameters.
k The lowest volume is 10 μl, it is the most critical volume.

J Select START.
START
K Check that the needle is centered on targets (sample tube, diluent well, gel card
well).
During the process
L At the end of the process, check the dispense.

 The sample liquid is present and homogeneous and the air gap is present and
acceptable.
Sample liquid
Air gap
Figure 345.
IH-500 | 291
5.10.4.2 Distribute Plasma
Figure 346.
A Select the action DISTRIBUTE PLASMA.


• one sample tube filled with water (coloured if possible).

MODIFY DISPENSING
Figure 347.
E Select MODIFY SAMPLING to display the sample tubes locations.

MODIFY SAMPLING
292 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
F Select the current sample tube location.
Figure 348.
G Set the Dispensing volume if necessary. Keep other default parameters.
H Select START.
START
I Check that the needle is centered on targets (sample tube, diluent well, gel card
well).
During the process
J At the end of the process, check the dispense.

acceptable.
Sample liquid
Air gap
Figure 349.
IH-500 | 293
5.10.4.3 Distribute Reagent
Figure 350.
A Select the action DISTRIBUTE REAGENT.


• one reagent filled with water (coloured if possible).

MODIFY DISPENSING
Figure 351.
E Select MODIFY SAMPLING to display the reagents locations.

MODIFY SAMPLING
F Select the current reagent location.
Figure 352.
294 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
H Select START.
START
I Check that the needle is centred on targets (sample tube, diluent well, gel card
well).
During the process

acceptable.
Sample liquid
Air gap
Figure 353.
5.10.4.4 Distribute Diluent
Figure 354.
A Select the action DISTRIBUTE DILUENT.


• one pierced diluent.

MODIFY DISPENSING
IH-500 | 295
Figure 355.
E Select MODIFY SAMPLING to display the diluents locations.

MODIFY SAMPLING
F Select the current diluent location.
Figure 356.
H Select START.
START
I Check that the needle is centred on targets (sample tube, diluent well, gel card
well).
During the process.

acceptable.
Sample liquid
Air gap
Figure 357.
296 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.4.5 Sample
Figure 358.
A Select the action SAMPLE to check sampling either in reagents, in diluents or in

samples.
 The Macro selection area is displayed, allowing to check sampling either in
reagents, in diluents or in samples.

• one reagent filled;
• one pierced diluent;
• one sample tube filled.
C Select Reagents.
In the Macro selection area.
D Select the current reagent location.
Figure 359.
E Keep the default Sampling volume parameter or adjust it if necessary.

In the Settings area
F Select START.
START
IH-500 | 297
G Check that the needle is centered on the reagent vial.

During the process.
Figure 360.
H Select Diluents.
I Select the current diluent well location.
Figure 361.
J Keep the default Sampling volume parameter or adjust it if necessary.

In the Settings area.
K Select START.
START
L Check that the needle is centered on the diluent well and no error occurs.
During the process.
Figure 362.
M Select Samples.
298 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
N Select the current sample tube location.
Figure 363.
O Keep the default Sampling volume parameter or adjust it if necessary.

In the Settings area.
P Select START.
START
Q Check that the needle is centered on the sample tube and no error occurs.
During the process.
Figure 364.
R Use Wash sequence to drain needle.

See chapter Wash on page 302.
IH-500 | 299
5.10.4.6 Sample CRBC
Figure 365.
A Select the action SAMPLE CRBC.

B In the pipetting area, load:

• one sample tube filled.
C Select the current sample tube location.
Figure 366.
D Keep the default Sampling volume parameter or adjust it if necessary.
E Select START.
START
F Check that needle dips in the tube and stops near the bottom.
Figure 367.
G Use Wash sequence to drain the needle.

See chapter Wash on page 302.
300 | IH-500
Hydraulic Menu
5.10.4.7 Distribute
Figure 368.
A Select the action DISTRIBUTE to check the dispensing in gel card.


• one pierced gel card.
C Select the six wells of the current gel card location.
Figure 369.
D Select START.
START
E Keep the default Dispensing volume or adjust if necessary.
F Check that the needle is centered on gel card wells and no error occurs.
During the process.
IH-500 | 301
5.10.4.8 Wash
CP21
Filled
Intermediate
container
PO02
EV01
EV02
Needle
PO04
Figure 370.
A Select the action WASH to check the needle washing.

B Select a type of washing to check under Washing type:.

In the Wash settings area.
C Select START.
START
D Check that the needle is centered on the washing station and no error occurs.
During the process.
5.10.4.9 Sampling/Dispensing Validation
A VALIDATE
Validate the sampling/dispensing checks.
SamplingandDisp...
302 | IH-500
Incubator Menu
5.11 Incubator Menu

This menu allows for the incubator to:
• calibrate the temperature sensors;
• check the temperature measurements.
5.11.1 Incubator Temperature Adjustment
2
3
6 5
Figure 371.

2 Start/stop command of the incubator
3 Incubator status
4 Offset calculated between the reference temperatures and the measured temperatures
5 Reference temperature set for the sensors
6 Temperatures measured by the sensors
7 Target temperature
IH-500 | 303
Incubator Temperature Adjustment
k Use thermally conductive grease to perform a correct measurement.

A Start the incubator.
START In the Incubator state area, only the STOP button is displayed.
B Wait until the temperatures at front and rear sensors are stable.
C Place a thermometer sensor to the front measuring point (1).
D Enter the measured temperature in the Front sensor Reference temperature

field.
k The front sensor is used for control.

Expected temperature: 38.5 ± 1°C.
E Place a thermometer sensor to the rear measuring point (2).
F Enter the measured temperature in the Rear sensor Reference temperature

field.
k Expected temperature: 38.5 ± 1°C.

The rear sensor is used for control.
G Place the thermometer sensor under the instrument, near the external sensor (3).
H Enter the measured temperature in the Machine’s external sensor

Reference temperature field.
I Place a thermometer sensor in the instrument, near the internal sensor (4).
Next to the visual station.
J Close the doors.
K Enter the measured temperature in the Machine’s internal sensor Reference

temperature field.
L Save the new values.

SAVE
M Confirm.
YES
The compensation is automatically calculated.
The value is displayed in the Offset field.
N VALIDATE
Validate the adjustment.
IncubatorAdjust...
304 | IH-500
Incubator Menu
Figure 372.
IH-500 | 305

This menu allows control of the measured temperatures and of the automatic regulation.
7 8
6
5 4 3 2
Figure 373.

k The front and rear temperature have to be the target temperature (38.5°C ± 1°C).
k The maximal difference between front and rear temperatures should be 2°C during regulation.
A VALIDATE
Validate the temperature check.
IncubatorCheckV...
306 | IH-500
Reagent Plate Menu
5.12 Reagent Plate Menu

• move manually the reagent plate;
• calibrate the temperature sensors;
• check the temperatures.
5.12.1 Pre Control
Figure 374.

2 Settings and function to perform a reagent plate burn-in.
3 Settings and function to check the axis shaking.
4 Parameters and function related to the current position.
IH-500 | 307
5.12.1.1 Check Shaking Axis

In the Check shaking axis area:
• move the cursor to check the shaking axis rotation with variable speed;
• press the circular arrows buttons to check the step-by-step movement.
Figure 375.
k The speed can be adjusted with Speed (rpm) value.

k The rotation range can be adjusted with Step (°) value.
5.12.1.2 Current Position
Figure 376.
A Initialize the reagent plate motor.

INIT
In the Current position area.
B Check the angular rotation.

GO
C Check that all holders execute the same rotation.
D Start a typical shaking cycle.

START SHAKING
k•
A typical cycle is alternately:
4x (10s in clockwise, 1s short downtime, 10 seconds in counter-clockwise);
• 1x 420 seconds long downtime.
k Listen to any abnormal noise.

E Check for errors.
F Stop the sequence.

STOP SHAKING
G VALIDATE
Validate the shaking pre-control.
Shaking Precontr...
308 | IH-500
Reagent Plate Menu
5.12.1.3 Burn-In
A Set the following parameters:

• Cycle number;
• Clockwise duration(s);
• Short time(s);
• Counterclockwise duration(s);
• Long time(s).
B Enter the number of cycles to perform in the Cycle number field.
C Start the burn-in sequence.

START
D Check that the Cycle number value is equal to the required Cycle number and
that there are no errors.
E Stop the sequence.

STOP
F VALIDATE
Validate the reagent plate burn-in.
Reagent Area Bur...
IH-500 | 309
5.12.2 Cooling Adjustment
7 2
5 4
3
Figure 377.

2 Cooling status display
3 Offset calculated between the reference temperatures and the measured temperatures
4 Reference values for Regulated and Control Temperature
5 Measured values for Regulated and Control Temperature
6 Target value for the temperature
Procedure
k Use thermally conductive grease to perform a correct measurement.

A Start the cooling.
START The STOP button should be displayed in the Cooling state area.
B Wait until the Regulated and Control temperatures (4) are stable.
C Measure the temperature at the first measuring point (8).

Use a thermometer sensor.
D Enter the measured temperature in the Regulated temperature Reference

field (4).
k The
top sensor is used for the regulation.
Expected temperature: 13±1 °C.
E Measure the temperature at the second measuring point (9).

Use a thermometer sensor.
310 | IH-500
Reagent Plate Menu
F Enter the measured temperature in the Control temperature Reference field

(4).
k Expected temperature: 13±1 °C.

The bottom sensor is used for the control.
G Save the new values.

SAVE
H Confirm.
YES
The compensation is automatically calculated.
The value is displayed on the Offset field.
I VALIDATE
Validate the adjustment.
Cooling Adjustm...
Figure 378.
IH-500 | 311
5 4 3 2
Figure 379.

k The Regulated and Control cooling temperatures have to be target temperature (13 ± 1 °C).
A VALIDATE
Validate the temperature check.
Cooling Check Va...
312 | IH-500
Final Check / QC Menu
5.13 Final Check / QC Menu

• perform an automatic check of the instrument;
• detect a possible malfunction.
This can be done after intervention on the instrument, after a maintenance operation or after a spare
part replacement. The check takes around 15 minutes and a printable report is created at the end.
5.13.1 Final Check
1
2
4 5
Figure 380.

2 Remaining time before the end of the autocheck process
3 Area displaying the report of the final check
4 Automatic check start command
5 Command to print the final check report displayed in (2).
b Ifbethea crash
diluent locking device is in closed position when starting a Final check, there will
while loading the diluent rack and a breakage of the gripper legs.
A Check the correct position of the diluent locking device.
IH-500 | 313
B Start the final check.

START  The following screen is displayed.
Figure 381.
C Follow the instructions to place the resources in the specified locations.

Several checks are performed and traced. Succeeded tests appear with green
check mark.
At the end all positions should appear with a green check mark. Otherwise
perform the problematic adjustment and run the Final check again.
Figure 382.
A report is generated and named Report_[yyyymmddhhmm].xps.

It is stored in the Computer / Local Disk (C:) / Users/Public / IH-500 /
Log Files / Autocheck folder.
k If no 5 ml reagent vial is available, a 10 ml vial can be used.

D VALIDATE
Validate the final check.
QC Final Check...
E Perform a QC according to the customer regulations.
314 | IH-500
Final Check / QC Menu
5.13.2 QC Cycles
k
This section is used by the manufacturing service for QC qualification before instrument
release. It is not recommended to use this function.
IH-500 | 315
5.14 Tools Menu

• archive;
• recover traces;
• create a backup of the instrument or the PC;
• check the serial numbers;
• manage the used product line (ID, Japan, IH);
• see the status of the different modules;
• have a look at the pressure curves;
• deactivate modules.
5.14.1 General Tools
2 9
4
8
5
7
6
Figure 383.

2 Date settings for database snapshot
3 Settings and functions for database snapshot
The database snapshot saves:
• the robot controller;
• the internal computer configuration files (software and teaching);
• some working files for expertise.
4 Start command for system snapshot
The system snapshot by ACRONIS saves only the internal computer information and not the
robot controller parameters.
It is used to create an image of the contents of the hard disk of the instrument or to restore a
316 | IH-500
Tools Menu
backup of a previous record.

This backup can be used after a crash of hard disk or a replacement of the internal PC if it is
exactly the same hardware or when the system shall be re-installed after downloading some
hazardous software.
5 Command to update or restore the database
See chapter Parameters - Restore or Update Database on page 318.
6 Command to restore the transport arm adjustment parameters and data
See chapter Transport Arm Adjustment Restore on page 320.
7 Slider for sound volume adjustment
8 User options
See chapter User Options on page 323.
9 Miscellaneous functions
See chapter Other Tools on page 321.
k Backup files to be used for system re-install.

5.14.1.1 Database Snapshot
A Set the date from which the data should be collected in the Selected target
date.
Figure 384.
B Enter the number of previous days to collect data related to the selected target
date in the field Number of (previous) days.
Maximum 60 days.
C Select the option Include images to collect curves and images.

If needed.
D Select the option Configuration files only to save only:

• the final check report;
• the databases;
• the transport arm parameters (Stäubli robot).
E Start the database backup.

SNAPSHOT
IH-500 | 317
F Select the location to create the snapshot folder.
k
The snapshot must be created on an external device.
The name of the created snapshot follows this format:
[sn]_[yyyy-mm-dd]_[hh]h[mm]_IH500_Snapshot.
G Confirm.
OK
 A description line describes the backup process.
k Snapshots can take time.

H Select to access and view directly the database backup.
GO TO FILE
k This is only possible after a snapshot has been created on an external drive.
5.14.1.2 System Snapshot
A Open the Acronis software.
ACRONIS
B Follow the installation procedure.

Refer to the document IH-500 IP-Backup & restore.
5.14.1.3 Parameters - Restore or Update Database
k For details refer to the installation procedure IH-500 IP-Backup & Restore.
This section is used by the manufacturing service. It is not recommended to use this function.
How to restore the database

This function restores the adjustment of an instrument (in case of loss of the adjustment or hard disk
replacement).
A Start the process.

RESTORE DATABASE
A warning message appears.
Figure 385.
318 | IH-500
Tools Menu
B Confirm.
YES
C Select the backup database to restore.

It is possible to select only archives containing parameters and adjustment
status of the corresponding instrument (check of the serial number).
A progress bar displays the status of the restore.
At the end of the restoration, a message appears.
Figure 386.
D Acknowledge the end of process.

OK
If the message displays Parameters version changed: UPDATE
DATABASE IS REQUIRED, proceed to update the database.
How to update the database
A Recover the constant parameters of the instrument.

UPDATE DATABASE
Except those relative to transport arm.
Figure 387.
B Confirm. Select the parameters file to update.

YES
A progress bar displays the status of the update.
At the end of the update, a message appears.
Figure 388.
IH-500 | 319
C Acknowledge the message. Restart the instrument.

OK
5.14.1.4 Transport Arm Adjustment Restore
k from document version V2.3.

For the software version V2.2.22, see the document IH-500 Transport Arm Troubleshooting
A Press the button.

RESTORE TRANSPORT
ARM ADJUSTMENT  A warning message appears.
Figure 389.
B Confirm. Select the backup file to restore.

YES
It is only possible to select an archive that contains the transport arm
adjustment data of the corresponding instrument. Check the serial number
before proceeding.
Figure 390.
C Confirm.
YES
The transport arm adjustment and parameters are restored.
The instrument prompts to restart the instrument.
Figure 391.
D Confirm. Restart the instrument.

OK
320 | IH-500
Tools Menu
5.14.1.5 Other Tools
Open Trace Viewer
A Open the traces editor.

OPEN TRACE VIEWER
 The traces editor is displayed and allows to analyze the instrument history step
by step.
Figure 392.
Software Update / Admin Mode
A Select to login as administrator, modify system parameters or update software

SOFTWARE UPDATE
k All applications will be closed.

B Remove all resources from the instrument.
k Removing resources is only necessary if a software update is performed. The loaded resources
information are deleted.
C Confirm.
OK
D Log in.
Username: Biorad
Password: bior@d500
 The Windows classic desktop is displayed. The parameters like regional
settings, keyboard language or barcode scanner can be configured.
See the chapter Language Configuration (OS, Keyboard and Barcode
Scanner) on page 117 to modify parameters or see the appropriate Released
Note for an update.
IH-500 | 321
Reset Statistics
A Press to reset the statistic data.

RESET STATISTICS
These data are:
• used by the remote BRiCare monitoring system;
• can be consulted by the TraceViewer tool.
Cleanup System
The function allows:
• to create an archive on an external drive;
• to clean the database;
• to remove all APF’s and the user data;
• to remove all archives;
• to remove all files on the desktop;
• to remove all the event windows.
A Clean the operating software system.
CLEANUP SYSTEM
Refer to the installation procedure of IH-500_CleanupDatabaseDescription
to realize a cleanup system and a system re-installation.
The function creates an archive on an external drive and cleans the database.
b Previous
analyses, logs and APFs, Windows trash and recent files are erased.
The Windows desktop is also cleaned except for the short-cuts to FIS Launcher and to
User Management.
Prepare for Shipment
A PREPARE FOR
Select to:
SHIPMENT
• clean and purge the hydraulic circuit;
• prepare the instrument for shipment.
B Follow the instructions on screen.

Next
Press NEXT for each step.
C Finish the sequence.

Finish
322 | IH-500
Tools Menu
5.14.1.6 User Management Configuration
A Modify the Server name field to allow user management from a remote server.
Figure 393.
k Remove server is not functional yet. Only use FIS as server name.
B Update the configuration.
SAVE
5.14.1.7 User Options
A Select the option Sounds to activate the sounds.
B Select the option External solid waste for the use of the optional table solid
waste bin.
Refer to Optional Table Solid Waste Installation on page 104 for more details.
C Select the option External liquid waste for the use of an external waste drain.
Refer to External Liquid Waste Optional Kit Installation on page 95 for more
details.
IH-500 | 323
5.14.2 Check Serial Numbers

This screen allows to update serial numbers when important modules have been replaced.
2 4
3
5
7 6
Figure 394.

2 Instrument serial number
3 Euresys license status check
Press the button to check the Euresys license is activated.
4 Product line selection (ID, IH or Japan)
5 Selection of the reagent cooling module installed in the instrument
6 List of registered licenses key of the software installed in the PC
7 List of modules installed in the instrument including:
• module name;
• reference number;
• serial number;
• status.
5.14.2.1 Instrument Serial Numbers
b The
instrument serial number change involves that the status turns FAULT.
The instrument has to be completely adjusted.
k This section is used by the manufacturing service. It is not recommended to use this function.
A Enter the new instrument serial number (2).
If necessary.
B Save the modification.

MODIFY
324 | IH-500
Tools Menu
5.14.2.2 Electronic Boards Serial Numbers
b Validating new serial numbers requires the camera connection.

k replaced.
The serial number is automatically updated when an electronic board or an important module is
A Save all changes.

VALIDATE
5.14.2.3 Product Line

The function allows:
• to clean the database;
• to remove all APF’s and the user data.
A Select a new product line.
In the drop-down menu.
B CHANGE PRODUCT
Confirm the selection.
LINE
C Operate the change.

CONTINUE
The action takes several minutes. Wait until the end of the selection.
5.14.2.4 Software License Keys Activation
A Enter the license keys on the fields (6).
The software license number for Windows and Acronis are visible on the
sticker of the computer.
The license number for EURESYS (2D barcode) have to be added manually.
Refer to document IH-500 IP-V2.2 Installation Update V1.4, chapter 3, step 4
the point A.
There must be at least one digit entered in all licenses fields.
B Activate the license.

VALIDATE KEYS
IH-500 | 325
5.14.2.5 Euresys License Activation

The Euresys license requires:
• an Internet connection for direct activation or online activation with Euresys License Manager;
• or an USB memory key for offline activation with Euresys License Manager.
Euresys License Direct Activation Procedure
A Make sure that the instrument is connected to Internet.
B Enter the license key on appropriate field.
C Save the key.

VALIDATE KEYS
D Activate the license.

ACTIVATE EURESYS
A message informs about the effective activation.
E Check that the Euresys License is correctly activated.

CHECK
Online Activation with Euresys License Manager
B Start the Euresys license manager.

Software Euresys Open eVision 1.2.
C Select Licenses on PC Platforms.
D Select Activate Licenses.
326 | IH-500
Tools Menu
E Select Online Activation.

The following message is displayed.
Figure 395.
F Enter the license key.

Contact Bio-Rad for license questions.
G Select Next to continue.
H Enter the data associated to the license key.
Figure 396.
I Select Next to continue.

A message prompts that the license on this platform is active. The Euresys
application is ready for use.
J Complete the online activation.
IH-500 | 327
Offline Activation with Euresys License Manager

Required:
• an USB memory key;
• a PC with an Internet connection;
• the Euresys license manager software must be installed on the PC with the internet connection.
A Start the Euresys license manager.
On the PC with the internet connection.
B Select Licenses on PC Platforms.
C Select Activate Licenses.
D Select Offline Activation.

Figure 397.
E Enter the license key.

F Select Next to continue.
328 | IH-500
Tools Menu
G Enter the data associated to the license key.
Figure 398.
H Select Next to continue.
I Select or create a directory on the USB memory key.
Figure 399.
b file is created during this action).

Create a folder on the USB memory key to avoid some antivirus warning (An “autorun.ini”
J Select Next to continue.

A message prompts that the USB memory key is ready for offline activation.
K Plug the USB memory key onto the IH-500.

Log in with admin user level.
L Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

The application is located in the previously created directory on the USB
memory key.
M Select Compute request for this platform.

 A message prompts that the request is successfully created.
N Acknowledge the message.

Close the license manager application.
IH-500 | 329
O Plug the USB memory key on the PC with the internet connection.
P Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

memory key.
Q Select Send requests to server.

A message indicates that the activation is successful.
R Close the license manager application.
S Plug the USB memory key onto the IH-500.
T Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

memory key.
U Select Activate this platform.

V Acknowledge the message.
W Close the license manager application. Unplug the USB memory key.
5.14.2.6 Euresys License Recovery
Online Recovery
Restoring a license may be necessary in the event of any major changes to the computer as:
• a computer replacement;
• a hard disk replacement;
• an operation system re-installation (e.g. after Acronis).
B Start the Euresys license manager.
C Select Licenses on PC Platforms.
D Select Solve License Trouble.
330 | IH-500
Tools Menu
E Select Online Recovery.

Figure 400.
F Select:
• No, if a Acronis backup image was performed (hardware not changed);
• Yes, if the computer (or the hard drive) was replaced.
H Enter the data associated to the license key.
Figure 401.
IH-500 | 331
I Select Next to continue.

Figure 402.
J Insert the license key.

K Select Next to continue.

L Complete the online activation.
Offline License Recovery

Restoring a license may be necessary in the event of any major changes to the computer as:
• a computer replacement;
• a hard disk replacement;
• an operation system re-installation (e.g. after Acronis).
Required:
• an USB memory key;
• a PC with an Internet connection;
• the Euresys license manager software must be installed on the PC with the internet connection.
A Start the Euresys license manager.

On the PC with the internet connection.
B Select Licenses on PC Platforms.
C Select Solve License Trouble.
D Select Recover Licenses.
332 | IH-500
Tools Menu
E Select Offline Recovery.

Figure 403.
F Select or create a directory on the USB memory key.
b Create
a folder on the USB memory key to avoid some antivirus warning (An “autorun.ini”
file is created during this action).
H Plug the USB memory key onto the IH-500.

Log in with admin user level.
I Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

memory key.
J Select Compute request for this platform.

Figure 404.
K Select:
• No, if a Acronis backup image was performed (hardware not changed);
• Yes, if the computer (or the hard drive) was replaced.
IH-500 | 333
L Select Next to continue.

Figure 405.
M Enter the data associated to the license key.
N Select Next to continue.

Figure 406.
O Insert the license key.

 A message prompts that the request is successfully created.
P Acknowledge the message.
Close the license manager application.
Q Plug the USB memory key on the PC with the internet connection.
R Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

memory key.
S Select Send requests to server.

A message indicates that the recovery is successful.
334 | IH-500
Tools Menu
T Close the license manager application.
U Plug the USB memory key onto the IH-500.
V Start the application LicenseManagerLauncher.exe.

memory key.
W Select Recover this platform.

X Acknowledge the message.
Y Close the license manager application. Unplug the USB memory key.
5.14.2.7 Cooling Reagent Module Selection
A Select the reference of the Reagent cooling module.
Figure 407.
• E10886: Cooling reagent module v1;

• E11191: Cooling reagent module v2.
The reference of the cooling module is written on the top of the cooling
module.
Figure 408.
B Validate.
IH-500 | 335
5.14.3 Status
This screen shows the detailed state of each module.
Figure 409.

2 Area describing the adjustment status of the modules.
A Select a module name to see the adjustments status.

 All the adjustments statuses are displayed for the selected module.
Figure 410.
k Inarm,the6example
above, there are 47 of 50 validate adjustments and 3 invalidate on the transport
of 7 validate adjustments and 1 invalidate on the vision station, as well 0 of 1 adjustment
invalidate on the auto-check.
B Select an adjustment name to invalidate it.

 A Warning window appears.
336 | IH-500
Tools Menu
C Confirm.
YES
 The green check mark is replaced by a red cross mark for the specified
statuses adjustments, and the number of validated status is refreshed.
Figure 411.
k Itarrow.
is possible to see the list of statuses that are getting invalidated by selecting the Details
k Ifinvalidated.
an adjustment is invalidated on any module, the status of QCFinalCheckValidated is
IH-500 | 337
5.14.4 Pressure / Level Detection Curves
4 5
Figure 412.

2 Area to display the pressure / level detection curves
3 Parameters and settings for the curves display
4 Command to open a file containing a curve
5 Clear the area (2) from any curve
A Select the type of curve to record from the drop-down menu.

Pressure curve, level detection curve or dispense control curve.
B Select the recording option.

Always, In case of error or Never.
k Curves recording makes sampling, dispensing or washing take more time.

k Activated parameter in the service software is also active in the user software.
C Select to access the folders containing the curves to be displayed.
SELECT FILES
k Folders redirection depends on the type of curves but can be changed.

D Curve is displayed at default scale.
Set the values to change the curve scale.
Figure 413.
338 | IH-500
Tools Menu
E Select the white background to apply the new scale.

• Pressure curve represents PDS pressure as a function of time;
• Level detection curve represents level detection frequency as a function of
time;
• Dispense control curve represents dispense control frequency as a function of
time.
Depending on stored curves parameters configuration, curves files are stored
either in:
• (C:)/Users/Public/IH-500/PressureCurve/FAILED or
(C:)/Users/Public/IH-500/PressureCurve/OK directories for
pressure curves;
• (C:)/Users/Public/IH-500/LevelDetectionCurve/FAILED or
(C:)/Users/Public/IH-500/LevelDetectionCurve/OK directories for
level detection curves;
• (C:)/Users/Public/IH-500/DispenseControlCurve/FAILED or (C:)/
Users/Public/IH-500/DispenseControlCurve/OK directories for
dispense control curves.
F Display the selected curve.

OPEN
IH-500 | 339
5.14.5 Modules
This screen allows to activate or to deactivate modules on the instrument.
Figure 414.

2 Modules list
A Select the module button to deactivate.

DEACTIVATE
k done but adjustment would be possible on other module.

Deactivating a module makes instrument initialization impossible. No analysis would be further
B Select the module button to reactivate.

ACTIVATE
340 | IH-500
Tools Menu
5.14.6 IP Config
This screen allows:
• to check the communication between the computer, the DMS and the robot;
• to set up the IP address for the computer and the transport arm.
k Default IP address are set at factory.
2 3
Figure 415.
1 IP address set for the computer and the transport arm.

• Transport Arm rescue IP Address: 192.168.0.254
• PC IP address: 192.168.0.1
• IP Mask: 255.255.255.0
• Server (TA) rescue IP address: 172.31.0.1
When the communication is established, the IP Mask Communication is available.
2 Command to set the IP address
3 Default IP address command for the transport.
5.14.6.1 IP Address Setup
A Enter the new IP address in the field.
b An incorrect IP address input for the transport arm may cause an permanent loss of
communication.
IH-500 | 341
B Save the new IP address.

UPDATE CONFIG
A confirmation message appears.
Figure 416.
C Confirm.
OK
The IP address is updated.
Figure 417.
D Confirm. Restart the instrument.

OK
5.14.6.2 How to restore Default IP Address

This function restores the factory configuration.
A RESTORE DEFAULT
Select to restore the factory configuration.
CONFIG
Figure 418.
B Confirm.
OK
The IP address is set to factory configuration.
Figure 419.
342 | IH-500
Tools Menu
C Confirm. Restart the instrument.

OK
5.14.6.3 Transport Arm IP Address Recovery
k controller display.
Requires the Emergency IP address of the transport arm which is accessible on the robot
k Ethernet port for the DMS disconnected.

k Procedure not required when replacing the transport arm controller.
A Remove the lower right panel.
See chapter Lower Right Panel on page 370.
B Unplug the Ethernet cable from the DMS server.
C Unplug the network cable the transport arm controller port J205.
D Plus this cable to the Transport arm rescue port J204.
E Enter the emergency IP address in the Transport Arm IP Address field.
F REPAIR Start the IP address recovery.

COMMUNICATION
FAULT  A warning message is displayed.
G Acknowledge the warning message.
DONE
The IP address stored in the transport arm controller is collected and updates
the IP configuration.
H When done, plug back the ethernet cable from J204 to J205.
I Confirm to restart the instrument with the updated IP address.

OK
IH-500 | 343
5.15 Exit
• exit to Software menu;
• switch to exploitation mode (IH-500 user software);
• shut down the instrument.
Exit Options
2
3
4
Figure 420.

2 EXIT command
Press the button to exit the Service Software and return to the launch screen.
3 SWITCH TO EXPLOITATION MODE command
Press the button to exit the Service Software and return to IHM500 Graphical User Interface
(wait around 1 minute).
At next start, IHM500 GUI will start automatically.
4 SHUTDOWN command
Press the button and then the OK button to switch off instrument.
344 | IH-500
6 Maintenance
This chapter describes the preventive maintenance tasks and the replacement of defective parts.
The maintenance table contains all the maintenance procedures performed as well as the inspections
and replacements. A copy of the original report sheet can be found in the Appendix.
See chapter Maintenance Table on page 420.
k Every
time a maintenance operation is performed on the IH-500, both for a preventive
maintenance task and for the defective part replacement, the maintenance table must be filled
in.
6.1 Warnings
b Leaving the IH-500 powered on with its cover removed is dangerous and should be
ELECTROCUTION
avoided During such circumstances, the instrument should not be left unattended.
b appointed by the manufacturer, in accordance with Good Laboratory Practices.

Repair and service operations must only be performed by a qualified service engineer
b to switch off the instrument (except when connecting the transport arm touch probe).
Before any operation requiring an electrical connection or disconnection, it is necessary
Always disconnect the power cable before accessing internal parts of the instrument. A
contact with live conductors may cause an electrocution.
Always perform a backup before any intervention on the instrument. See chapter Backup
on page 119.
b decontamination certificate or perform a complete decontamination.

Before any technical intervention on the instrument, check the presence of a
See:
• Cleaning and Decontamination Instructions on page 348;
• Decontamination Certificate on page 418.
IH-500 | 345
Maintenance
6.2 Periodical Maintenance

The maintenance calendar periodicities are 6 months, 12 months and 48 months.
b (Autocheck) on page 124.

For each periodical maintenance, perform an auto check. See chapter Final Check / QC
k The recommended preventive maintenance interval is 6 months.

For cleaning and decontamination, use the products below:
• Lint-free cloth;
• Suitable disinfectant
k (ISO 3696) or Type II (ASTM D1193-91).

When using demineralized water, make sure that the water quality corresponds at least Grad 2
6.2.1 Preventive Maintenance Kits Contents

Refer to the Spare Parts Book.
k The 12 months maintenance kit also contains the 6 months kit.

k For
the 48 months maintenance, there is no kit available. It is necessary to order each spare part
separately.
6.2.2 General Preventive Maintenance Table

Table key: Maintenance intervals
6 months 12 months 48 months
Functional control
Decontamination
Visual control
Replacement
Cleaning
Preventive maintenance Chapter or Procedure number

Transport arm
Cover axis 3 X 6.6.11 on page 361
Gripper legs X 6.6.7 on page 356
Gripper legs X 6.7.1 on page 363
Gripper spiral cable X IH-500 RP-0595047
Tool reference calibration X 6.8.5 on page 367
Visual station
Camera lens X 6.6.1 on page 352
Backlight X 6.6.2 on page 353
Camera X 5.6.3 on page 164
346 | IH-500
Periodical Maintenance
Functional control
Decontamination
Visual control
Replacement
Cleaning
Preventive maintenance Chapter or Procedure number
Gel card piercer / Ionizer
Gel card piercing tip X X 6.5.1 on page 348
Gel card piercing tip X 6.7.2 on page 363
Gel card piercing tip X 6.8.1 on page 365
Ionizer X 6.8.2 on page 365
Diluents piercing
Diluent piercing tip X X 6.5.1 on page 348
Diluent piercing tip X 6.7.2 on page 363
Diluent piercing tip X 6.8.1 on page 365
Pipetting area
Reagent holder spring X 6.8.3 on page 366
Sample tube holder spring V2 X 6.8.4 on page 366
Washing station X 6.6.3 on page 353
Needle localization hole X X 6.6.5 on page 354
Sampling needle X 6.6.12 on page 361
Sampling needle X IH-500 RP-0595004
Diluent locking device O-ring X IH-500 RP-12006920
Level detection cable X IH-500 RP-0595048
Faradized vein X IH-500 RP-0595129
Liquid container area and fluidic system
Intermediate tank area X X 6.3 on page 348
Liquid container area X X 6.6.3 on page 353
Decontamination liquid container X 6.6.13 on page 362
TU10, TU11, TU12 & TU13 liquid waste tubing X 6.7.4 on page 364
Quick connections X 6.7.4 on page 364
Intermediate tank X IH-500 RP-0595116
Fluidic filter 25 μm X IH-500 RP-0595058
Tube connection liquid waste X IH-500 RP-0595125
Tube connection system liquid X IH-500 RP-0595126
Centrifuges module with cooling
Rubber seal X 6.7.3 on page 364
Centrifuge X 6.6.6 on page 355
Centrifuge X 6.7.3 on page 364
Consumable drawers
Left drawer X 6.8.6 on page 367
Right drawer X 6.8.6 on page 367
Fan
Computer X 6.6.8 on page 358
Power supply X 6.6.9 on page 359
Reagent cooling X 6.6.9 on page 359
Transport arm controller X 6.6.10 on page 360
IH-500 | 347
Maintenance
6.3 Cleaning and Decontamination Instructions

The IH-500 and its accessories must be cleaned and decontaminated before performing any
maintenance operation, before preparing the instrument for transportation and before taking it out of
service.
The user of the instrument is responsible for performing a decontamination whenever there are
projections in the instrument.
h Wear gloves for all cleaning and all decontamination operations.

b Manual may damage the IH-500.
The use of hard objects or other cleaning agents than those mentioned in the Service
Do not use other cleaning agents or products before consulting Bio-Rad and receiving
their agreement.
b Before cleaning or decontamination operation, it is necessary to switch off the

instrument.
k Clean the housing and the doors with a lint-free cloth soaked in 70% ethanol.
6.4 Cleaning
6.4.1 Touch Screen, Doors and Cladding
b FIRE
AND EXPLOSION
Ethanol is flammable and can lead to explosions if used improperly.
Proper laboratory safety precautions must be respected.
Never use acetone, as it will damage the instrument.
k Clean the housing, the doors and the touch screen with a lint-free cloth soaked in 70% ethanol.
6.5 Decontamination
6.5.1 Suitable Products
b FIRE
AND EXPLOSION
Ethanol is flammable and can lead to explosions if used improperly. Proper laboratory
safety precautions must be respected.
b Grad 2 (ISO 3696) or Type II (ASTM D1193-91).

When using demineralized water, make sure that the water quality correspond at least
b with electronics.
The disinfectant can influence the performance of the instrument if it comes into contact
b there are projections in the instrument.

The user of the instrument is responsible for performing a decontamination whenever
k a decontamination of parts or area: 70% ethanol.

Use the following disinfection solutions or a suitable disinfectant with a lint-free cloth to perform
348 | IH-500
Decontamination
A Apply the suitable disinfectant either directly on the part or the area, or directly on
a lint-free cloth.
B Spray and clean the area to be treated with the lint-free cloth.
Figure 421.
C Do not rinse.
6.5.2 List of Parts to be decontaminated
k Alltreated
parts of the instrument that come into contact with potentially infectious material must be
as potentially infectious.
• Doors, windows,
• Touch screen,
• Hand-held barcode scanner.
• Left drawer,
• Right drawer,
• Removable reagents tray,
• Full solid waste sensor.
IH-500 | 349
Maintenance
• Quick-connections,
• Washing station with protection cover,
• Overflow area.
• Ionizer system set support,

• Piercing tip.
• Gel card support area,

• Front centrifuge cover with trap door.
b Verify
that at the end of the cleaning the
internal storage is completely screwed.
• Complete gripper.
350 | IH-500
Decontamination
• Protective cover,
• Samples barcode reader
b disinfectant could damage it.

Do not decontaminate the backlight,
• Incubator.
• Rear centrifuge cover with trap door,

• Complete centrifuge head (with gel cards
holder).
• Preparation area for cards,

• Gel cards block,
• Sampling needle, needle blocking lever kit.
• Reagent area (holder and holder spring),
• Pipetting gels cards area,
IH-500 | 351
Maintenance
• Pipetting diluents area,

• Diluent piercing tip,
• Samples loading area (sample rack, sample
block with spring).
• Solid wastes area,

• Solid wastes bin.
6.6 Specific Cleaning Instructions

6.6.1 Camera Lens
b Do not remove the camera lens.

A Switch off the IH-500 at the main power switch to reduce the static load and
consequently, the risks to accumulate dust.
B Loosen the screw of the camera protective cover.
C Remove the cover.
D Use a dry air spray to remove dusts and particles susceptible to damage the lens.
E If necessary, use a lint-free cloth.
F To reassemble, proceed in the reverse order.
Figure 422.
352 | IH-500
Specific Cleaning Instructions
6.6.2 Backlight
b backlight.
Do not use a lint-free cloth soaked in 70% ethanol or disinfectant, it could damage the
A Use a computer suitable cleaning product with a lint-free cloth to clean the
backlight.
Figure 423.
6.6.3 Liquid Container Area and Washing Station

A Use demineralized water with a lint-free cloth to perform a cleaning of areas which
would have residue due to crystallization (white tracks).
For decontamination, refer to section Decontamination on page 348.
Figure 424.
IH-500 | 353
Maintenance
6.6.4 Piercing Tip

A Use demineralized water with a lint-free cloth to perform a cleaning of the piercing
tip which would have residue due piercing of protective aluminum foil.
Figure 425.
6.6.5 Needle Localization Hole

A Use a dry air spray to remove dusts and particles susceptible to skew the probing
results.
B Use demineralized water with a lint-free cloth to perform a cleaning of the needle
localization hole.
Figure 426.
354 | IH-500
6.6.6 Centrifuge
b must be checked.
After intervention in centrifuges, the correct locking of centrifuges covers and trapdoors
A Use a dry air spray to remove dusts and particles susceptible to create an
abnormal working of the centrifuges.
B Use demineralized water with a lint-free cloth to perform a cleaning of the vat.
Figure 427.
IH-500 | 355
Maintenance
6.6.7 Gripper
A Check the position of the gripper before the gripper legs removal:
• right leg (2) flush to the gripper;
• left leg (1) with a tooth to the edge of the gripper.
B Remove the screw (3).
C Remove simultaneously the gripper legs (4).
b (both legs are not interchangeable).

When removed, mark the left leg and the right leg to avoid mixing at the re-assembly
b Do not move the pinions of the gripper.

D Clean the 2 legs (4) and internally the gripper.
Use isopropanol or a degreaser and a brush.
b Do
not move the pinions when cleaning internally the gripper.
Lock the pinion with one gripper leg:
• use the left leg (5) to block the pinion and clean the rear groove;
• use the right leg (6) to block the pinion and clean the front groove.
E Insert simultaneously the 2 gripper legs (4).

Keep in mind the orientation of the legs as marked previously.
F Check that the position of the legs is identical as the one checked on step A.
G Tighten the screw (3) on the rear screw.
H Calibrate the gripper.

See chapter Gripper Calibration on page 230.
356 | IH-500
1 flush
1 1 tooth
4
6
Figure 428.
IH-500 | 357
Maintenance
6.6.8 Computer
A Shutdown and switch off the instrument.
B Open the liquid containers and the pipetting area doors.
C Open the maintenance door.
D Open the left drawer.
E Rotate the internal storage frame in maintenance position.
F Clean the PC box to remove accumulated dust.

Pay attention to the fan.
G Reassemble in reverse order of the removal.
Figure 429.
358 | IH-500
6.6.9 Power Supply and Reagent Cooling Module

A Remove the lower rear panel.
See chapter Lower Rear Panel on page 374.
B Clean the fan grid of the power supply.
C Clean the fan grid and the entire reagent cooling module.
D Reassemble in reverse order of the removal.
Figure 430.
IH-500 | 359
Maintenance
6.6.10 Transport Arm Controler

To be performed when:
• the instrument has a lot of dust;
• during the 48 months maintenance;
• or when removing the transport arm controller.
A Shutdown and switch off the instrument.
B Remove and open the transport arm controller.

Refer to the procedure RP-0595157 Transport Arm Logical Rack.
C Clean the fan and the entire transport arm controller.
D Refit the transport arm controller.

Refer to the procedure RP-0595157 Transport Arm Logical Rack.
Figure 431.
360 | IH-500
6.6.11 Transport Arm Cover Axis 3

This cleaning is required due to the presence of grease on the harness of the transport arm which can
cumulate in the cover of axis 3.
Refer to IH-500 NI Transport Arm Cover Axis 3 for more details.
A Remove the cover axis 3.
B Clean the cover.

Use a cloth and cleaning liquid.
C Refit the cover.
Figure 432.
6.6.12 Needle Cleaning

A Purge the instrument.
See chapter Fluidic Circuit on page 283.
B Remove the needle.
C Clean the needle.

Use a a lint-free cloth and isopropanol.
D Refit the needle in the instrument.
E Execute the needle change.

See chapter Needle Change on page 282.
Figure 433.
IH-500 | 361
Maintenance
6.6.13 Decontamination Liquid Container

A Purge the decontamination well.
See chapter Decontamination Well on page 279.
B Disconnect the tubing and remove the decontamination liquid container.
C Empty the container in the liquid waste.
D Clean the container with demineralized water.
E Reinstall the decontamination liquid container in the instrument.
F Fill the container with the new NaOH.
G Prime the decontamination well.

See chapter Decontamination Well on page 279.
Figure 434.
362 | IH-500
Visual Checks
6.7 Visual Checks

6.7.1 Gripper Legs
A Check that the gripper legs are not damaged nor cracked.
B Clean the gripper gears if necessary.

See chapter Gripper on page 356.
C Replace the Complete Gripper Assembly Head if necessary.
Figure 435.
6.7.2 Gel Card and Diluent Piercing Tips

A Check that the tips are not damaged or blunt.
B Check that there is no trace of rust.
C Replace if necessary.
Figure 436.
IH-500 | 363
Maintenance
6.7.3 Centrifuge Rubber Seals
b must be checked.
After intervention in centrifuges, the correct locking of centrifuges covers and trapdoors
A Check that the rubber seals of the rear and front centrifuges are not damaged.
B Replace if necessary.
C Check that there is no space between the vat and the cover.
Figure 437.
6.7.4 TU10, TU11, TU12 & TU13 Liquid Waste Tubing, Quick Connections
A Check that the Tygon tubing and the quick connections are not damaged (cracks),
and that there is no white tracks or residue.
B Check that tubings are still transparent and have not become discolored or
opaque.
C Replace if necessary.
Figure 438.
364 | IH-500
Functional Checks
6.8 Functional Checks

6.8.1 Gel Card and Diluent Piercing Tips
A With the gel card and diluent piercing tool (ref. M16140) delivered with the IH-500
gauge kit, check that the diameters of the pierced wells are correct on gel cards
and on diluents.
See chapters Cards Piercing Cycles on page 191 and Diluent Piercing Cycles
on page 193.
Figure 439.
6.8.2 Ionizer
A Check the ionizer,
See chapter Ionizer on page 150.
Figure 440.
IH-500 | 365
Maintenance
6.8.3 Reagent Holders Springs

A Check that the springs are not deformed or broken.
B Check that there is no obstacle in the spring area.
C Check that the screws are well tightened.
D Check the spring tightening with reagent.
E Replace if necessary.
Figure 441.
6.8.4 Sample Tubes Holders Springs

A Check that the springs are not deformed nor broken.
B Check that there is no obstacle in the spring area.
C Check the spring tightening with a sample tube.
D Replace if necessary.
Figure 442.
366 | IH-500
Functional Checks
6.8.5 Tool Reference Calibration

A Perform a CHECK LOCALIZATION (gripper).
See chapter Gripper Localization Check on page 178.
B If the localization is not correct, perform if necessary a gripper localization and a

secure posing sequence.
See chapter Resources Sensor Localization on page 228.
6.8.6 Left and Right Drawers

A Open the left and right drawers.
B Check if there is no backlash in the sliding system. When the drawers are open,
check for lateral backlash.
C Check that the drawer lockers are not damaged or unstuck.

Replace the damaged drawer lockers, if necessary.
D Close the drawers.
E If the drawer(s) must be replaced or adjusted, perform a teaching and secure

posing.
See chapter Right Drawer on page 210.
See chapter Left Drawer on page 213.
Figure 443.
IH-500 | 367
Maintenance
6.8.7 Camera
Perform a complete camera pre-adjustment.
See chapter Camera Pre-Adjustment on page 164.
368 | IH-500
Replacement Procedures
6.9 Replacement Procedures

Refer to the respective spare part replacement procedure which is available on the FTP server.
6.10 Disassembly
Only the technical personnel is authorized to disassemble an IH-500.
k after obtaining the manufacturer’s authorization. The objectives of the future application must be
The parts and assemblies of the IH-500, disassembled by qualified personnel, may be reused
described in details.
k Reassemble in reverse order.

6.10.1 Upper Right Panel
A Open the liquid containers area access door.
B Open the pipetting area access door.
C Remove the pipetting area access door.

Raise the door to release the hinges (1).
D Close the liquid containers area access door.
E Remove the 2 screws and washers (2) outside the instrument on the left of the
panel.
F Remove the screw, the washer (3) and the spacer (4) outside the instrument on the
right of the panel.
G Remove the panel.
2 3
Figure 444.
IH-500 | 369
Maintenance
6.10.2 Lower Right Panel

A Open the liquid containers area access door (1).
B Remove the screw and washer (2) inside the instrument.

On the left of the panel.
C Close the liquid containers area access door.
D Remove 2x screws and washers (3) outside the instrument.

On the right of the panel.
E Remove the panel.
2
1
Figure 445.
370 | IH-500
Disassembly
6.10.3 Upper Left Panel

A Open the liquid containers area access door.
B Open the pipetting area access door.
C Open the maintenance access door.
D Remove 2x screws and washers (1) inside the instrument.

On the right of the panel.
E Close the maintenance access door.
F Remove the screw, the washer (2) and the spacer (3) outside the instrument.
On the left of the panel.
G Remove the panel.
Figure 446.
IH-500 | 371
Maintenance
6.10.4 Lower Left Panel
b the back of the instrument (see arrow).

When refitting the lower-left panel, do not push too hard on the panel, especially towards
An important pressure may slightly move the centrifuges module. This may cause errors
during transfers.
A Open the solid waste area access door (1).
B Remove the screw and washer (2) located on the right of the panel.
C Remove the lower left panel.

2x screws and washers (3) located on the left side of the panel.
Figure 447.
372 | IH-500
Disassembly
6.10.5 Upper Rear Panel

A Remove the upper right panel.
See chapter Upper Right Panel on page 369.
B Remove the upper left panel.

See chapter Upper Left Panel on page 371.
C Remove the upper rear panel.

Remove the 3x screws and washers (1) located on the top of the upper rear
panel.
Figure 448.
IH-500 | 373
Maintenance
6.10.6 Lower Rear Panel

A Remove the lower right panel.
See chapter Lower Right Panel on page 370.
B Remove the lower left panel.

See chapter Lower Left Panel on page 372.
C Remove the upper rear panel.

See chapter Upper Rear Panel on page 373.
D Remove the lower rear panel.

Remove:
• 1 screw and washer (1) located on the top of the rear lower panel;
• 3x screws and washers (2) located on the bottom of the rear lower panel.
2
Figure 449.
374 | IH-500
7 Troubleshooting
b Make
sure to have read and understood this documentation before carrying out any
troubleshooting on the IH-500. In case of unclear information, please contact the
distributor.
7.1 Alarms and Error Management
k given in the following list.

When an error message appears on the screen, read it and check whether an explanation is
Then select OK/acknowledge and execute the required procedure to solve the problem.
For more detailed description about error messages, refer to the document DC-CP-039A01-07.
IH-500 | 375
7.2 All Modules
376 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
ALL MODULES
Error code Error description Possible cause Corrective actions
0x018B2F During initialization, access door is (1) Front door opened (1) Check that the front door is correctly closed
opened (2) Sensor failure (2) In case of sensor failure, see error code 0x018B43.
0x018B38 During initialization, weekly (1) Weekly maintenance interrupted (1) After default correction, perform again weekly maintenance with user or service
maintenance is on undefined status after power switching software
or weekly maintenance canister in (2) Weekly maintenance canister (2a) Replace the canister with the system liquid container.
detected instead of the system detected (2b) Check the detection sensor for the canister.
liquid container
0x018B3C During initialization, needle change Needle change procedure interrupted After default correction, perform again needle change with user or service software
is in progress after power switching
0x018B3F During initialization, presence (1) Sensor failure (1) Check sensor (LED on the sensor OK) encoder
detection auto-test failure (2) Sensor not adjusted (2) If OK: Perform again detection sensor adjustment (see Resources Sensor
Localization on page 228)
(3) If not OK: Check wiring (gripper side) and change the sensor if necessary
0x018E2A During initialization, an embarked Shut down during clot procedure (1) In service mode, check there is no clot on the needle.
clot default is present (2) Clear default and perform fluidic priming.
(3) If the needle is clogged, change it
0x019003 The internal ambient temperature (1) High internal temperature (1) Internal temperature > 30°C
reach the early warning limit (30°C) (2) Temperature sensor failure (2a) Check temperature sensor calibration
(2b) Check temperature sensor wiring
(2c) Change the temperature sensor
0x019004 The internal ambient temperature (1) Too high internal temperature (1) Internal temperature > 31°C
reach the warning limit (31°C) (2) Temperature sensor failure (2a) Check temperature sensor calibration
0x019005 The external ambient temperature (1) High external temperature (1) External temperature > 28°C or check if there is no heat source just near the
reach the warning limit (28°C) (2) Temperature sensor failure sensor
(2a) Check temperature sensor calibration
0x019006 Difference between internal (1) Temperature sensor failure (1) Check external temperature: environmental conditions (opened windows,
temperature sensor and external (2) One of the sensor failed heating, air flow)
temperature sensor (> 10°C) (2a) Check temperature sensors calibration
(2b) Check temperature sensors wiring
0x019007 Internal ambient temperature too (1) External temperature too low (1) Check external temperature and environmental conditions of the device (open
low (18°C). (2) Malfunction of a temperature window, heating, air current, etc...)
sensor (2a) Check temperature sensor calibration
ALL MODULES
0x103001 APF checker error. The system APF Checker error. Process not Contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for investigation.
detect an error between the APF compliant with the APF folder
and the process perfomed on the
instrument,
0x104B03 Card block detected as missing (1) Card block missing (1) Check that all card blocks are correctly installed.
during the instrument initialization. (2) Mapping sensor failure (2) Check the mapping sensor adjustment.
0x104C01 APF Checker failure. Error during APF Checker error. Process not Contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for investigation.
the check between the APF and compliant with the APF folder
the dispense set used.
0x104D06 Expiry date of the reagent reached. Reagent vial expired. (1) Check the expiry date of the product.
(2) Check the date of the computer.
0x104D07 Expiry date of the diluent reached. Diluent rack expired. (1) Check the expiry date of the product.
0x104D08 Expiry date of the gel card reached. Gel card expired. (1) Check the expiry date of the product.
0x104D09 On board time of the reagent OBT of the reagent vial expired. Remove the product.
reached.
0x104D10 On board time of the gel card OBT of the gel card expired. Remove the product.
reached.
0x104D11 On board time of the diluent rack OBT of the diluent rack expired. Remove the product.
reached.
0x104D22 Test performed when the Test performed in service mode. Switch to exploitation mode.
instrument is not in exploitation
mode.
0x104F02 The maximum duration (10min) The card did not go to the incubator Check for failure on transport arm, pipettor and incubator.
between the pipetting and the (following an other error). For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
incubation is reached. investigation.
0x104F05 The maximum duration between 2 Pipetting issue. Check for failure on pipettor.
dispenses is reached. For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
investigation.
0x104F06 The maximum duration (60min) Instrument issue. Check for failure on the system.
between the end of the For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
centrifugation and the reading is investigation.
reached.
0x108B16 Diluent piercing pin found missing (1) Piercing pin removed by the user. (1) Check the presence of the piercing pin.
during the instrument initialization. (2) Gripper failure. (2) Check the gripping of the piercing pin, If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
0x108B41 Software version are not correct Server, application or files not compliant Check the version on the service software.
after a check during the instrument with the current software version. Check the firmware and all applications.
IH-500 | 377
initialization.
All Modules
If necessary, install the software.
378 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
ALL MODULES
0x108C07 Adjustment status found missing Adjustment status not present. According the status, perform the correct adjustment and validate the status. Switch
after a check during the instrument to exploitation and try to initialize the system.
initialization.
0xmm0101 Error on electronic boards. Electronic boards failure. “mm” linked to the module:
0xmm0102 • 02: X pipettor axis;
0xmm0103 • 03: Y pipettor axis;
0xmm0104 • 04: Z pipettor axis;
0xmm0105 • 05: Front centrifuge;
0xmm0106 • 06: Rear centrifuge;
0xmm0107 • 07: I/O fluidic board;
0xmm0108
0xmm0109 Check the wiring, and the communication between the PC and the power supply.
0xmm010A Check all the fuse on the power supply.
0xmm010B If necessary, change the electronic board
0xmm010C
0xmm010D
0xmm010E
0xmm010F
0xmm0110
0xmm0111
0xmm0112
0xmm0113
0xmm0114
0xmm0115
0xmm0309
0xmm030D
0xmm030F
0x0B8904
7.3 Transport Arm
For more detailed description about error messages related to the transport arm, refer to the document IH-500 NI Transport Arm Troubleshooting.
TRANSPORT ARM
0x018010 Communication failure with the Connection failure (TCP/IP port). Start again the instrument and check communication between PC and transport arm.
0x018011 transport arm controller. Check connection between PC and transport arm (RJ45 cable).
0x018013 Transport arm controller failure. Contact Instrument support.
0x018014
0x018003
0x018103
0x01811C
0x018106 During empty movement, the (1) Contact with resource or object. (1) Check there is no contact with an object which could block moves.
0x018110 transport arm does not position (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm. (2) In case of frequent default:
properly. • Change the main power supply.
0x018B1A
• Check connexions on the Transport Arm Controller Interface box (especially
on the motor breaks).
• Analyze error.log file to find on which axis occurs the default. If necessary,
change power module linked to this (only in case of frequent default).
0x018106 During initialization, the transport (1) Contact with resource or object. (1) Check there is no contact with an object which could block moves.
0x018110 arm does not position properly. (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm. (2) In case of frequent default:
0x018B1B • Change the main power supply.
0x018106 During resources detection, the (1) Contact with resource or object. (1) Check there is no contact with an object which could block moves.
0x018110 transport arm does not position (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm. (2) In case of frequent default:
properly. • Change the main power supply.
0x018B1F
• Check connexions on the DSI box (especially on the motor breaks)
• Analyse error.log file to find on which axis occurs the default. If necessary,
change power module linked to this (only in case of frequent default)
0x018116 Power failure on the transport arm. (1) Emergency stop. (1a) Check that instrument access are correctly closed (electromagnetic latch and
(1) Security chain: Impossibility to security sensor of the left door and LED board connector).
power transport arm. (1b) Check J100 connector on transport arm controller.
(1c) Check power function (24V_ST_A & 24V_ST_B). Change the main power if
necessary.
(1d) Contact Instrument support.
Transport Arm
IH-500 | 379
380 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
TRANSPORT ARM
0x018119 During movement with (1) Contact with resource or object: (1) Check there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is no
0x01811A consumable, sample transfer or secure posing outbreak. object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
0x018B19 diluent reconstitution, the transport (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm. secure posing.
arm does not position properly. (2) In case of frequent default:
• Change the main power supply.
on the motor breaks)
• Analyse error.log file to find on which axis occurs the default. If necessary,
change power module linked to this (only in case of frequent default)
0x01811B Error during the positioning of the (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
diluent lock (2) Positioning fault of the diluent rack no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
secure posing.
(3) Drag overshoot of transport arm
(2) Check the position of the diluent rack or if the diluent lock is not too hard
(3) In case of frequent default:
• Analyze error.log file to find on which axis occurs the default.If necessary,
0x01811D Position error of the transport arm (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
while moving a resource. (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
secure posing.
0x01811E Position error of the transport arm (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
while piercing a diluent rack. (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
secure posing.
TRANSPORT ARM
0x01811F Position error of the transport arm (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
when unloading the sample rack. (2) Drag overshoot of transport arm no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
secure posing.
0x018120 Position error of the transfer robot (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
when performing a centrifuge to (2) Position error of the centrifuge trap no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
trap operation secure posing.
(2) Check the position of trap door and check if the movement of the trap is not too
hard.
0x018121 Unable to open the gripper after a Hardware failure Check if the movement of the gripper is smooth or not.
0x018417 gripper control position/torque Clean the gripper. See chapter Gripper on page 356.
check failure
0x018B34
0x018130 Position error of the transport arm (1) Contact with an object (1) Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is
while piercing a gel card. (2) Position error of the piercing pin no object and in case of frequent default, check gripper localization and perform
secure posing.
(2) Check the position of piercing pin
0x018210 Timeout error during the access to Module failure in the shared area Error due to an issue on the pipetting area.
the shared area (with no resources Analyze previous default.
on the gripper)
0x018212 Unexpected object detected in the The system previously saved the state Blocking fault during the initialization.
gripper during the transport arm of the gripper. On the service software, acknowledge the error and switch on the exploitation mode.
initialization
Transport Arm
IH-500 | 381
0x018213 Timeout error during the access to Module failure in the shared area Error due to an issue on the pipetting area.
the shared area (with resources on Analyze previous default.
the gripper)
382 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
TRANSPORT ARM
0x018220 An unexpected diluent rack is Transport arm failure. On the service software, remove the diluent rack on the intermediate diluent position.
detected in the intermediate diluent Acknowledge the error.
position during the transport arm Initialize the transport arm.
initialization.
0x018224 The gripper does not close (1) Hardware failure (1) Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper according the procedure
correctly when picking a (2) Wrong picking position of the of the service manual.
consumable. consumable (2) Check the positioning of the consumable.
(3) Bad calibration (3) Redo the gripper calibration.
0x018226 Error sent by the transport arm Communication failure Check the communication.
0x018227 controller during the power For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
calibration of the transport arm investigation.
motor.
0x018410 Communication error between the Communication failure (1) Check the connection of the gripper spiral cable (if necessary, change the spiral
0x018411 transport arm controller and the cable).
0x01841B gripper. (2) Check the voltage on the gripper board (if LED is ON or not). If not, change the
gripper board and/or the gripper spiral cable.
(3) Check the connection of the gripper cable on the TA controller (connector J203)
0x018412 The gripper does not open Hardware failure Check if the movement of the gripper is smooth or not.
correctly when placing a Clean the gripper. See chapter Gripper on page 356.
consumable.
0x018412 The gripper does not open Hardware failure Check if the movement of the gripper is smooth or not.
correctly when placing a Clean the gripper. See chapter Gripper on page 356.
consumable in the solid waste.
0x018412 Position error of the gripper when Hardware failure Check if the movement of the gripper is smooth or not.
opening/closing a centrifuge Clean the gripper. See chapter Gripper on page 356.
trapdoor or diluent lock.
0x018413 Inserted diluent rack not detected (1) Diluent rack removed by the user (1) Check the mapping sensor adjustment, and ask if the user remove the diluent
during a pickup for identification. (2) Gripper failure rack.
(2) Check the gripping of the diluent rack. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
0x018413 Piercing tip not detected when (1) Piercing tip removed by the user (1) Check if the user removed the piercing pin.
0x018B16 picked by the gripper (clamping (2) Gripper failure (2) Check the gripping of the piercing pin. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
force)
0x018413 Resource (sample rack excluded) (1) Resource removed by the user (1) Check if the user removed the resources.
0x018B18 not detected when picked by the (2) Gripper failure (2) Check the gripping of the resources. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
transport arm.
0x018413 Sample rack not detected when (1) Resource removed by the user (1) Check the presence of the resource.
0x018B1D picked by the transport arm. (2) Gripper failure (2) Check the gripping of the resources. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
0x018413 Resource (sample rack excluded) (1) Resource not detected (1) Check the adjustment of the mapping sensor.
0x018B30 not detected when picked by the (2) Gripper failure (2) Check the gripping of the resources. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
transport arm, but detected by the
mapping sensor.
TRANSPORT ARM
0x018413 Card block detected by the (1) Resource not detected (1) Check the adjustment of the mapping sensor.
0x018B37 mapping sensor but not detected (2) Gripper failure (2) Check the gripping of the resources. If necessary, redo the gripper calibration.
by the gripper when picked by the
gripper.
0x018414 Excessive torque for the gripper to (1) Gripper failure (1) Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper. See chapter Gripper on
pick up a resource (value out of (2) Resource not correctly installed in page 356.
range). the instrument (2a) The consumable is not compliant about the specification.
Not applicable for the drawers. (2b) The resource is not correctly installed on the instrument.
(2c) Redo the calibration of the gripper
0x018414 Excessive torque for the gripper to (1) Gripper failure (1) Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper according the procedure
0x01841C pick up a resource from the (2) Resource not correctly installed in of the service manual
drawers (value out of range). the instrument (2a) The consumable is not compliant about the specification.
(2b) The resource is not correctly installed on the instrument.
(2c) Redo the calibration of the gripper
0x018415 Resource lost during the transfer. (1) Resource not correctly picked by (1) Check the gripper and the resources.
0x018B20 the gripper (2) Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper according the procedure
(2) Gripper failure of the service manual
0x018416 Gripper initialization failure (home (1) Effort not detected (1) Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper according the procedure
position not detected). (1) Motor control board failure of the service manual.
(2) Check the gripper board, and the connection between the motor and the board.
0x018418 Unable to open the gripper after a Gripper failure Check if the gripper is smooth. If not, clean the gripper according the procedure of
gripper failure to pick resources. the service manual.
0x018B32 Transport arm failure after placing a Hardware failure Check that there is no contact with an object which could block moves. If there is no
reagent vial. object and in case of frequent default, check the gripper localization and perform a
secure posing.
In case of frequent default:
• Check connexions on the Transport Arm Controller Interface box (especially on the
motor breaks).
• Analyze error.log file to find on which axis occurs the default.
If necessary, change power module linked to this (only in case of frequent default)
0x018B32 During initialization, the transport is The transport arm is not correctly With the service software:
in the shared area. initialized after a needle change or a • acknowledge the error;
clot detection.
• initialize the transport arm and then the pipetor.
0x104B04 During initialization, a gel card is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check gel card presence in pipetting area)
detected in the pipetting or (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
preparation area. (2) Mapping default
Transport Arm
0x104B04 During pipetting area mapping after After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check gel card presence in pipetting area)
IH-500 | 383
access, a gel card is detected (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
present
(2) Mapping default
384 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
TRANSPORT ARM
0x104B04 During initialization, a reagent vial is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check reagent vial presence in pipetting area)
detected in the pipetting area. (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
(2) Mapping default
0x104B04 During initialization, a diluent rack is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check diluent rack presence in pipetting area)
detected in the pipetting area. (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
(2) Mapping default
0x104B04 During pipetting area mapping after After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check diluent rack presence in pipetting area)
access, a diluent rack is detected (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
present
(2) Mapping default
access, a gel card is detected no (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
more present
(2) Mapping default
access, a diluent rack is detected (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
no more present (2) Mapping default
0x104B05 During initialization, a diluent rack is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check diluent rack presence in pipetting area)
detected no more present (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
(2) Mapping default
0x104B05 During initialization, a gel card is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check gel card presence in pipetting area)
detected no more present in (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
pipetting or preparation area
(2) Mapping default
0x104B05 During initialization, a reagent is After abnormal stop: (1) User error (check reagent presence in reagent area)
detected no more present in (1) Manipulation during stop (2) In case of frequent default, perform mapping sensor adjustment
pipetting area (2) Mapping default
7.4 Centrifuge
CENTRIFUGE
0x014B04 During initialization of the (1) Resource left in instrument. (1) Check the absence of gel card in the centrifuges.
0x018B30 instrument, a gel card was (2) Presence detection sensor failure. (2) Check the adjustment of the presence detection sensor.
detected present in one centrifuge.
0x014B05 During initialization of the (1) Manual handling of the resources (1) Check the absence of gel card in the centrifuges.
0x018B30 instrument, a gel card was while instrument was off. (2) Check the adjustment of the presence detection sensor.
detected absent in one centrifuge. (2) Presence detection sensor failure.
CENTRIFUGE
0x018217 During position detection of the (1) Trapdoor absent - detection sticker (1) Check the integrity of the centrifuge trapdoor.
0x058217 trapdoor, the trapdoor is detected on the trapdoor absent. (2) Check the integrity of the gripper.
0x068217 NOT CLOSED. (2) Gripper is damaged. (3) Check the adjustment of the resource detection sensor.
(3) Failure of the resource detection
sensor.
0x01821E During position detection of the (1) Trapdoor absent - detection sticker (1) Check the integrity of the centrifuge trapdoor.
0x05821E trapdoor, the trapdoor is detected on the trapdoor absent. (2) Check the integrity of the gripper.
0x06821E NOT OPENED. (2) Gripper is damaged. (3) Check the adjustment of the resource detection sensor.
(3) Failure of the resource detection
sensor.
0x019008 The centrifuge temperature Centrifuge temperature regulation (1) Check the centrifuge temperature regulation.
reached warning value (out of failure. (2) Check the electrical connection on the centrifuge board and on the cooling
range 60.8°F (16°C) / 77°F (25°C)). centrifuge board.
(3) Change the centrifuge module if cooling is out of order.
0x019009 The centrifuge temperature is out of Centrifuge temperature regulation (1) Check the centrifuge temperature regulation.
range. failure. (2) Check the electrical connection on the centrifuge board and on the cooling
centrifuge board.
(3) Change the centrifuge module if cooling is out of order.
0x050404 Error during origin research on (1) Axis fault (hard spot). (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis.
0x050411 centrifuge axis. (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
0x050413 centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover.
0x05FD07 (foreign body). (3) Check that the centrifuge head is correctly inserted.
0x05FD12 (3) Centrifuge head missing or not (4) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
correctly inserted. and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module.
0x050404
(4) Motor, encoder, or electronic board (5) Check the presence and the integrity of the joint on the centrifuge axis.
0x060411
failure.
0x060413
(5) Joint on the centrifuge axis
0x06FD07 defective or absent.
0x06FD12
0x050411 Positioning error of the centrifuge (1) Axis fault (hard spot). (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis.
0x050413 (static or dynamic) during motion (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
before a gel card is put down. centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover.
0x05FD07
(foreign body). (3) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
0x05FD12
(3) Motor, encoder, or electronic board and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module.
0x060411
failure.
0x060413
0x06FD07
0x06FD12
IH-500 | 385
Centrifuge
386 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
CENTRIFUGE
0x050411 Positioning error of the centrifuge (1) Axis fault (hard spot). (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis.
0x050413 (static or dynamic) during motion (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
0x05FD07 before a gel card taking. centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover.
0x05FD12 (foreign body). (3) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
0x060411 (3) Motor, encoder, or electronic board and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module.
failure.
0x060413
0x06FD07
0x06FD12
0x050411 Positioning error of the centrifuge (1) Axis fault (hard spot) (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis
0x050413 (static or dynamic) during (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
0x05FD07 centrifugation ending. centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover
0x05FD12 (foreign body) (3) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
0x060411 (3) Motor, encoder, or electronic board and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module
failure (4) Check the presence and the integrity of the joint on the centrifuge axis
0x060413
(4) Joint on the centrifuge axis
0x06FD07
defective or absent
0x06FD12
0x050411 During initialization / resource (1) Axis fault (hard spot) (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis
0x050413 detection, a positioning error (static (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
or dynamic) occurred centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover
0x05FD11
(foreign body) (3) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
0x05FD12
(3) Motor, encoder, or electronic board and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module
0x060411
failure
0x060413
0x06FD11
0x06FD12
0x05FD04 Error on the control of the (1) Axis fault (hard spot) (1) Check the absence of hard spot on the centrifuge axis.
0x05FD09 centrifugation speed (potentially (2) Interference between the (2) Check the absence of foreign body in the centrifuge, and check the absence of
due to overload error on axis or due centrifuge head and an element contact between the centrifuge head and the centrifuge cover
0x06FD04
to a speed control error, or due to a (foreign body) (3) Check the centrifuge board, the motor, the encoder, the electrical connection,
0x06FD09 current limitation error)
(3) Motor, encoder, or electronic board and if necessary, replace the centrifuge module.
failure (4) Check the presence and the integrity of the joint on the centrifuge axis
(4) Joint on the centrifuge axis (5) The instrument should not be shocked, especially during centrifugation
defective or absent
(5) Shock on the instrument during
the centrifugation
7.5 Incubator
INCUBATOR
0x014301 The temperature of the incubator is The temperature of the incubator is out (1) Check the incubator temperature regulation
out of range (36.5 ± 2.7 °C) in the of range (2) Change the incubator module or the analytic board
well
0x014B04 During initialization of the (1) Manual handling of the resources (1) Check the absence of ID-card in the incubator
instrument, a gel card was while instrument was off. (2) Check the adjustment of the presence detection sensor
detected present in the incubator (2) Failure of the presence detection
sensor
0x014B05 During initialization of the (1) Manual handling of the resources (1) User error
instrument, a gel card was while instrument was off (2a) Check the adjustment of the presence detection sensor
detected absent in the incubator (2) Failure of the presence detection (2b) If fault often occurs, check and adjust the presence detection sensor, and check
sensor the integrity of the background under the incubator (background must be
uniform)
0x019001 Discordance between the values of Failure of the temperature Check the temperature sensors adjustment.
the temperature sensors of the measurement function (sensor, board, If temperatures are incoherent, replace the temperature sensor(s).
incubator (dispersion > 5,4°C etc.)
If the incubator does not warm up, replace the incubator or the electronic board
between the 2 values)
0x104F03 The maximum duration (10min) of Centrifuge not available (following Check the absence of failure on the centrifuge(s)
incubation at 37°C of the well of an another failure)
ID-card was reached (overshoot)
0x104F03 The maximum duration (5min) of (1) Centrifuge not available (following Check the absence of failure on the centrifuge(s)
incubation at ambient temperature another failure)
of the well of an ID-card was (2) Incubation control failure
reached (overshoot)
0x104F03 The maximum duration (10min) of (1) Centrifuge not available (following Check the absence of failure on the centrifuge(s)
incubation of the well of a gel card another failure)
without incubation was reached (2) Incubation control failure
(overshoot)
IH-500 | 387
Incubator
7.6 Pipetor
388 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
PIPETOR
0x018B21 Transport arm in default status still Transport arm failure in common area Analyze previous default
present on common area or
element lost in this area
0x018B32 Pipettor X, Y or Z position error (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
while the transport arm is in the (2) Driving failure mechanism
reagents protective position in the (2) Check motor driving and wiring
(3) Position control chain failure
shared area (3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
and cleaning of the optical scales
0x018E01 After default, pipetor Z axis doesn't (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
reach its clearance position static (2) Driving failure mechanism
error or drag overshoot of Z axis) (2) Check motor driving and wiring
(3) Position control chain failure
(3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
0x018E14 Needle localization or target Contact failure between needle and Clean correctly with demineralized water needle extremity and target area (and also
teaching invalid (pipetor out of target gauges used for teaching). Then perform again localization.
range)
0x018E25 During needle localization, teaching Contact default between needle and Clean correctly with demineralized water needle extremity and target area (and also
quantity for one point reaches the target used gauges for teaching). Then perform again localization
limit
0x018E26 Capacitive detection signal failure (1) Level detection failure (1a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection wire (change them
during needle localization if necessary): move manually pipetor Z axis, the signal fluctuation must be low
and when touching the needle, the signal must be zero
(1b) Check the level detection board (change it if necessary)
(1c) If level detection signal is OK, change PDS applicative board and check wiring
between PDS applicative board and pipetor applicative board
0x020404 During X, Y or Z initialization, the (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
0x020411 transport arm doesn't reach its (2) Driving failure mechanism
position (static error or drag (2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x020413 (3) Position control chain failure
overshoot or origin sensor failure (3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
0x028E28 for X, Y or Z axis)
0x030404
0x030411
0x030413
0x038E28
0x040404
0x040411
0x040413
0X048E28
PIPETOR
0x020411 During X or Y movement, transport (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis
0x020413 arm doesn't reach its position (2) Driving failure (2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x028E28 (static error or drag overshoot) (3) Position control chain failure (3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
0x030411 and cleaning of the optical scales
0x030413
0x038E28
0x020411 Pipetor static error or drag (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
0x020413 overshoot during needle (2) Driving failure mechanism
localization (2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x030411 (3) Position control chain failure
0x030413 (4) Level detection failure (3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
0x040411 and cleaning of the optical scales
(4a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection wire (change them
0x040413
if necessary): move manually pipetor Z axis, the signal fluctuation must be low
0x018E27 and when touching the needle, the signal must be zero
(4b) Check the level detection board (change it if necessary)
(4c) If level detection signal is OK, change PDS applicative board and check wiring
between PDS applicative board and pipetor applicative board
0x040411 Static error or drag overshoot of Z (1) Mechanical failure (1a) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
0x040413 axis during liquid detection or (2) Driving failure mechanism
during movement to sampling (1b) Check there is no caps on the tube
0x018E1E (3) Position control chain failure
position (1c) Check that the tube is conform to rack type
(2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x040411 During vial bottom detection, (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
0x040413 pipetor Z axis doesn't reach its (2) Driving failure mechanism
position (static error or drag (2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x048E28 (3) Position control chain failure
overshoot of Z axis out of bottom (3) Check encoder information returned with service software. Check encoder wiring
detection area)
0x040411 During movement, pipetor Z axis (1) Mechanical failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
0x040413 doesn't reach its position (static (2) Driving failure mechanism
error or drag overshoot of Z axis) (2) Check motor driving and wiring
0x048E28 (3) Position control chain failure
0x018E08 Bottom detection error Reagent vial bottom not detected by Perform the teaching of the reagent plate (the Z positions are not correctly set).
the pipetor
IH-500 | 389
Pipetor
7.7 Access to the Pipetting Area
390 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
ACCESS TO THE DRAWER / PIPETTING AREA
0x018B31 Reagent suspension stop time Agitation system failure Analyze previous defaults
exceeds the limit See defaults on reagent area:
• 0x080411 on page 390
• 0x080413 on page 390
• 0x088B22 on page 390
0x018B43 During opening driving, the (1) Blocked door (1) Check that the door is not blocked or closed to fast (wait 1s after opening)
pipetting right door is not detected (2) Driving failure (2) Check if the electromagnetic latch is driven correctly
as opened
(3) Sensor failure (3) Check sensor status with service software
(4) Check status change on the applicative board (driving and sensor status)
(5) Check electromagnetic latch wiring
(6) Change electromagnetic latch or applicative board
0x080404 Reagent plate initialization failure Agitation system failure: (1) Check there is no hard spot on the reagent motor axis
0x080411 (1) Mechanical default (2) Check motor, encoder or applicative board wiring. If necessary, change the
0x080413 (2) Electrical default complete module or the applicative board
0x088B22
0x080411 During reagent suspension, reagent Agitation system failure (1) Check there is no hard spot on the reagent area
0x080413 area position or speed is not (2) Check motor, encoder or applicative board wiring. If necessary, change the
conform complete module or the applicative board
0x088B2A
0x088B51
0x104B04 During initialization, a sample rack (1) Rack insertion. (1) User error (rack insertion whereas software didn't start)
is detected present (2) Rack insertion outside of the (2) Rack detection board failure. See error code 0x018B35 on page 401
process
0x108B2E During operation, the pipetor right Forced opening of the door (1) Door closed by user
door is detected opened (2) Front door electromagnetic latch failure
If OK, see error code 0x018B43 on page 390
0x108B42 During the clot resolution, the User validates door closure whereas it Close the front door
pipetting door is detected opened is detected opened If OK, see error code 0x018B43 on page 390
after pressing the button Next.
7.8 Ionizer
IONIZER
0x018B28 Ionizer failed before gel card Ionizer failure (1) Check tension on the extremity of the ionizer with the high voltage tester pen and
piercing check with service software the ionizer status
(2) Check ionizer wiring (between ionizer power and fluidic applicative board then
between ionizer power and the pin)
(3) Change the complete ionizer or the fluidic board
7.9 Consumable Drawer

CONSUMABLE DRAWER
0x018221 Inconsistency control during (1) Defect background (1) Clean left drawer
mapping: not present gel card and (2) Bad position of consumable (2) Check consumable drawer position (well adjusted and no play)
gel card tray detection (3) Defective mapping sensor (3) Perform mapping check and sensor adjustment
0x018222 Inconsistency control during (1) Defect background. (1) Clean left drawer
mapping: diluent rack and gel card (2) Bad position of consumable (2) Check consumable drawer position (well adjusted and no play)
tray detection
(3) Defective mapping sensor (3) Perform mapping check and sensor adjustment
0x018223 Inconsistency control during (1) Defect background (1) Clean left drawer.
mapping: diluent rack and gel card (2) Bad position of consumable (2) Check consumable drawer position (well adjusted and no play).
detection
(3) Defective mapping sensor (3) Perform mapping check and sensor adjustment
0x018B45 The consumable drawer does not (1) Consumable drawer blocked (1) Check that the consumable drawer is not blocked or not closed to fast after
open with software (2) Pilotage damaged opening (1s)
(3) Electromagnetic latch damaged (2) Check that the electromagnetic latch is correctly activated
(3) Check the sensor status in the service software.
(4) Check LED status on the board.
(5) Check electromagnetic latch wiring.
(6) Change the electromagnetic latch or the I/O board
0X104108 The reagent plate is full Reagent plate is full Check the reagent plate, and, if necessary, remove the not used vial.
0X104922 The maximum time of the reagent Reagent vial not correctly mixed Open the drawer. Shake the reagent vial, and close the drawer to validate the
vial inside the drawer is reached reagent.
0x104F06 No more place in the left Maximum capacity of gel cards to read Empty the left consumable drawer and put empty gel card tray
consumable drawer for gel card reached
returned after first reading
IH-500 | 391
Ionizer
7.10 Fluidic
392 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
FLUIDIC
0x018E06 Level detection signal control failure Level detection failure (1) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
them if necessary: move manually pipetor Z axis, signal variation must be low
and if you touch the needle, signal must be equal to zero
(2) Check level detection board (change it if necessary
(3) If the level detection signal is correct, change the PDS applicative board and
check wiring between PDS applicative board and I/O board
0x018E07 Level detection error (level lost not (1) Foam (1) Check there is no foam or bubble in the reagent
detected during level detection) (2) Level detection failure (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
even after many tries them if necessary: move manually pipetor Z axis, signal variation must be low
(2b) Check level detection board (change it if necessary)
(2c) If the level detection signal is correct, change the PDS applicative board and
0x018E0A During level detection before a (1) Empty sample tube (1a) Check there is liquid in the sample tube
sample tube sampling, the bottom (2) Level detection failure (1b) Check the sample bottom level for this rack and tube type. If necessary, adjust it.
level is reached (No level detection (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
in the expected range)
0x018E0C Filling of the decontamination well (1) Decontamination circuit empty (1a) Check function and wiring of decontamination well filling pump
failure (level detection height under (2) Level detection failure (1b) Check function and wiring of washing station solenoid valve
the limit)
(1c) Check the decontamination circuit (filter and tubings)
(1d) Level sensor for NaOH bottle failure
(2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
0x018E0E Sampling set default: (1) APF definition error APF definition default. Reload them.
supplementary volume not null (2) Software bug If it is not OK, send LOG files and pictures to instrument support to perform complete
expertise
0x018E0F Sampling set default: drying (1) APF definition error APF definition default. Reload them.
volume not null (2) Software bug If it is not OK, send LOG files and pictures to instrument support to perform complete
expertise
FLUIDIC
0x018E10 Unpriming control at the end of the (1) Bubble in reagent during sampling (1) Check blood quality (less than 5 days)
sampling failed (for reagent) (2) Level detection failure (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
0x018E12 Not enough reagent during (1) Not enough reagent (1a) Check if there is liquid in the reagent
0x104B06 sampling, no sampling can be (2) Detection of the bottom before (1b) Check the reagent bottom level and adjust it if necessary
done (volume calculated during liquid detection (2) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no backlash in rack-and-pinion
level detection)
(3) Level detection failure mechanism
0x018E13 Not enough reagent during (1) Not enough reagent (1a) Check if there is liquid in the reagent
sampling, at least on sampling can (2) Detection of the bottom before (1b) Check the reagent bottom level and adjust it if necessary
be done (volume calculated during liquid detection (2) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
level detection) (3) Level detection failure mechanism
0x018E16 Unpriming control at the end of the (1) Embarked filament (1) Check blood quality (less than 5 days)
sampling failed (embarked filament) (2) Level detection failure (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
0x018E17 Unpriming control failed at the end (1) Embarked filament then broken (1) Check blood quality (less than 5 days)
of the sampling (level lost in the during sampling (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
height range - filament broken) (2) Level detection failure them if necessary: move manually pipetor Z axis, signal variation must be low
(3) Needle position default in the and if you touch the needle, signal must be equal to zero
sample tube (2b) Check level detection board (change it if necessary)
IH-500 | 393
Fluidic
394 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
FLUIDIC
0x018E18 Not enough liquid in the sample (1) Not enough reagent (1a) Check there is liquid in the sample tube
tube during sampling (volume (2) Level detection failure (1b) Check the sample tube bottom level and adjust it if necessary
calculated during level detection) (1c) In case of «low volume» and «pediatric» tubes, check bottom level adjustment
(see Pediatric / Low Volume Tube Adjustment on page 260).
0x018E19 Purge default of the overflow well (1) Purge pump and solenoid valve (1) Check function and wiring of washing station solenoid valve and purge pump
or the collect well (Liquid present in failure (2) Check that there is no pinched or clogged tubings or sediment int the tubing
the collect well during periodical (2) Clogged purge circuit after the washing station and the waste external tubing
control with level detection)
(3) If this error occurs again, check the position of the needle on the washing station.
If necessary, perform a Change Pipette Needle to adjust the position.
0x018E1B Out of range or missing level (1) Purge pump failure. (1) Check function and wiring of washing station pump
detection in the overflow well at the (2) Solenoid valve blocked in purge (2) Check function and wiring of washing station solenoid valve
end of rinsing or pre-washing position
0x018E1D Level lost detection error after (1) The needle is not centered in the (1) Check needle position in the decontamination well
many tries in the decontamination decontamination well (2a) Check connection between faradized vein and level detection cable. Change
well (2) Level detection failure them if necessary: move manually pipetor Z axis, signal variation must be low
0x018E23 Collect well filling error (level (1) Washing circuit flow too low (1) Check function and wiring of washing pump (check there is no foreign object in
detection height in the collect well (2) Washing station leak the circuit and change the washing pump if necessary)
under the limit, during periodical (2) Check function and wiring of washing station solenoid valve
control)
0x018E24 Purge of the decontamination well (1) Pump or solenoid valve default. (1a) Check function and wiring of washing station purge pump
error (with level detection) Purge circuit clogged (1b) Check function and wiring of washing station solenoid valve
(2) Level detection failure (1c) Check that there is no pinched or clogged tubings or sediment int the tubing
after the washing station and the waste external tubing
(1d) Check the purge circuit (filter and tubings)
FLUIDIC
0x018E29 Volume control failure during (1) Dispense error: In case of more than 3% of failed dispense:
dispense • drop under foil (1a) Check needle position in gel card (drop under foil detected or contact between
• foam dispense needle and foil)
• non dispense
(1b) Check there is no foam in the sample tubes (detection of foam dispense)
(1c) Deviation of the PDS calibration: change the PDS module (low additional volume)
0x018E2B During weekly maintenance, before (1) Liquid detection in the overflow vat (1a) Fluidic leak / bottle leak / washing station overflow / intermediate tank overflow
dispense in washing station, liquid (2) Leak detection sensor failure (1b) Washing station overflow due to waste circuit clogged
is detected in overflow vat
(1c) Bottle overflow (system or NaOH solution) during filling
(2) Check function and wiring of leak detection sensor
0x018E2C Not enough liquid in the reagent (1) Reagent vial empty (1a) Check that there is liquid in the reagent vial.
vial (2) Level detection failure (1b) Check the reagent bottom level and adjust it if necessary.
(1c) Check the connection between the faradized vein and the level detection cable:
• Replace them if necessary.
• Move manually the pipetor Z axis, the signal variation must be low.
• If you touch the needle, the signal must be equal to zero.
(2d) Check the level detection board (change it if necessary).
(2e) If the level detection signal is correct, change the PDS applicative board and
check the wiring between the PDS applicative board and the I/O board.
0x018E2D During the washing, the state of the Washing pump failure Check the washing pump, and if necessary change it.
intermediate tank sensor did not
change
0x018E2E Time between the error occurrence Response of the user too long. Clean or replace the needle.
and the acknowledgment of this
error is too long. The needle is no
longer usable (blood dried inside
the needle)
0x018E33 Not enough volume on the (1) Not enough volume on the sample (1) Check the volume on the tube with the user.
pediatric or low volume tube tube (2a) Check the level detection on the pediatric or low volume tube (in some case, the
(during sampling) (2) The volume on the sample is not level detection must be deactivated on these tubes).
detected (2b) Check the level detection signal:
• Check connection between the faradized vein and the level detection cable.
Change them if necessary: move manually the pipetor Z axis, the signal
variation must be low and if you touch the needle, the signal must be equal
to zero.
• Check level detection board (change it if necessary).
• If the level detection signal is correct, change the PDS applicative board and
0x019101 Intermediate tank filling time-out (1) Filling flow for intermediate tank (1a) Check flow, if they are low, change the intermediate tank
(for complete filling or during too low (1b) Check filling pump flow, change it if necessary
priming or weekly maintenance,)
IH-500 | 395
(2) Level sensor failure (2) Check the level sensor in the intermediate tank
Fluidic
396 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
FLUIDIC
0x019102 Intermediate tank filling time-out (1) Filling flow for intermediate tank (1a) Check flow, if they are low, change the intermediate tank
(for continuous filling) too low (1b) Check filling pump flow, change it if necessary
(2) Level sensor failure (2) Check the level sensor in the intermediate tank
0x019103 One system solution bottle is out of Status OK if the bottle is not Check the system solution bottle (it has no magnet on the rear)
order (not connected or empty or connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
presence of a maintenance bottle) one change them and/or the fluidic board.
0x019104 Two system solution bottles are out Status OK if the bottle is not Check the system solution bottle (it has no magnet on the rear)
of order (not connected or empty connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
or presence of a maintenance one change them and/or the fluidic board.
bottle)
0x019105 On run, during priming, the low Status OK is the volume is less than 0.5 Check the filling of the decontamination bottle
level of the decontamination bottle liter If it's OK, check function and wiring of level sensor. If necessary, change it and/or the
is reached fluidic board.
0x019107 During weekly maintenance, no Status OK if the bottle is not Check the maintenance bottle (it has a magnet on the rear)
maintenance solution bottle is connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence, level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
operational one change them and/or the fluidic board.
0x019110 Before pipetting, liquid is detected (1) Liquid detection in the overflow vat (1a) Fluidic leak / bottle leak / washing station overflow / intermediate tank overflow
in the overflow vat (2) Leak detection sensor failure (1b) Washing station overflow due to waste circuit clogged
0x019201 One waste bottle is not operational Status OK if the bottle is not Check the waste bottle (it has a magnet on the rear)
(not connected or not present or connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence, level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
full) one change them and/or the fluidic board.
0x019202 Two waste bottles is not Status OK if the bottle is not Check the waste bottle (it has a magnet on the rear)
operational (not connected or not connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence, level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
present or full) one change them and/or the fluidic board.
0x019203 During purge, one waste bottle is Status OK if the bottle is not Check the waste bottle (it has a magnet on the rear)
not operational (not connected or connected, empty or not the correct Check function and wiring of presence, level and connexion sensors. If necessary,
not present or full) one change them and/or the fluidic board.
0x0C0411 Liquid not detected during reagent (1) Vial is empty (1a) Check there is liquid in the reagent
0x018E0A evaluation (drag overshot during (2) Detection of the bottom before (1b) Check the reagent bottom level and adjust it if necessary
liquid detection or bottom level liquid detection (2) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
reached) (3) Level detection failure mechanism
FLUIDIC
0x0C0411 Liquid not detected during first (1) Vial is empty (1a) Check there is liquid in the reagent
0x018E0A reagent sampling (drag overshot (2) Detection of the bottom before (1b) Check the reagent bottom level and adjust it if necessary
during liquid detection or bottom liquid detection (2) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
level reached)
0x0C0411 During sampling except washing, (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring.
0x0C0413 the PDS pump doesn't reach its default (2) Change PDS module.
position (static or dynamic error) (2) Particles in the pump
0x0C0411 During sampling except washing (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring.
0x0C0413 and priming, the PDS pump default (2) Change PDS module.
doesn't reach its position (static or (2) Particles in the pump
dynamic error)
0x0C0411 During sampling or dispense with (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring.
0x0C0413 washing, the PDS pump doesn't default (2) Change PDS module.
reach its position (static or dynamic (2) Particles in the pump
error)
0x0C0411 During dispense with priming or (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring.
0x0C0413 draining or flushing, the PDS pump default (2) Change PDS module.
doesn't reach its position (static or (2) Particles in the pump
dynamic error)
0x0C0411 During weekly maintenance, on (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check wiring of PDS module and solenoid valve.
0x0C0413 sampling to fill washing station, the default (2) Change the PDS module.
PDS module pump doesn't reach (2) Particles in the pump
its position (static or dynamic error)
0x0C0411 Liquid non detected before reagent (1) Empty reagent (1a) Check there is liquid in the reagent
0x0C0413 sampling (drag overshot during (2) Reagent bottom level detected (1b) Check the reagent bottom level. If necessary, adjust it.
level detection or bottom level before liquid detection
0x018E0A (2) Check there is no hard spot on pipetor axis and no play in rack-and-pinion
reached)
(3b) Check level detection board (change it if necessary
0x0C0411 During unblocking sequence, the (1) PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring (1) Check PDS pump or solenoid valve wiring
IH-500 | 397
0x0C0413 PDS pump doesn't reach its default (2) Change PDS module
position (static or dynamic error)
Fluidic
0x018E22 (2) Particles in the pump
398 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
FLUIDIC
0x0C0416 Overpressure of the PDS pump (1) Sampled liquid too viscous (1) Check blood quality (less than 5 days).
during gel card or diluent rack (2) Needle clogged (2) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary..
dispense (3) Pressure sensor failure (3) Control and/or change PDS module
0x0C0416 During weekly maintenance, PDS (1) Sampled liquid too viscous (1) Check liquid: no foreign object
0x018E1F module pump overpressure default (2) Needle clogged (2) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary
for dispense to fill washing station
(3) Pressure sensor failure (3) Control and/or change PDS module
or priming or purge
0x0C0416 Overpressure of the PDS module (1) Sampled liquid too viscous (1) Check liquid: no foreign object.
0x018E20 pump during dispense with priming (2) Needle clogged (2) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary.
or flushing or purge
(3) Pressure sensor failure (3) Control and/or change PDS module
0x0C0416 Overpressure of the PDS module (1) Sampled liquid too viscous (1) Check liquid: no foreign object.
0x018E21 pump during purge with service (2) Needle clogged (2) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary.
software.
(3) Pressure sensor failure (3) Control and/or change PDS module.
0x0C0416 Pressure sensor failure, pressure (1) Liquid to slimy (1) Check the liquid (not too old).
0x018E31 out of range during the sampling (2) Needle clogged (2) Check the needle.
(3) Issue with the pressure sensor (3) Change the PDS module.
0x0C0416 Overpressure of the PDS pump (1) Sampled liquid too viscous (1) Check there is no sediment in the washing fluidic circuit (change tubings and
0x0C8E1A during washing (2) Needle clogged intermediate tank if necessary).
(3) Pressure sensor failure (2) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary.
(3) Control and/or change PDS module.
0x0C4011 Positioning error of the PDS pump (1) Wiring issue of the PDS module (1) Check the wiring.
0x0C4013 (during titration) (2) Dust on the pump (2) Change the PDS Module.
0x018E2F
0x018E30
0x0CED07 Excessive negative pressure when (1) Viscosity of liquid out of range (1) Check blood quality (less than 5 days).
withdrawing liquid, except for (blood over 5 days) (2) Check the needle position on tube bottom (especially for «low volume»).
washing (air or liquid) (2) Needle too close to the bottom of (3a) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary
the sample tubes
(3b) Control and/or change PDS module
(3) Pressure sensor failure
0x0CED07 Excessive negative pressure when (1) Viscosity of liquid out of range (1) Check liquid: no foreign object.
0x0CED08 withdrawing decontamination (2) The needle is too close to bottom (2) Check needle position in the tube.
solution during washing (air or of the decontamination well
0x018E1C (3a) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary
liquid)
(3) Pressure sensor failure (3b) Control and/or change PDS module
0x0CED08 Hydraulic circuit clogged (not Clogged circuit (1) Check that the needle or the faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if
solved) without samples necessary.
(2) Check and/or the change PDS module.
0x0CED08 Hydraulic circuit clogged (not (1) Clot detection or out of range (1) Check the blood quality (less than 5 days).
0x018E15 solved) for samples liquid viscosity (2a) Check that needle or faradized vein are not clogged. Change them if necessary.
(2) Clogged circuit (2b) Control and/or change PDS module
FLUIDIC
0x0CED0B Pressure sensor default (out of (1) Unplugged sensor (1) Check wiring of PDS module, pressure sensor and PDS applicative board
range static pressure at the (2) Sensor damaged (2) If necessary, change the PDS applicative board and/or the PDS module
beginning of the sampling or no
signal variation at the beginning of
the sampling)
0x104D12 After reagent vial pipetting, there is Not enough volume on the reagent vial Insert a new reagent vial.
no enough volume to process the
next batch
0x108E2C Liquid volume estimated less than (1) Not enough liquid (1a) Check the presence of liquid in the bottle
1 dose (2) Detection of the bottom before (1b) Check the low rating bottle (if necessary, reset)
liquid detection (2) Verify the absence of hard spot on the Z axis and / or backlash (if necessary,
(3) Level detection failure repeat the adjustment procedure of the toothed rack)
0x109109 During instrument initialization, (1) Liquid detection in the overflow vat (1a) Fluidic leak / bottle leak / washing station overflow / intermediate tank overflow
liquid is detected in overflow vat (2) Leak detection sensor failure (1b) Washing station overflow due to waste circuit clogged
7.11 Internal Storage

INTERNAL STORAGE
0x018B2D During instrument initialization, the (1) Error during intervention (1) Check internal drawer locking
internal drawer is detected not (2) Detection error (2) If detection error be gripper: check hard point on the gripper and perform gripper
closed calibration
(3) If transport arm is not correctly positioned, check gripper localization or perform
internal drawer teaching
Internal Storage
IH-500 | 399
400 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
INTERNAL STORAGE
0x104B04 Expected gel card detected during (1) Mapping sensor failure. (1a) Check the adjustment of the mapping sensor.
the instrument initialization. (2) Gel card removed by the user. (1b) Check if the mapping works correctly on the internal storage, and check the
backplane (no dust and check the black sticker under the internal storage).
(2) Check the presence of the gel card.
0x104B05 Expected gel card not detected (1) Mapping sensor failure. (1a) Check the adjustment of the mapping sensor.
during the instrument initialization. (2) Gel card removed by the user. (1b) Check if the mapping works correctly on the internal storage, and check the
backplane (no dust and check the black sticker under the internal storage).
(2) Check the presence of the gel card.
7.12 Reagent Cooling

REAGENT COOLING
0x019002 Discordance between the values of Failure of the temperature Failure of one of the temperature sensors
the temperature sensors of the measurement function (sensor, board, Check calibration and operation of the coated temperature sensor box of the reagent
reagents module (dispersion > 2°C etc) plate
between the 2 values) Check temperature sensor wiring
0x01900A The temperature of the cooling of (1) Failure of the coated temperature (1a) Check calibration and operation of the two reagent plate temperature sensors
the reagents bottles is lower than sensor box (1b) Check I/O board driving (cooling regulation exit always ON)
57.2°F (14°C) (reagents are (2) Reagents cooling failure (2) Replace the chiller
unusable)
0x01900B Chiller of the reagents cooling is in Failure of the chiller (the «fault» output Failure of the chiller due to an overpressure or temperature fault: wait for the second
fault of the reagents cooling is active) fault
0x01900C Chiller of the reagents cooling: Failure of the chiller (the «fault» output (1) Failure of the chiller due to an overpressure or temperature fault: replace the
second fault in the defined delay of the reagents cooling remains active, chiller
even with instrument restarting) (2) Check chiller wiring
0x10900D Reagent cooling function is Reagent cooling function is deactivated Reagent cooling function is deactivated by FSE.
deactivated by ParamManager Reactivate this function to correct the default.
(Cooling.IsDeactivated on True)
REAGENT COOLING
0x104302 The temperature of the cooling of (1) Instrument is starting (1) Normal message during start of the instrument (during normal temperature
the reagents bottles is upper than (2) Reagents cooling failure: decreasing 30min)
77°F (25°C) (reagents are unusable) • liquid is missing in the cooling (2) Check the reagents cooling system:
system; • check and eventually fill the liquid level in the chiller;
• the fan dos not work and/or • change the chiller
the air blown is not warm. (3a) Check temperature sensor calibration
(3) Failure of measuring chain (3b) Check temperature sensor wiring
0x104303 The temperature of the cooling of (1) Instrument is starting (1) Normal message during start of the instrument (during normal temperature
the reagents bottles is included (2) Reagents cooling failure: decreasing 30min)
between 64.4°F (18°C) and 77°F • liquid is missing in the cooling (2) Check the reagents cooling system:
(25°C) (out of range, but reagents system; • check and eventually fill the liquid level in the chiller;
are usable) • the fan dos not work and/or • change the chiller.
the air blown is not warm. (3a) Check temperature sensor calibration
(3) Failure of measuring chain (3b) Check temperature sensor wiring
7.13 Sample Rack

SAMPLE RACK
0x018413 After an access to the instrument, Sample bloc removed during access (1) Sample rack moved during access
0x018B1D sample bloc is missing (2) If the rack is present, rack detection board failure:
See error code 0x018B35 on page 401
0x018413 During return, the gripper closes The head of the sample bloc is (1) Check sample rack integrity
0x018B36 without rack detection damaged (2) Check transport arm position during rack return and if necessary perform sample
area teaching
(3) Perform gripper calibration
0x018B35 A rack is still detected after its (1) Rack inserted again by user (1) Sample rack can not be inserted just after its return
return (2) Sensor failure • Wait 5s.
• Check sample racks conformity
(2) Rack detection board failure:
• Check rack detection board integrity
• Check rack detection board wiring (LED status on applicative board)
• Change rack detection board or applicative board
0x104905 A bar code read or entered (1) Input error (1) Input again the sample bar code
0x104906 manually is the same as a bar code (2) Real duplicates (2) Check any duplicates, Instrument doesn't works with many tubes with same bar
still in the instrument code
Sample Rack
IH-500 | 401
0x108B3E A sample rack is missing Sample rack removed by user (1) Sample rack removed voluntary
(2) If the rack is present, rack detection board failure
See error code 0x018B35 on page 401
7.14 Software
402 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
SOFTWARE
0x018B01 Software exception. Unmanaged (1) Unmanaged error (1) Unmanaged default: The instrument stops after an error (check previous error)
default. (2) Bug software (2) Otherwise, contact instrument support to ask analyses
0x018B02 Sequence forbidden states: {0} The status of the instrument can not Check the status of the instrument.
allow the action. Acknowledge all errors.
0x018B03 Missing required states: {0} The status of the instrument can not Check the status of the instrument.
0x018B04 Not authorized states: {0} The status of the instrument can not Check the status of the instrument.
0x018B06 Position not adjusted Position not adjusted (status not Check and validate the adjustment.
validated)
0x018B07 Position not found Position not adjusted (status not Check and validate the adjustment.
validated)
0x018B09 Destination not allowed. Transfer by the transport arm not Use an other position to do the transfer.
possible (the trajectories do not exist).
0x018B0A Drawer open, impossible to start Drawer open during a transport arm Close and do not open the drawer during the transport arm transfer.
the sequence. transfer.
0x103002 APFChecker: The maximum Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
duration between the dispense and investigation.
the incubation is reached
(controlled at this end of the
process)
0x103003 APFChecker: The minimal duration Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
of the incubation is not reached investigation.
process)
duration between the incubation investigation.
and the centrifugation is reached
(controled at this end of the
process)
duration between the dispense and investigation.
the centrifugation is reached
(controled at this end of the
process)
waiting time on the centrifuge is investigation.
reached (controlled at this end of
the process)
SOFTWARE
0x103007 APFChecker: The minimal duration Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
of the centrifugation is not reached investigation.
process)
0x103008 The maximum time for an open well Process issue For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
is reached. investigation.
0x103009 APFChecker: An expired reagent Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
vial was used during the test investigation.
0x103010 APFChecker: An expired gel card Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
was used during the test investigation.
0x103011 APFChecker: An expired diluent Non-compliant APF For more details, contact the Bio-Rad customer support. Send the snapshot for
rack was used during the test investigation.
0x104921 Length of the sample bar code is Too long bar code Used conform bar code (less than 30 digits)
upper to parameters (30 digits)
0x104923 Image not found during the Image corrupted Check the integrity of the archive folder.
0x104924 transmission of the picture well
0x104D01 Test deleted (1) Test deleted with Stop all Test deleted done by user
0x104D02 (2) Test to repeat launch (first test
0x104D03 deleted with 4D02 and new test
created)
0x104D04
(3) Test deleted by DMS
(4) Test with missing resources
deleted by sample rack removing
0x104D10 On-board time for the gel card On-Board Time management Remove the gel card.
expired
0x104D11 On-board time for the diluent rack On-Board Time management Remove the diluent.
expired
0x104D13 QC flag disabled. QC flag disabled by the user. Enable the QC flag and start a new test.
0x104D14 The user sent the interpretation No issue. -
with the function “Send result to
DMS”.
0x104D15 The user disables the QC flag for No issue. -
QC.
0x104D16 On board time option disabled for No issue. -
gel cards
diluent racks
IH-500 | 403
reagents
Software
404 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
SOFTWARE
0x104D19 On board time status for the No issue. -
reagent not sent by the DMS, but
validated by the user.
0x104D20 On board time allowed for the No issue. -
reagent is reached, but validated by
the user.
0x104D21 On board time status for the No issue. -
reagent not sent by the DMS, but
validated by the user.
0x105001 Incorrect file name Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
0x105002 Error during APF file import. File Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
doesn't concern IH-500
0x105003 Error during APF file import. Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
Incorrect file version
0x105004 Error during APF file import. File Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
doesn't concern consumables
used on the instrument
0x105005 Error during APF file import. Same Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
or lower version of the APF file still
imported
0x105006 Error during APF file import. Invalid Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
XML file (corrupted file)
data (corrupted file)
checksum invalid (corrupted file)
0x105010 Error during APF file import. Data Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
insert failed
0x105010 Error during APF file import. Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
0x105011 Pipetting weighting are not
compatible with the data from the
instrument.
0x105012 Error during APF file import. APF incompatible Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file
Incompatible NPAC with generic
gel card
0x105014 Error during vision files import. Corrupted file Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
0x105015 Error during flag files import. Corrupted file Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
0x105016 Error during APF files import. Vision Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
parameters not found.
0x105017 Error during APF files import. Non-compliant APF Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
0x105018 External media used for a snapshot Media full. Check the external device
full.
SOFTWARE
0x105019 External media used for a snapshot Name of the external media not found Check the connection of the external device
not found.
0x105200 Error during translation files import. Corrupted file Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
0x105201 Error during translation files import. The file does not contain translation Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
data.
0x105202 Error during translation files import. Incorrect file version. Non-compliant file. Start again with a new file.
0x108B3D Weekly maintenance expired Weekly maintenance expired Perform the weekly maintenance.
7.15 Solid Waste

SOLID WASTE
0x018B23 Solid waste is open Unloading in progress Close the solid waste and check contact between electromagnetic latch and magnet
Otherwise, see error code 0x018B24 on page 405.
0x018B24 Solid waste is still present after (1) Waste drawer blocked (1) Check that waste is not blocked or closed too quickly (1s after open)
unlock (2) Electromagnetic latch failure (2a) Check electromagnetic latch control
(2b) Check electromagnetic latch status with service software
• If not, check status on the applicative board
• If not, check electromagnetic latch wiring
• If not, change electromagnetic latch or applicative board
0x018B25 The solid waste reaches the filling Solid waste overflow (1) Empty the solid waste
security limit (limit reached or (2) Check that waste cover is correctly on the front of the waste.
overflow detected by sensor)
(3) If the waste is empty and if overflow sensor has been activated:
Software forbids new test launch • Check filling sensor adjustment
and does not trash used • Check filling sensor wiring
consumables any more
0x104801 The solid waste reaches the early Counter reaches the early warning limit Empty the solid waste
warning limit (ordinary operation)
Only information message, no
impact on the instrument
0x104802 The solid waste reaches the Solid waste full Empty the solid waste
warning limit
Software forbids new test launch
but still trashes used consumables
IH-500 | 405
Solid Waste
7.16 Vision Station
406 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
VISION STATION
0x018504 During first identification the gel Not conform inserted gel card Check that the gel card corresponds to an APF managed by the instrument
0x104902 card bar code is in incorrect format
/ type
0x01880B During image acquisition, the Camera image acquisition default (1) Check camera integrity and USB connexion between camera and PC
camera can not make it (black (2) If not OK, change the camera, the USB cable then the computer
picture or camera default) even
after many try and camera reset
0x018901 During sample bloc identification (1) Wrong bar code orientation (1) Check sample tube orientation in the bloc
many different codes are read on (2) Bad sticker (2) Check integrity and quality of the bar code used (see specifications in user
the same sample tube place manual)
(3) Unknown bar code type used
(4) Bar code reader failure (3) Check that bar code is supported by the reader (see specification in the user
manual)
0x018902 During sample bloc identification, (1) Unknown bar code type used (1) Check presence, order and integrity of the separation stickers on the sample
sample tube type of the sample (2) Missing or damaged separation bloc
bloc is unreadable or unknown stickers (2) Check that used bar code is conform to user manual specification
(3) Bar code reader failure (3) Check bar code reader (wiring, clean)
0x018903 During sample bloc identification, (1) Missing or damaged separation (1) Check presence, order and integrity of the separation stickers on the sample
presence or order of the separators sticker bloc
is not conform (2) Bar code reader failure (2) Check bar code reader (wiring, clean,...)
0x018B52 Can not perform the sample Settings for low volume or pediatric Adjust the position for the low volume tubes and for the pediatric tubes.
identification on rack type 2 or 6. tubes not defined.
0x018F04 During air gap control, gel card bar (1) Gel card moved manually during (1) User error
code is different to the one process (2) Send LOG files and pictures to instrument support to perform complete
expected (2) Software bug expertise
0x018F04 During well reading, gel card bar (1) Gel card moved manually during (1) User error
code is different to the one process (2) Send LOG files and pictures to instrument support to perform complete
expected (2) Software bug expertise
0x018F0C During recalibration, a problem is (1) An object is present (1) Check there is no dust or spot on the backlight or the lens of the camera
0x018F0E detected on the lighting (back (2) Lighting failure (2) Check backlight homogeneity (LED out of order)
ground brightness average or CV (3) Camera or lens failure (3) Check Camera clearness and aperture adjustment
out of range or reference
brightness out of range)
0x018F0D During first identification the gel (1) Labeling faulty (1) Check gel card sticker
card bar code is unreadable (2) Camera clearness adjustment (2) Check Camera clearness adjustment
default (3) If the gel card vibrates, it could be a bad gel card taking into the store (the card
(3) Significant vibration during slides into the legs of the gripper). Check store adjustments and clean the
identification gripper legs
VISION STATION
0x018F0D During the air gap control, the (1) Labeling faulty (1) Check gel card sticker
barcode of the gel card is illegible (2) Camera clearness adjustment (2) Check Camera clearness adjustment
(even after the second attempt) default (3) If the gel card vibrates, it could be a bad gel card taking into the store (the card
0x018F0D During the interpretation of the (1) Labeling faulty (1) Check gel card sticker
wells, the barcode of the gel card is (2) Camera clearness adjustment (2) Check Camera clearness adjustment
illegible (even after the second default (3) If the gel card vibrates, it could be a bad gel card taking into the store (the card
attempt)
0x018F10 During recalibration, lighting is (1) Lens or backlight dusty (1) Check there is no dust or spot on the backlight or the lens of the camera
0x018F14 found failed (Exposure out of range (2) Backlight failure (2) Check backlight homogeneity (LED out of order)
or brightness gap of one of the
0x018803 (3) Camera failure (3) Check Camera clearness and aperture adjustment
color channels or impossible
0x018804 background management)
0x018F11 During vision station adjustment, (1) Camera not enough adjusted (1a) Check there is no dust or spot on the backlight or the lens of the camera
0x018805 white balance adjustment is (2) Lighting failure (1b) Check there is no external lighting source which could disturb the vision station
impossible (expected exposure out
0x018806 (3) Camera or lens failure (1c) Check that adjustments are still correct (thread sealing present)
of range or impossible white
(2) Check backlight homogeneity (LED out of order)
balance management)
(3) Check Camera clearness and aperture adjustment
0x018808 exposure time adjustment is (2) Lighting failure (1b) Check if no external lighting source could disturb the vision station
impossible (expected exposure out
0x018809 (3) Camera or lens failure (1c) Check that adjustments are still correct (thread sealing present)
of range or impossible white
balance management) (2) Check backlight homogeneity (LED out of order)
0x018F15 lighting control failed (back ground (2) Lighting failure (1b) Check if no external lighting source could disturb the vision station
brightness or expected exposure (3) Camera or lens failure (1c) Check that adjustments are still correct (thread sealing present)
out of range)
(2) Check backlight homogeneity (LED out of order)
0x0B8807 Camera communication failure Camera communication failure (1) Check camera integrity and USB connexion between camera and PC
during initialization or run (2) Check that camera is found by windows
If not OK, change the camera, the USB cable then the computer
0x104901 During first identification the gel Out of date gel card Check that the expiry date is coherent, If yes, check date configuration of the
card is out of date computer
0x104903 A cap is detected on a sample tube (1) Cap present on a sample tube (1) Check there is no cap on the sample tube
(2) Cap detection function failure (2) Check top of sample tube (no default, dried blood or sticker on the top)
Vision Station
See user manual
IH-500 | 407
408 | IH-500
Troubleshooting
VISION STATION
0x104904 During sample bloc identification, a (1) Wrong bar code orientation (1) Check sample tube orientation in the bloc
sample tube bar code is (2) Bad sticker (2) Check integrity and quality of the bar code used (see specifications in user
unreadable (3) Unknown bar code type used manual)
(4) Bar code reader failure (3) Check that bar code is supported by the reader (see specification in the user
manual)
(4) Check wiring between bar code reader and applicative board
(5) Change the bar code reader
0x104907 A cap is detected on a reagent vial (1) Cap present on a reagent vial (1) Check there is no cap on the reagent vial
(2) Cap detection function failure (2) Check the reagent vial neck (no default)
See user manual
0x104908 During reagent vial identification, its (1) Wrong orientation of the reagent (1) Check vial position in the drawer
bar code is unreadable (even after vial (2) Check vial sticker integrity
2nd try) (2) Bad sticker (3) Check Camera clearness adjustment
(3) Camera clearness adjustment (4) External vibration
default
(4) Significant vibration during
identification
0x104909 During diluent rack identification, its (1) Bad sticker (1) Check vial sticker integrity
bar code is unreadable (even after (2) Camera clearness adjustment (2) Check Camera clearness adjustment
2nd try) default (3) External vibration
(3) Significant vibration during
identification
0x104910 During first identification the diluent Out of date diluent rack (1) Check that the expiry date is coherent,
rack is out of date (2) Check date configuration of the computer
0x104910 During instrument initialization, the Expiry date reached (1) Check that the expiry date is coherent,
diluent rack is detected out of date (2) If yes, check date configuration of the computer
0x104911 During first identification the Out of date reagent (1) Check that the expiry date is coherent,
reagent is out of date (2) Check date configuration of the computer
0x104912 During gel control, a well is (1) Still used well (1) Check that the well is empty
detected not empty (2) Foreign object in the gel or on the (2) Check there is no foreign object (dust in or out of the well)
card
0x104913 During first identification the Not conform inserted reagent Check that the reagent corresponds to an APF managed by the instrument
reagent is in incorrect format / type
0x104914 During first identification the diluent Not conform inserted diluent rack Check that the diluent rack corresponds to an APF managed by the instrument
rack is in incorrect format / type
0x104915 During start, vision station is not Calibration not performed With service software, check the camera calibration (see Vision Station Menu on
calibrated page 163 in the service manual)
0x104917 During identification after an Sample bloc inversion by user Forbidden action during access to the pipetting area
access, a sample bloc is detected
different from its definition before
access
VISION STATION
0x104918 When identifying a gel card, this Gel card already used. (1) Check the gel card barcode.
one is detected as already used in (2) Discard the gel card if it was used,
the instrument (This case includes
balancing cards. The software
must return the gel card if this one
has already been used as a
balancing card in the instrument.).
0x104919 During diluent rack first Still used diluent rack User error. Still used diluent rack insertion forbidden
identification, the rack is detected
still used in the instrument
0x104920 During identification after an Rack inversion by user Forbidden action during access to the pipetting area
access, a diluent rack is detected
different from its definition before
access
0x104920 During instrument initialization, the Manipulation during stop Forbidden action when the instrument is stopped
diluent rack identification is
detected different from its definition
before stop
0x104920 During instrument initialization, the (1) Damaged sticker (1) Check integrity of the bar code used
bar code diluent rack is unreadable (2) Reading default on the vision (2) Check clearness adjustment and check there is no dust or spot on the backlight
(even after the 2nd try) station or the lens of the camera
0x104925 Gel control not activated. Gel control disabled by the user. -
0x104926 Structure of the reagent vial Incorrect or unknown barcode (1) Check the vial barcode.
barcode incorrect. (2) Check if the corresponding APF is correctly loaded.
0x104B05 During identification after an Rack inversion, adding, or removing by Forbidden action during access to the pipetting area
0x104B04 access, a sample tube is detected user
0x104917 different from its definition before
access or no more present or new
present
0xmm030F During sample bloc identification, Bar code reader failure (1) Check wiring between bar code reader and applicative board
0x018904 communication with bar code (2) Change the bar code reader
reader failed
Vision Station
IH-500 | 409
Troubleshooting
410 | IH-500
8 Spare Parts List and
Accessories
The content of this chapter was extracted to create a specific and separate manual.
The spare parts manual describes in detail all available spare parts and their location in the instrument.
See Spare Parts Book H009345.
IH-500 | 411
Spare Parts List and Accessories
412 | IH-500
9 Decommissioning, Storage and
Transport
This chapter describes the measures to take in order to decommission a IH-500, store it and dispose
of it.
For decommissioning, short term or long term storage, clean and purge the hydraulic circuit.
See chapter Prepare for Shipment on page 322.
9.1 Decommissioning
In a general manner, the IH-500 is taken out of operation before being moved, repaired or stored for a
further use.
b Indecontaminate
order to prevent any health hazard during the procedure, it is required to
the IH-500.
A Decontaminate the IH-500 in accordance with the prescriptions.

See chapter Cleaning and Decontamination Instructions on page 348.
B Disconnect the power cable and prepare the unused fuses.

See chapter Electrical Connection on page 110.
C Proceed in the reverse order of the chapter Installation on page 89 to store all the
accessories.
See Equipment and Accessories on page 417 to find what is equipment and
what is optional accessories.
See Installation on page 89 to follow the procedure in reverse order.
D Proceed in the reverse order of the section Blocking Device Removal on page 112
to block the 3 axes.
IH-500 | 413
Decommissioning, Storage and Transport
b This operation is mandatory to avoid damaging the instrument.

E Fill out the decontamination certificate after completing the decontamination
procedure. A sample certificate to copy can be found in the Appendix.
See chapter Decontamination Certificate on page 418.
F Place the decontamination certificate on the IH-500.
G Refer to the appropriate chapter before moving the instrument.

See chapter Transport on page 416.
9.2 Storage
When it is planned not to use the instrument for a prolonged period, specific operations must be
considered.
9.2.1 Short Term Storage in Laboratory Conditions

If the instrument is not to be used for several weeks but will remain in a laboratory environment, no
wrapping or packing is required.
Conditions:
• drawers and doors closed.
• temperature: 18°C (64.4°F) to 28°C (82.4°F);
• relative humidity: 5 to 80% (without condensation);
• protected against direct sunlight and dust.
b not used!
Weekly maintenance operations must be performed every week even if the instrument is
9.2.2 Other Storage Conditions

When the instrument is stored outside laboratory conditions or if it is stored for a long term storage, the
instrument must be wrapped and stored in a room protected against condensation under the following
conditions:
• pack the instrument;
See chapter Packing on page 414.
• temperature: -20°C (-4°F) to +55°C (+131°F);
• relative humidity: 5 to 80% (without condensation);
• protected against direct sunlight and dust.
9.3 Packing
Packing is essential before shipping or when the IH-500 must be stored outside laboratory conditions
or for a long term storage.
b frame and the 2 crossbars, and not with the instrument’s 4 feet.
Make sure that the contact between the IH-500 and the pallet is done with the instrument
414 | IH-500
Disposal
b instrument.
Make sure that the 2 packing flange are in a correct position and maintains correctly the
k Use the original manufacturer's box to wrap the instrument.

k transportation, add a new shockwatch, tiltwatch and labels of location on packing (spies).
On external casing, in order to protect the instrument against the shocks and tilt during
A Take the IH-500 out of operation.

See chapter Decommissioning on page 413.
B Prepare and place the wrapping elements on each side of the IH-500.
C Proceed in the reverse order of the section Installation on page 89 to place the
IH-500 on the pallet and to assemble the different panels.
D Place the IH-500 in the crate box. Over it, place the intermediate cardboard
element, the cables and all the technical documentation.
E Join the following documents to the box:

• decontamination certificate.
See chapter Decontamination Certificate on page 418.
9.4 Disposal
This chapter describes the appropriate disposal of the IH-500.
Prerequisites
b The
IH-500 must be decontaminated before disposal.
See Cleaning on page 348 and Decontamination on page 348.
The IH-500 must be taken out of service (see Decommissioning on page 413).
9.4.1 Disassembly
Only the technical personnel is authorized to disassemble the instrument.
k The
pieces and assemblies of the IH-500, disassembled by qualified personnel, may be reused
after obtaining the manufacturer’s authorization. The objectives of the future application must be
described in details.
9.4.2 Disposal Locations

Local Disposal Locations
In general, the nearest disposal locations are established in conformance with the currently applicable
laws. Ask any question to the local authorities.
9.4.3 Returning to the Manufacturer

If there is no practical disposal place, the IH-500 may be returned to your Bio-Rad dealer.
IH-500 | 415
Decommissioning, Storage and Transport
9.4.4 Dismantling
The IH-500 must be returned to an authorized point of destruction.
b manner. Consequently, every applicable laws and bylaws must be respected.

In order to protect people and environment, the IH-500 must be destroyed in an adequate
k IH-500 materials.
Refer to the IH-500 dismantling manual for further instructions. This dismantling manual lists all
9.5 Transport
9.5.1 Recommended Means of Transportation
Domestic
The appropriate means for domestic transportation are by truck, by postal parcel and by train.
International and overseas

For international and overseas transportation, give the IH-500 in its original package to a shipping
agent.
9.5.2 Transportation Data

Commissioning (Crates) Dimensions and Weights
See chapter Dimensions and Weight on page 26.
b During transportation, ensure that the packaging instructions are respectfully followed.
See chapter Packing on page 414.
Figure 450.
416 | IH-500
10 Appendix
This chapter contains the additional and helpful documents to be used during maintenance on IH-500
as schematic diagrams, maintenance record, decontamination certificate, and more.
10.1 Equipment and Accessories

10.1.1 IH-500 Equipment List
Description Quantity Transportation Storage
IH-500 1 -
Fuse 6.3x32 time lag T 250V 2 Solid waste bin
Keyboard kit (Velcro fastener) 1 Solid waste bin
Handheld barcode scanner 1 Solid waste area
Barcode scanner holder 1 Solid waste bin
Samples rack 5 In place
Sample block with spring 10 Solid waste bin
Sample block barcode label set 1 Liquid container area
STAT sample block barcode label set 1 Liquid container area
Reagents removable tray 1 In place
Piercing tip 2 Solid waste bin
Gel cards block 8 Solid waste bin
Cleaning liquid container 1 In place
Decontamination liquid container (NaOH) 1 In place
System liquid container 2 In place
Liquid waste container 2 In place
Bin cover 1 Solid waste bin
Solid waste bin 1 Solid waste area
QC report 1 Main box
User Manuals 1 Main box
IH-500 | 417
Appendix
10.1.2 Optional Accessories

Description Quantity Transportation Storage
Keyboard (specific country) 1 Main box
Keyboard (protection) 1 Main box
Power cable (specific country) 1 Main box
Stand-alone PC for IH-Com 1 Specific box
IH-Com software 1 Specific box
IH-Web Remote Validation 1 Specific box
BRiCare Service Support 1 Specific box
Barcode Printer set 1 Specific box
Barcode Scanner Heron HD3430 1 Specific box
UPS (Uninterruptible Power Supply) 220V or 110V 1 Optional table crate or specific crate
Battery pack for UPS 1 Optional table crate or specific crate
Optional table
• Table 1 Optional table crate
• Workstation 1 Optional table crate
• Solid waste bin 1 Optional table crate
2nd Workstation 1 Optional table crate
Lifting IH-500 kit 1 Specific box
10.2 CE Compliance
This instrument is and in-vitro diagnostic medical device and complies with all applicable European
Community Directives and associated harmonized standards, including but not limited to the standards
pertaining to the electrical safety as well as the emission and immunity requirements as specified in IEC
61326-2-6.
10.3 Documents / Forms
k For the following documents, excepting the maintenance table, the official electronic document
can be found on the Bio-Rad website: https://www.bio-radsecretarea.com under Official
forms.
10.3.1 Decontamination Certificate

The IH-500 and its accessories must be cleaned and decontaminated before performing any
maintenance, revision task, before taking the instrument out of service and when preparing for
transportation.
See chapter Suitable Products on page 348.
b conspicuous place.
Fill in a copy of the decontamination certificate and place it on the IH-500, in a
The absence of decontamination certificate may extend the time needed for revision and maintenance.
Bio-Rad shall bill any cleaning and decontamination operation.
k The original certificate must remain in the present manual.
418 | IH-500

'&+%"&+"'&()')%
/
',&+)/
%"$
!'&

&*+),%&+
+)"$'
&*+),%&+'

$&"& '&+%"&+"'&()')%/
+ " &+,)

)-"*#"$()',+*,((')+)**")"')'%'). 1

*.00123405
!"#$% 105
$&'()"*)''("*+ (,( 6''$"(%"&7"(88.4
Appendix
10.3.2 Maintenance Table
k record is required, make a copy and fill in the copy.

The original blank maintenance record must remain in the present manual. When a maintenance
Type Page
Serial number
Maintenance / Defect Action Operator Date
420 | IH-500
Documents / Forms
Maintenance / Defect Action Operator Date
IH-500 | 421
Appendix
10.4 Identification Plate

The identification plate located at the rear of the IH-500 is used for identification and contains the
following information.
IH-500
k just near the cleaning liquid container and USB
A second ID-plate is placed into the instrument, 1
keyboard plug. 100-120/230 VAC

REF 001500 2 50-60 Hz
Max. 1550 VA
SN 0510133
Type of the instrument
1 DiaMed GmbH
Pra Rond 23, 1785 Cressier FR
Power connection (voltage, frequency, power Switzerland
2
consumption) 2019-01-11 3
Date of manufacture (month/year) Made in France
3
4 Unique Device Identification (GTIN-14) IVD

(01)07611969167623
patent http://www.bio-rad.com/en-fr/trademarks 4 (11)190111
RO00007 C
o
(21)0501330
Manufacturer’s reference
p Serial number
This class (B) digital apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003
Manufacturer Figure 451.
x
j European Conformity marking
n In Vitro Diagnostic medical device
Intended use
u
WEEE directive symbol
2D barcode (SN + UDI-DI + date)
422 | IH-500
List of Documents
10.5 List of Documents

10.5.1 User Manuals
The user manuals are available on Bio-Rad website, section «manuals download».
URL: https://www.bio-radsecretarea.com.
10.5.2 Service Manual

The service manual is available on Bio-Rad website, section «manuals download».
URL: https://www.bio-radsecretarea.com.
IH-500 | 423
Appendix
424 | IH-500
10.6
10.6.1
CP10 – E11246
Level detection board
M18990 CP52
PO02
Liquid waste Intermediate tank Pressure sensor
Pump Pa
EV01 EV02
System liquid IN solenoid valve OUT solenoid valve
M20231
Decontamination liquid Intermediate tank
NC NO NO NC Faradized vein
Overflow Pbar
Peristaltic pump tubing FT04
1 2 3 3 2 1
10 μm filter
2 x 16006249
CP21 – E10591
Intermediate tank Float Manifold
16005915 M18341
Level sensor
M20126 Security ring Needle
TU07 – M19788 – 835 mm
12010702
FT03 Complete sampling module M19700
10 μm filter Collect well Washing pot
M18436
Clip
TU09 – M19606 – (1 930 mm)

PO01
TU09 – M19606 – (1 510 mm)

M10668 M10668
M08816
Filling pump
Fluidic Connection (1/2)
well
TU08 – M06119 – 650 mm
M18436
Overflow well
Decontamination
TU06 – M06119 – 188 mm Clip
PO04 – M08816 16005915

2 x 16006249 Washing pump Security ring
TU14 – M19997 – 870 mm
16005915
M19816 Security ring 16006249
Solenoid valve TU10 – M06119 – 340 mm
manifold M19708 16006249
EV07 3 2 1
M19709 M16045
M16311
Isolation solenoid NO NC 1 2 3 3 2 1
valve
20 mm
PO05
M08816 NC NO NO NC
PO03 Waste pump EV06
M19672 EV05
TU05 – M06119 – 162 mm M18436 M16311
Decontamination pump M16311
Clip Common/Overflow
Collect / decontamination
solenoid valve
solenoid valve
TU04 – M06119 – 25 mm
20 mm
TU03 – M06119 – 25 mm TU23 – M06119 TU11 – M06119 – 282 mm
Length to be defined
during installation
3 x 16006249
M19708
FT02 M18436 3 x 16006249
TU17 – M04693 – 400 mm

FT01 M19485
M19263 Solenoid valve M19263 Clip 3 x 16005915
25 μm filter manifold 25 μm filter Security ring
M19259
EV04 M19485
3 2 1 Solenoid valve
M16311
Switching solenoid manifold
valve NO NC EV03
M19260 3 2 1
M16311
TU15 – M19997 – 20 mm
Switching solenoid
valve NO NC
FT05
M19263
25 μm filter
TU18 – M04693 – 100 mm
TU13 – M19787 – 180 mm
TU12 – M19787 – 180 mm
TU02 – M19785 – 115 mm
TU01 – M19785 – 115 mm

CP36 – E10731
CP37 – E10731 M18436 M18436
Connected sensor
Connected sensor Clip CP30 – E10731 CP31 – E10731 Clip
M19259 M19259 Connected sensor Connected sensor
M19259 M19259
M20214 M20214 M20212

TU16 – M19997 – 270 mm
Equipped blue cap Equipped black cap M20209 M19260 M19260

M19260 Equipped blue cap M19260 M19260 M12013 CP32 – E10991 CP33 – E10991 M12013
CP38 – E10592 CP39 – E10592 Decontamination
Maintenance Maintenance Level sensor Level sensor
M20213 liquid container
container container Green cap with label
Presence sensor Presence sensor M18436
Left Right CP34 – E10592 CP35 – E10592
TU19 - TU20 - TU21 - Magnet Left Presence sensor Presence sensor Right
container container CP40 Magnet Magnet Washing
M19405 M19405 M19405 container container
Station
Hydraulic Connections (A00227f-FL Schematics)
CP42 – E10990 CP41 – E10990 E10990

Empty level Empty level TU22 Empty overflow
sensor sensor M19405 Level sensor
Containers M20211 M20211

M20210 M20210 M20208 CP70 – E10840
overflow Overflow sensor Liquid waste container 1 Liquid waste container 2
System liquid container 1 System liquid container 2 Cleaning liquid container
CR-07-
f 2017-124
Fittings M13579 replaced by 16006249 and TU03 & TU04 changed from 20 to 25mm FSE 2020-08-26 MLE 2020-08-26
CR-07-
e 2018-005
PDS module M19999 (0595085) replaced by 12010702 (12010701) FSE 2020-01-15 MLE 2020-01-15 Title:
d
CR-07-
2017-122
Security ring M06039 replaced by 16005915 FSE 2019-05-28 MLE 2019-06-11
IH-500 fluidic connection
CR-07-
d 2018-071
TU08 length : 590mm changed to 650mm GLE 2019-05-10 MLE 2019-06-11
c 2015-297 E09998 replaced by E11246 MLE 2017-04-11 YLA 2017-04-11

Ref: A00227f-FL
b 2015-044 M20027 and M20138 Fitting replacement (respectively by M20418 and M20419) MLE 2015-02-09 XTR 2015-02-09
Ind Change Description Author Date Reviewer Date
Page: 1 / 2
Document history No copy, nor communication allowed
10.6.2
In
M20418 With insulating foam
M20418 Out
With insulating foam

TU26 – M19405 - 180 mm
Out
TU27 – M19405 - 57 mm
Reagent Cooling (2/2)
M20419
M20285
M20380
Reagent cooling tubing kit
M20419
In Reagent plate
TU24 – M20046 - 365 mm With insulating foam
M20285
M20268
Reagent module
TU25 – M20046 - 420 mm
M20144 M20145
Cooling pump
Reagent cooling module
Title: IH-500 reagent cooling

Ref: A00227f-FL
See Page 1
Page: 2 / 2
Hydraulic Connections (A00227f-FL Schematics)
IH-500 | 425
Appendix
426 | IH-500
10.7
5 4 3 2 1
10.7.1
USER ACCESS
Touchscreen IHM
+ loud speaker
E11272
D ON/OFF D
Vision station
Ethernet Computer USB
USB Camera
Ethernet E10030 RS232
barcode Barcode reader
12V
ON/OFF Backlight
PSON
RS232
E10092
6 Axis Robot Controler Power supply unit Frontlight

CA08 (option)
Automate Schematic (1/8)
(Transport Arm)
Power management board
Security switch
M20720 E09982 Sheet 7
C C
Sheet 8
BSB
Detection
sensor
Teach
RS232
Mapping
sensor
CA05 CA02 CA04 CA01
CA06
Incubator Pipetting applicative X,Y,Z axies Centrifuge applicative
board Fluidic board Solid waste board
stepper motor
(with 3 Novicore) management
Gripper applicative I/O Board
board Reagent
(agitation + cooling) Teach Liquid
E10904 waste E09968
E09980 E09972
Security
(doors, ..) Fluidics
B CA03 Centrifuge 1 B
DC motor
Consummable PDS applicative board
loading (x2) Ionisor
Robot arm Centrifuge 2
DC motor
Int/ext temp. CA13
management E09974 CA09
Cooling driver board
Level
ON/OFF detection Fan E10928
Backlight External status PDS module board
RS232 12010702 E11246

Electrical Connections (A00227i-EL Schematics)
Barcode Centrifuge
CA07 Sample rack Pipetting robot
cooling
detection board
A E09984 A
Sheet 3 Sheet 4 Sheet 5
/&50 !3'6PRGXOH &0$3%2 TITLE :
N&5$50&RQWUROHU0!0 &0$3%5 Automate schematic
N&5&RUHFWLRQ(UUHXUSODQ( !( 3%23%5
j 2017-011 TouchScreen E10546 replaced by E11272 CMA 07/07/2017 PBO 07/07/2017
E09978 i 2016-081 Label USB between computer and power supply replace by 12V CMA 12/04/2017 PBO 12/04/2017 SHEET : 1/8
Sample status h 2015-297 E09998 replacedby E11246 PBR 17/05/2016 PBO 17/05/2016
Add cable E11252 REF. :
GNO 03/01/2012 JNE 11/07/2014
E10232 c 2014-051 E09970 board replaced by E10904
E10063 board replaced by E10928 A00227 l
Sheet 2 Ind AM DESCRIPTION AUTHOR DATE REVIEWER DATE
5 4 3 2 1
10.7.2
5 4 3 2 1
CA05
Power supply unit I/O board Reagent agitation
Power supply (24V, +VMOT) (JP91) E10704
JP39 E10113
JP76 (MO11) Motor (stepper)
Cooling power supply (JP92) E10705 JP41 (CC11) Encoder sensor E10610
D D
Step by step μcontroller E10552
JP75
E10706 JP40
Incubator power supply (JP93) Motor Shaking
I/O Board (2/8)
Motor Shaking encoder sensor

E10983 Backlight
Reagent Cooling Status JP77 E10551 (CP57) Backlight E10092
JP69 E10854 (CP58) External temperature sensor

JP68 E09990
E10626 E10124 (CP59) Internal temperature sensor for
Barcode reader (CP53) E10549 JP72 JP62 E09990
preparation area
Solid Waste Full sensor (CP68) E10194 E10556 E10125 Option (CP60) Internal temperature sensor for
JP48 JP63 E08818
E10660 general machine
Solid waste CP77 Reagent cooling

JP49
JP50 CP78 pipes Reagent plate

C C
(MO13) Chiller
JP56 E10115
Doors lock E10886 or E11191
Consumable dock right E10122 (CP66) Temperature
JP66 sensor regulation
electromagnetic holder + door sensor
CP54 E10123 (CP67) Temperature
E10164 E10118 JP57 I/O μcontroller JP67 sensor control E11248
Consumable dock left Leds lanes M20268

electromagnetic holder + door sensor CP55 Incubator JP61
E10164 Reagent Cooling (On/Off + Regulation)
Temperature outside sensor
E10996 Main frame
E10554 E10623 Temperature inside sensors
Door electromagnetic holder + door sensor CP71 JP59 Temperature incubator sensors
E10164 Temperature cooling sensors
E10555 Synchronisation robot Incubator
Waste solid electromagnetic holder + Waste CP72 JP47 Status machine
solid sensor E10116
E10164 Bar code Reader JP55 (CP63) Heating element
E09961
Sample Racks locked states
Consumables docks holders JP64 E10120 (CP61) Front Temperature sensor (regulation)
E08818
Door holder
B
External status Switch door JP65 E10121 (CP62) Rear Temperature sensor B
E08818
Waste full sensor
External status Waste presence sensor
red, green, yellow, blue E10117 E10324
CP56 JP71
+ accessibility secure zone Sample loading
E10165 CA07
E10553 Sample racks detection board
JP70 JP85
E10707 JP58
Door Lock Sensor for CA08
E10255 JP87
E11255 JP42
0595161 Shunt for pipetor JP38
E09984 JP86
E09978 JP43
(CP75) Samples status

E10232
A A
i 2016-081 Reagent plate: 2xE08818 => E11248 PBO 07/01/2016 PBR 08/01/2017
TITLE :
I/O board
g 2016-052 Cordon Switch E10625=>E11255; Suppression Switch porte E008761 (CP76) PBO 15/03/2016 PBR 17/03/2016
2015-210 E10886 => E10886 or E11191
c 2014-051 Temp board E08818 replaced by E09990 for external and internal areas
SHEET : 2/8
E10929 cable deleted
PBO 27/05/2012 JNE 11/07/2014 REF. :
E10115 cable modification
E10996 cable added
Ind AM DESCRIPTION AUTHOR DATE DATE
A00227 l
REVIEWER
5 4 3 2 1
IH-500 | 427
Appendix
428 | IH-500
10.7.3
5 4 3 2 1
CA03
Needle Safety CA09
PDS applicative
D
JP20 D
board Level detection board
CA02 E10294
JP19 (CP47)
Pipettor (3/8)
E11252 E11246
Pipetting applicative board Needle
NOVI CORE AXE Y NC Y

Y axis step by step motor CA10 Washing pot
Y axis optical encoder
Y axis origin
Sortie NPN Level detection Pipetting
JP36 Touch probe connective
Entrée TTL 1 board
JP05
Entrée TTL 2
E07722
CA08 JP22 M16915 (EV02) OUT Valve
JP06
NOVI CORE AXE X NC X M16915
Power management JP23 (EV01) IN Valve
C board X axis step by step motor C
X axis optical encoder Cable chain M19998 (PO02) Micropump
X axis origin JP27
Power supply JP88 BSB JP04 Level detection
E10701 Touch probe E10563 (CP52) Pressure sensor
12009166
JP12
Logic
JP03
E09982 E10099
JP14
JP25
CA12 16005360
CA04 E07722 E10564 JC02
Presure and temperature board
JP09
JP28
Logic extension
Fluidic board NOVI CORE AXE Z NC Z Pressure/vacuum measurement
E10200 E10624 JC01 functions + signal set up SPI
Pump control JP35 JP07 Z axis step by step motor E10565 JP24 communication with PDS board
Power
JP13
Z axis optical encoder
JP08
Z axis origin JP16
Level detection (CP29) I2C temperature sensor
E09972 Touch probe E09986 JP11 JP15 E09974 JP17 JP26 JP18
PDS synchronisation Board power supply +/- 5V
16004804
B PDS Module B
E07722 12010702
+5V power
+7V power
Main frame CA15
E10205 Touch probe board

E08879
E10904 JP10 E08862 (CP49)
E05998
Touch probe
Y axis encoder and origin (CC10) X axis encoder and origin (CC08) Z axis encoder and origin (CC09)
E10796 E09887 E09887
E09889
X axis step by step motor (MO09) Z axis step by step motor (MO08) OPTION
Y axis step by step motor (MO10)
E10172 E10979 E10608
A A
/&50 !3'6PRGXOH &0$3%2 TITLE :

N&53'6LQGXV( !( ! PBO 30/01/2019 PBR 30/01/19
Pipetting robot
( !
PBR 17/05/2016 PBO 17/05/2016
h 2015-297 E09998 replaced by E11246 SHEET : 3/8
Add cable E11252
c 2014-051 E09970 board replaced by E10904 GNO 03/01/2012 JNE 11/07/2014 REF. :
E10063 board replaced by E10928
A00227 l
Ind AM DESCRIPTION AUTHOR DATE REVIEWER DATE
5 4 3 2 1
10.7.4
5 4 3 2 1
From PDS applicative board (via pipetting applicative board)

Power supply unit (JP07) E10904
JP90 E10200
CA04
Valve outputs
E10983 E10703
JP37 JP35 E10728
JP60 (EV05) Overflow / Collect valve M16311
Ionizer E09839
D D
High voltage cable/tip mount Ionizer power supply E10798
JP33 E10729 (EV06) Common / Decontamination valve
Fluidics (4/8)
HV out JP112 M16311

ON/OFF Ionisor
E11252 Power outputs
Ionizer status
(EV03) Liquid waste valve
Vmonitor M16311
Imonitor (EV04) System solution valve

M16311
Logic inputs (EV07) Isolation valve M16311

(CP36) System solution 1 unconnection E10723 E10730
E10731 (PO01) Filling pump
E10598 (diaphragm pump / unidirectionnal PWM) M08816
(CP37) System solution 2 unconnection
E10731 (PO03) Decontamination pump
JP29 (perilstatic pump / bidirectionnal PWM) M19672
JP118 E10598
(CP30) Liquid waste 1 unconnection
C E10731 (PO04) Washing pump C
(CP31) Liquid waste 2 unconnection
E10731 (PO05) Waste pump
(CP32) Liquid waste 1 full E10836

E10991
(CP33) Liquid waste 2 full

E10991
(CP34) Liquid waste 1 presence

E10592 Light
JP119
(CP35) Liquid waste 2 presence Fluidic board E10475 Lighting (AC08)
E10592 JP34 E09418
(CP39) Maintenance solution 2 presence
E10592
Fan
B (CP38) Maintenance solution 1 presence E10473 Global Fan (VN01) B
E10592 JP113 E11280
(CP70) Leak Liquid Sensor E10837

E10840
(CP41) System solution 2 empty

E10990
JP30
(CP42) System solution 1 empty JP120
E10990
JP31
(CP40) Decontamination solution level
E10990
JP114
(CP74) Optional sensor JP117
JP32
(CP21) Tank sensor E10727 JP116
E10591
A A
E09972
TITLE :
Fluidics
/&5$MRXWGXFDEOH(PLVHjODPDVVHFDUFDVVHLRQLVHU CMA 20/04/2020 PBO 20/04/20 SHEET : 4/8
j CR2017-012 Global Fan E09879 replaced by E11280 CMA 07/07/2017 PBO 07/07/2017
c 2014-051 E10801 level sensor replaced by E10990 PBO 27/05/2012 JNE 11/07/2014 REF. :
E10802 level sensor replaced by E10991
A00227 l
5 4 3 2 1
IH-500 | 429
Appendix
430 | IH-500
10.7.5
5 4 3 2 1
D D
CA08 CA01
Power management board Front centrifuge
CP027 PT100 sensor N°2 (Sheet 6) (CP27)
Centrifuges (5/8)
BSB + power supply E10702

JP89 BSB1
+ detection sensor from
gripper Motor + encoder
E10192 (CP44) J2
CC02
E09982
(CP43) J1
E10908 (MO06)
JP02 J3
J4 E09748
CP01
J5
CP02 Main frame
C C
AC01
Rear centrifuge
ON/OFF Cooling: see Centrifuge Cooling (Sheet 6) AC02
CP028 PT100 sensor N°2 (Sheet 6) (CP28)
Motor + encoder
ET01
E10192
CC01 (CP46) J2
ET02
(CP45) J1
Not mounted
JP01 E10908 (MO07) J3
J4 E09748
J5
Main frame
B B
Centrifuge applicative board

E09968
A A
TITLE :
Centrifuges
SHEET : 5/8
REF. :
c 2014-051 First edition GNO 03/01/2012 JNE 11/07/2014
A00227 l
5 4 3 2 1
10.7.6
5 4 3 2 1
CA13
Cooling driver board

JP02
Cooling area 1 (Reagent option)
D AC02 D
JC01
Temperature monitoring
CP02 sensor area 1 (Reagent
option)
DIP SWITCH: SW1
1 = OFF Front centrifuge
2 = ON Front cooling Peltier element
3 = ON E10992
4 = OFF
Centrifuge Cooling (6/8)
Rear cooling Peltier element

E10992
MO01 Temperature monitoring E10822

(Front centrifuge) PT100 sensor N°1 (CP79)
CP03
see Centrifuges (See Sheet 5)
E10827 PT100 sensor N°2 (CP27)
C
HA01+ C
CC01
Fan AC05
CP08 E10824
Rear centrifuge
Cooling area 2
(Front centrifuge) AC03 Front cooling Peltier element
E10992
Cooling area 3
(Rear centrifuge) Rear cooling Peltier element
AC04 E10992
CP11
Temperature monitoring E10822
(Rear centrifuge) PT100 sensor N°1 (CP80)
E10825
CP04
On/OFF Cooling: see Centrifuges (Sheet 2) E10827
CP05 see Centrifuges (See Sheet 5) PT100 sensor N°2 (CP28)
B
AC01 B
CP07
E10928 CP09 JP01 VN01
Power supply
E10826 unit
JP125
A A
TITLE :
Centrifuge cooling
SHEET : 6/8
REF. :
c 2014-051 E10823 Peltier element replaced by E10992 PBO 02/07/2014 JNE 11/07/2014

A00227 l
REVIEWER
5 4 3 2 1
IH-500 | 431
Appendix
432 | IH-500
10.7.7
5 4 3 2 1
OPTION Gripper applicative board download (JP82)

E10586
E10251
&RPSXWHU E10030
COM2 Camera TouchScreen
12V
USB E10669
D D
DVI
E10265 USB
COM1
Sound
E11272
Integration (7/8)
E10252
E11041
Rear panel
RJ45
J205
E10858
USB E11033 USB USB option
E10348
J101 E10885
RJ45 E07498 RJ45 Ethernet option
C C
6 Axis Robot Controler
(Transport Arm) J103 Teach pendant connection
E10792
E10716
E10715
OPTION
Internal panel
JP105 JP100 JP95 E10253
USB E11033 USB Keyboard
RS232 PS-ON 12V
E10249
J1240 J203 J211 JP94 12V
Left panel
E10253 Bar code reader
USB E11033 USB
+24V E11096
J2 Laser sensor
JP96
Touch probe 3RZHUVXSSO\XQLW
E10983
J400
DSI CA06 Outside

B instrument B
Gripper applicative board
J402, J403, J404, J405
E10571
JP84 (MO12) Motor (stepper)
E10102
6 Axis harness JP79 (CC12) Encoder 12010406
E10795
JP83 JP82
JP81 (CP65) Mapping sensor
IPOS3602
E10658
6 axis arm
E10026 E10104 16008287
JP80
E09980 E10352 Touch probe board

E08862 (CP64)
OPTION
A
Touch probe A
E10349
Gripper OPTION
COM2 port from PC
Option for gripper Firmware download /&5$MRXWGXFDEOHPLVHjODPDVVHPRWHXUJULSSHU CMA 20/04/2020 PBO 20/04/20 TITLE :
Disconect E10795 from 6 axis arm N&50! CMA 05/02/2020 PBR 05/02/20 Integration
Connect E10349 between 6 axis arm and E10795 N&5&RUHFWLRQ(UUHXUSODQ( !( PBO 30/01/2019 PBR 30/01/19
Sub D connector is connect to COM2 from PC f 2015-001 La douchette USB E10341V00 devient E11096V00
e 2014-167 Cordon Ethernet: E10797=>E11041 PBO 12/11/2014 JNE 02/12/2014 SHEET : 7/8
e 2014-097 Adapt. Ethernet: E10432=>E07498; Adapt. USB E10431=>E11033 PBO 12/11/2014 JNE 02/12/2014
e 2014-142 Cordon Touch probe: E08878=>E10352 PBO 12/11/2014 JNE 02/12/2014 REF. :
c 2014-051 E08879 cable replaced by E08878 PBO 27/05/2012 JNE 11/07/2014

A00227 l
REVIEWER
5 4 3 2 1
10.7.8
5 4 3 2 1
Power supply unit CA08

E10983 Power management board
E10700
E E10880
Power supply E11007 JP123
Earth CA13
Power input Inlet
E10859 200VDC E10826
P JP125 JP01 Cooling driver board E10928
N E10860
E10855 VAC_IN V+ E11001
+200V
D 50V slot1 CA02 D
0V(200V) E10701
V- JP88 JP04
E11005 Pipetting applicative board E10904
50V slot2 CA01
E09413 and E09414 E10702
F2 JP89 BSB1 Centrifuge applicative board E09968
Primary fuseholder 50V slot3
F1 & F2 Phase
8AT fuse for 230V -> E09411
CA04
20AT fuse for 110V -> E10985 E10703
E09413 and E09414 50V slot4 JP90 JP37 Fluidic board E09972
F1
Primary fuseholder
Neutre CA05
E10704
JP91 JP39 I/O board
Global enable E10869 E10705
JP110 Global enable +24V JP92 JP41
E10861
E10862 E10706
+24V JP93 JP40
E10863
E10707
E10830 E10982 Door JP102 JP58 E09978
E10864 Cover
JP121 DC_OK
LINE
C C
Controller & Power Supply (8/8)
E10856
Filter Power supply
LOAD
750W/24V JP96 See Sheet 7
150W/12V
E10708
+24V J406 24V3
SLOT V+ E11002
+24V DSI
VAC_IN +24V JP108 24V2
+24V Fuses
V- E11005
0V
See SM
for more E10709 J030 200VDC_IN
SLOT V+ E11003
+12V details +24V JP106 J1164 24V3
+12V E10710
V- 0V +24V JP99 J213 24V1
E11005
E10896 E10894
ON/OFF switch G AC Fail Main PWR OK
ON/OFF switch connector J120
JP109 6 Axis Robot Controler
E07560 SLOT V+ E11004
+VMot 200VDC Fail (Fieldbus) Vbus OK
+24V ou E10712 (Transport Arm)
V- E11005
0V Laser Laser
+36V JP107 J212
E10893 Touch probe Touch probe
E10713 Door
B Door JP111 J100 B
M20720
+12V E10249
JP94 DC power Screen
Global CTRL E10877 Global enable
JP101 & AC fail
Vmot Enable E10715
E10878 +12V JP95 12V Computer
E10792
E10865 RS232_2 JP105 RS232
E10829 E10716
JP103 Enable VMOT PS_ON PS_ON
JP100
PC Enable PC_ON/OFF E10030
Junction
box E10987
Capacitiv load board JP122
E09988 JP124 E10852 E10853
BP ON JP98 Start button E09417
Option
JP97 E10248
Fan Touch probe JP104 Fixed touch probe
A E09982 A
M16108 Option
TITLE :
e 2014-097 E10867+E10868=>E11001; E10871+E10872=>E11002; PBO 16/09/2014 JNE 02/12/2014
Controler & power supply
Outlet E10873+E10874=>E11003; E10875+E10876=>E11004; Ajout 4xE11005;
E10866=>E11007; Modif câblage des terres. E10838=>E10983 SHEET : 8/8
E10547 d 2014-051 E10985 replace E10857 ICB-PLE 10/09/2014 FSE 10/09/2014
REF. :
c 2014-051 E10987 cable added PBO 27/05/2012 JNE 11/07/2014
Ind AM DESCRIPTION AUTHOR DATE REVIEWER DATE A00227 l
5 4 3 2 1
IH-500 | 433
Appendix
10.8 Electronic Boards

10.8.1 E09982 - Main Power Supply Board
LED Color Address LED Description
D1 green +VMOT_IN Input +VMOT
D10 green +24V_st_B Power supply (+24V) for transfer robot (Lane 2 and 3)
D11 green +12V_SCREEN Power supply (+12V) for Screen
D12 green +VMOT VMOT = 24V or 36V
D13 green +24V_INT Internal (+24V). Not visible.
D19 green +5V Internal power supply (+5V) for the board. Not visible.
D2 green +12V_IN Input (+12V)
D25 green +24V_REACT Power supply (+24V) control for Reagents
D26 green +24V_PREH Power supply (+24V) control for Gripper
D3 green +24V_BSB Power supply (+24V) for boards: pipetting board, centrifuges board,
fluidic board,analytic (I/O) board.
D4 green +24V_A Power supply (+24V) for gripper, reagents module, centrifuges module
D42 green +24V_COOL_C Power supply (+24V) for Centrifuges cooling
D43 green +200V_OK Power supply (+200V) for Transfer robot.
D5 green +24V_COOL_R Power supply (+24V) for Reagents cooling
D6 green +24V_INCUB Power supply (+24V) for incubator
D7 green +24V_st_A Power supply (+24V) for transfer robot (Lane 1)
D8 green +24V_IN Input (+24V)
D9 green +12V_PC Power supply (+12V) for PC
434 | IH-500
Figure 452.
JP88 JP96 JP107 JP104
JP95 D26
JP94
D12
D1 JP89 JP100 JP109 JP111
JP93 D4
D3
D9 D10
D2 JP91 JP108 JP106 JP98
JP92 D11 JP105
D7 JP123
D6 D25
JP125 D5 D8 JP90 JP102 JP99
D43
D42
Electronic Boards
IH-500 | 435
Appendix
10.8.2 0595034 (E09972) - Fluidic Board

LED Color. Address Description
D1 green +24V power supply unit
D3 blue +5V power supply +5V
D6 green IO_EN ionizer power supply
D8 green IO_DI high voltage presence
D10 green CP32 liquid waste 1 full
D11 green CP70 overflow area sensor (liquid present)
D14 green CP33 liquid waste 2 full
D16 green CP74 optional sensor
D18 green CP40 decontamination liquid empty
D20 green CP41 system liquid 2 empty
D22 green CP42 system liquid 1 empty
D24 green CP21 intermediate tank sensor (tank full)
D25 green CP30 liquid waste 1 unconnexion
D28 green CP34 liquid waste 1 presence
D29 green CP31 liquid waste 2 unconnexion
D32 green CP35 liquid waste 2 presence
D34 green CP36 system liquid 1 unconnexion
D36 green CP38 system liquid 1 presence
D38 green CP37 system liquid 2 unconnexion
D40 green CP39 system liquid 2 presence
D42 blue RESET RESET
D44 green PO03 decontamination pump OUTA
D45 green PO03 decontamination pump OUTB
D47 green EV03 liquid waste solenoid valve (liquid waste 1 or 2)
D48 green EV04 system liquid solenoid valve (system liquid 1 or 2)
D51 green EV05 decontamination well / collect solenoid valve
D52 green EV06 washing well / common solenoid valve
D55 green PO05 waste pump
D56 green PO01/EV07 filling pump / isolation solenoid valve
D59 green PO04 washing pump
D61 green AC08 white lighting
D63 green JP114 additional way out
D64 green VN01 global fan
Firmware Configuration
Description Type Log

FluidicIOBoard green I/O APP
436 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
Figure 453.
IH-500 | 437
Appendix
10.8.3 0595031 (E09978) - I/O Board

LEDs Description

D4 blue +VMOT power supply +VöMOT
D5 green +24V_Heating incubator power supply
D6 green +24V_Cooling cooling power supply
D9 green IN2 input JP44 not used
D15 green IN1 input JP43: sample rack door
D17 green Waste not full solid waste not full
D19 green Waste in solid waste presence
D21 green Out2 output JP50 not used
D26 green PWR_ON +24V-Heating present near heater
D27 green INC_ON PWM heating command
D29 green MR LcK right drawer lock sensor
D31 green MR Drv right drawer drive
D32 green ML Drv left drawer lock sensor
D33 green ML Lck left drawer drive
D35 green RD Lck pipetting area access door lock sensor
D37 green Door Drv pipetting area access door drive
D38 green Waste Drv solid waste lock sensor
D39 green Waste Lck solid waste drive
D41 green stAT1 red visual status (color to confirm)
D42 green Synchro optional synchro
D44 green stAT2 green visual status (color to confirm)
D45 green stAT3 yellow visual status (color to confirm)
D46 green stAT4 blue visual status (color to confirm)
D47 green Rack 1 sample rack n°1 presence
D57 blue Rst RESET
D58 green Backlight backlight
D59 green Init reagent platform motor Init
D65 blue Rst RESET
D69 green LD Lck maintenance access door security sensor

FluidicIOBoardgreen I/O APP
ShakingBoardgreen Axis Control ANO
438 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
JP38 JP58 JP57 JP59 JP47 JP40 JP55 JP56 JP41
JP42
JP70
JP71
JP48 JP53 JP54 JP72
JP41 JP77 JP78 JP61 JP39 JP76
JP75
JP72
JP62 JP64 JP65 JP66 JP67 JP68
Figure 454.
IH-500 | 439
Appendix
10.8.4 0595037 (E10904) - Pipetting Applicative Board

LEDs Description

D1 blue +VMOT power supply +VMOT
D4 green CD_OUT_Y output JP36 not used
D10 green +VPERIPH device power supply
D13 green E_TTL_Y Y axis motor
D14 green E_TTL_X X axis motor
D17 green CODY_0 coder Y
D18 green AUTO_APPRENT XY teaching module
D19 green CODX_0 coder X
D20 green NIV_DET level detection
D21 green CODZ_0 coder Z
D22 green SYNCHRO_PDS synchro PDS
D24 green +VPDS power supply +VPDS
D24 D21 D22 D20 D19 D18 D14 D17 D13
D10
D4
D2
D5
D1
Figure 455.
440 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
10.8.5 0590002 (E07722) - Novi-Core Board

LEDs Description

D1 blue + 5V Power supply (+5V)
Firmware Configuration for NOVI-CORE Boards

X Axis Axis Control ANO
Y Axis Axis Control ANO
Z Axis Axis Control ANO
D1
Figure 456.
IH-500 | 441
Appendix
10.8.6 0595036 (E09974) - PDS Applicative Board

LEDs Description

D2 green / needle safety
D3 green Teach probe
D7 green +24V connection board on pipetting robot
D10 green +5V power supply +5V
D11 blue Rst RESET
D15 green JP23 PDS inlet solenoid valve
D16 green JP22 PDS outlet solenoid valve
D17 green Synchro_PDS synchro PDS
D18 green Niv_det level detect

FluidicIOBoard I/O AOU
D15 D7
D16
D2
D11
D18
D10
D17
D3
Figure 457.
442 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
10.8.7 (E10040) Pressure Board

LEDs Description

D2 blue / Power supply (5V)
D2
Figure 458.
10.8.8 0595029 (E09990) and 0590018 (E08818) Temperature Sensor Board

and 0595179 (E11248) Coated Temperature Sensor Box
LEDs Description

- - - No LED
Figure 459.
IH-500 | 443
Appendix
10.8.9 0595028 (E09980) - Gripper Applicative Board

0595042 (E10026) - Motor Control Board
LEDs Description

D1 white N/A N/A

Gripper motor step/step APN
D1
Figure 460.
444 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
10.8.10 0595035 (E09984) - Sample Rack Detection Board

LEDs Description

- - - No LED
Figure 461.
IH-500 | 445
Appendix
10.8.11 0595030 (E09968) - Centrifuge Applicative Board

LEDs Description

LD1 red LD1 Not used
LD2 red LD2 Not used
LD3 green LD3 CP01 (not used)
LD4 green LD4 CP02 (not used)
LD5 green LD5 BSB1 (+5v)
LD6 green LD6 ON/OFF cooling (AC02)
LD7 green LD7 Not used (AC01)
LD8 green LD8 +Vmot
LD9 green LD9 BSB1 (+24V)

Centrifuge board CC ANX
446 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
LD9
LD8
LD6 LD7
LD5
LD3
LD1
LD4
LD2
Figure 462.
IH-500 | 447
Appendix
10.8.12 0595033 (E10928) - Cooling Driver Board

LEDs Description

LD1 Red LD1 Processor
LD2 green LD2 ON/OFF cooling (CP05)
LD3 green LD3 Not used (CP11)
LD5 green LD5 Fan (AC05)
LD6 green LD6 Cooling are 3 (rear centrifuge, AC04)
LD7 green LD7 Cooling are 2 (front centrifuge, AC03)
LD9 green LD9 BSB
Switch configuration
ON
1 2 3 4
OFF
Figure 463.
Black = position of the switch
448 | IH-500
Electronic Boards
LD9
LD8
LD6
LD7
LD4
LD5
LD1
LD3
LD2
Figure 464.
IH-500 | 449
Appendix
10.8.13 0595162 (E11246) - Level Detection Board

LEDs Description

- - - No LED
Figure 465.
10.8.14 0595032 (E09986) - Pipetting Connective Board

LEDs Description

- - - No LED
Figure 466.
450 | IH-500
10.9
Door
On power
Figure 467.
+12V_IN +Vmot_IN +24V_IN management
board
E10619 E10617 E10617 E10618 E10619 E11125 E10619 E10618 E10618 E10618
Polyswitch
4 1A
4
+24V_INT
+12V_PC +12V_SCREEN +Vmot +24V_BSB +24V_A +24V_COOL_R +24V_COOL_C +24V_INCUB +24V_ST_A +24V_ST_B
5V autoprotected
2.5A
Power Management (Fuses)
Board
internal
power
JP95 JP94 JP88 JP90 JP89 JP91 JP96 JP92 JP125 JP93 JP99 JP106 JP108 JP98 JP97 JP101
PC Screen Pipetting Fluidic Centrifuge I/O board Gripper I/O board Cooling I/O board 6 axis 6 axis 6 axis Start button Fan Global control
applicative board Applicative For reagent Applicative For reagent Driver For Incubator controler controler controler LED
board board agitation board cooling board Stäubli_A Stäubli_B Stäubli_C
Title: Power management

a 2015-031 Fuse on +24V_COOL_R (for reagent cooling) changes from 10A into 15A FSE 2015-01-30 PBR 2015-01-30
Ref: A00227a-EL-Fuses
/ / Creation based on DC-EL-E09982-01b and english translation FSE 2014-07-28
2014-07-28 PBO 2014-07-28
Page: 1 / 1
Power Management (Fuses)
IH-500 | 451
Appendix
452 | IH-500
Index
Index
A I
Alarm Identification plate 422
Behavior 375 IH-500 gauge kit 73
Antibody Screen Testing 61 Installation 89
Instrument 15
B Intended Use 13
Back (instrument) Internal view
General description (rear view) 29
General description 30
Backup 119
L
C Lifting kit 84
Centrifuge
Loading area
12 Gel Cards (general description) 57 General description
General description (rear view) 29
Diluent rack 66
Maintenance
Sample rack 61
Decontaminate 355, 363, 364, 365, 367 Maintenance
Preventive maintenance table 347
Preventive maintenance table (racks) 347
Commissioning Troubleshooting 376
Backup 119
Localization module
General safety requirements 77 Maintenance (table) 347
Global checks 120
Hydraulic checks 121
Removing blocking devices 112
M
Starting procedure 116 Maintenance 345
Complete gripper Major Injury 15
General description 39 Materials 416
Minor Injury 15
D Moderate Injury 15
Decommissioning 413
Decontamination instructions 348 N
Definition Note 16
Warning 16
Disposal 415 P
Doors Packing 414
General description 33 Piercer module
Drawers General description 42
General description 34 Pipettors
Hydraulic checks
E Commissioning 121
Electrical connections (A00227d schematics) 426
Electronic boards Q
General description 68 QC client 125
F R
Forms and lists Rear centrifuge
Accessories list 418 General description 32
Decontamination certificate 420 Removable reagents tray 67
Equipment list 417
List of documents 423 S
Maintenance table 420
Safety
Front
Environmental conditions 18
General description (front view) 28
General instructions 22
Front centrifuge Importance of the instructions 17
General description 32 Non-compliance with rules 17
Sample block barcode label set 62
G Sample Requirements ABO/Rh Testing 61
Global checks (commissioning) 120
Schematics and connection lists 426
Spare parts list and accessories 411
H
Starting procedure 116
Hydraulic connections (A00227-FL schematics) 424
Start-up 116, 117
IH-500 | 453
Index
Storage
Long term 414
Storage drawer
T
Transport 416
Transport arm
Troubleshooting 375
U
Unpacking 79
Remove from the crate 80
Fork truck only 80
V
Vision station
W
Warning
Definition 16
Warranty
Limitations 14
454 | IH-500
Notes
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
.......................................................................................................................................................................................
IH-500 | 455
Bio-Rad
Laboratories
Website www.bio-rad.com/diagnostics Australia 61-2-9914-2800 Austria 43-1-877-8901 Belgium +32 (3)710-53-00 Brazil +55 (31)3689-6600 Canada 1-514-334-4372
Clinical China 86-21-61698500 Czech Republic 420-241-430-532 Denmark +45-4452-1000 Finland 358-9-804-22-00 France 33-1-47-95-60-00 Germany +49 (0)89-318-840
Greece 30-210-7774396 Hong Kong 852-2789-3300 Hungary +36-1-459-6100 India 1800-180-1224 Israel 972-3-9636050 Italy +39-02-216091 Japan 81-3-6361-7070
Diagnostics Group Korea 82-2-3473-4460 Mexico +52 (55)5488-7670 The Netherlands +31-318-540666 New Zealand 64-9-415-2280 Norway +47-23-38-41-30 Poland 48-22-3319999
Portugal 351-21-472-7700 Russia +7-495-721-1404 Singapore 65-6415-3170 South Africa 27-11-442-85-08 Spain 34-91-590-5200 Sweden +46-8-555-127-00
Switzerland +41 (0)26-674-55-05/06 Taiwan 886-2-2578-7189 Thailand 662-651-8311 United Kingdom +44 (0)20-8328-2000
Service Manual H009231 V2.3 © Bio-Rad 12/2020

IH-500_SM_H009231_EN_V2-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

You might also like

IH-500_SM_H009231_EN_V2-3

Uploaded by

Document Information

Copyright

Available Formats

Share this document

Share or Embed Document

Sharing Options

Did you find this document useful?

Is this content inappropriate?

Copyright:

Available Formats

IH-500_SM_H009231_EN_V2-3

Uploaded by

Copyright:

Available Formats

IH-500

Technical Information Contacts

Version Date Modification

Chapter 2 Safety and Handling . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 17

Chapter 5 Checks and Adjustments . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 127

Chapter 6 Maintenance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 345

Chapter 8 Spare Parts List and Accessories . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 411

Chapter 9 Decommissioning, Storage and Transport . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 413

Chapter 10 Appendix . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 417

1.1 Intended Use

b reference to the safety instructions.

Reliability of results is dependent upon compliance with good laboratory practices.

1.2 Warranty Limitation

Each Bio-Rad IH-500 is tested by the manufacturer before shipping.

Bio-Rad Authorized Gel Card

b Only gel cards manufactured by Bio-Rad may be used in the instrument.

Bio-Rad Authorized Reagent

1.4 Typographical Conventions

2.1.2 Importance of the Safety Instructions

2.1.3 Disregarding the Safety Rules

2.2 Environmental Conditions

only in a clean laboratory environment).

b may interfere with proper operation.

IH-500 complies with the EMC requirements according to IEC 61326-2-6.

Emissions test Compliance Electromagnetic environment - guidance

IEC 60601 test

Separation distance according to frequency of transmitter [m]

k For more information, contact your Instrument support.

2.3 General Safety Instructions and Signs

Do not install the IH-500 in the vicinity of inflammable or explosive products.

may cause an electrical discharge.

b appointed by the manufacturer

b the optional table.

Do not place anything on top or above IH-500.

b except in case of an emergency.

b approved by the manufacturer (example: handheld barcode scanner).

k This class (B) apparatus complies with Canadian ICES-003.

Sign Description Explanation

Biological hazard INFECTION

Electrostatic shock ELECTROSTATIC

High voltage danger DO NOT TOUCH - ELECTROCUTION

Sign Description Explanation

Main power switch Power ON

Main power switch Power OFF

Protective earthing EARTH GROUND

2.3.3 Packaging Signs

Maximum and minimum humidity limitation

Maximum and minimum temperature limit

stacking limit by number

Phytosanitary treatment of the pallet

This chapter describes in detail the components of the IH-500.

3.1 Technical Data

Description Instrument Optional table Battery pack UPS (220 V / 110 V)

3.1.2 Electrical Data

k connected to a protective earth.

The instrument must be powered by an earthed mains power supply.

3.1.3 Environmental Conditions

3.2 General Description

1 Pipetting area door (equipped with a window)